diff options
| author | Jeremy Allison <jra@samba.org> | 2001-07-06 00:49:45 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Jeremy Allison <jra@samba.org> | 2001-07-06 00:49:45 +0000 |
| commit | fb1e289408cb8de4b8f9b988c56aa6d64df9b622 (patch) | |
| tree | 9a8a56b622404f352d416cd7ddd0354f030b332e /docs/htmldocs | |
| parent | 6ad113dce11db901ff666dac9a34e74f7b763f14 (diff) | |
| download | samba-fb1e289408cb8de4b8f9b988c56aa6d64df9b622.tar.gz samba-fb1e289408cb8de4b8f9b988c56aa6d64df9b622.tar.xz samba-fb1e289408cb8de4b8f9b988c56aa6d64df9b622.zip | |
Syncup getting ready for release.
Jeremy.
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/htmldocs')
34 files changed, 9594 insertions, 4600 deletions
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/ENCRYPTION.html b/docs/htmldocs/ENCRYPTION.html index f7424be11a4..cff06c4822a 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/ENCRYPTION.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/ENCRYPTION.html @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ NAME="AEN18" ><P >The unix and SMB password encryption techniques seem similar on the surface. This similarity is, however, only skin deep. The unix - scheme typically sends clear text passwords over the nextwork when + scheme typically sends clear text passwords over the network when logging in. This is bad. The SMB encryption scheme never sends the cleartext password over the network but it does store the 16 byte hashed values on disk. This is also bad. Why? Because the 16 byte hashed @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" Microsoft SMB/CIFS clients support authentication via the SMB Challenge/Response mechanism described here. Enabling clear text authentication does not disable the ability - of the client to particpate in encrypted authentication.</P + of the client to participate in encrypted authentication.</P ></TD ></TR ></TABLE diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html b/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html index 081f7fb838a..e7bf9890a9d 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ <HTML ><HEAD ><TITLE ->UNIX Permission Bits and WIndows NT Access Control Lists</TITLE +>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TITLE ><META NAME="GENERATOR" CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ CLASS="TITLEPAGE" CLASS="TITLE" ><A NAME="AEN1" ->UNIX Permission Bits and WIndows NT Access Control Lists</A +>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A ></H1 ><HR></DIV ><DIV @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ NAME="AEN3" ><P >In Samba 2.0.4 and above the default value of the parameter <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NTACLSUPPOR" +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NTACLSUPPORT" TARGET="_top" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" >(Long name)</I ></TT > - is the discriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the + is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the GECOS field of the UNIX password database). Click on the <B CLASS="COMMAND" >Close @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" you to change the ownership of this file to yourself (clicking on it will display a dialog box complaining that the user you are currently logged onto the NT client cannot be found). The reason - for this is that changing the ownership of a file is a privilaged + for this is that changing the ownership of a file is a privileged operation in UNIX, available only to the <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >root</I @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" client this will not work with Samba at this time.</P ><P >There is an NT chown command that will work with Samba - and allow a user with Administrator privillage connected + and allow a user with Administrator privilege connected to a Samba 2.0.4 server as root to change the ownership of files on both a local NTFS filesystem or remote mounted NTFS or Samba drive. This is available as part of the <I @@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" >(Long name)</I ></TT > - is the discriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the + is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the GECOS field of the UNIX password database).</P ><P >If the parameter <TT @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ NAME="AEN58" ></H2 ><P >The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and - the correspinding "read", "write", "execute" permissions + the corresponding "read", "write", "execute" permissions triples are mapped by Samba into a three element NT ACL with the 'r', 'w', and 'x' bits mapped into the corresponding NT permissions. The UNIX world permissions are mapped into @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" button will not return a list of users in Samba 2.0.4 (it will give an error message of <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->"The remote proceedure call failed +>"The remote procedure call failed and did not execute"</B >). This means that you can only manipulate the current user/group/world permissions listed in @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" >"Take Ownership"</B -> permission (dsplayed as <B +> permission (displayed as <B CLASS="COMMAND" >"O" </B @@ -582,7 +582,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A > parameter to provide compatibility with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility was introduced. - To allow a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, + To allow a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file with no restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P ><P >The <TT diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/OS2-Client-HOWTO.html b/docs/htmldocs/OS2-Client-HOWTO.html index 84a424c017e..d7a3132d151 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/OS2-Client-HOWTO.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/OS2-Client-HOWTO.html @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ NAME="AEN33" driver from an OS/2 system.</P ><P >Install the NT driver first for that printer. Then, - add to your smb.conf a paramater, "os2 driver map = + add to your smb.conf a parameter, "os2 driver map = <TT CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ><I diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html index 346c2bc84d0..42570c2748b 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html @@ -32,6 +32,27 @@ NAME="AEN4" >SAMBA Team</A ></H3 ><HR></DIV +><HR><H1 +><A +NAME="AEN9" +>Abstract</A +></H1 +><P +>This book is a collection of HOWTOs added to Samba documentation over the years. +I try to ensure that all are current, but sometimes the is a larger job +than one person can maintain. The most recent version of this document +can be found at <A +HREF="http://www.samba.org/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://www.samba.org/</A +> +on the "Documentation" page. Please send updates to <A +HREF="mailto:jerry@samba.org" +TARGET="_top" +>jerry@samba.org</A +>.</P +><P +>Cheers, jerry</P ><DIV CLASS="TOC" ><DL @@ -41,34 +62,34 @@ CLASS="TOC" ></DT ><DT >1. <A -HREF="#AEN10" +HREF="#AEN15" >How to Install and Test SAMBA</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN12" +>1.1. <A +HREF="#AEN17" >Step 0: Read the man pages</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN20" +>1.2. <A +HREF="#AEN25" >Step 1: Building the Binaries</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN48" +>1.3. <A +HREF="#AEN53" >Step 2: The all important step</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN52" +>1.4. <A +HREF="#AEN57" >Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN66" +>1.5. <A +HREF="#AEN71" >Step 4: Test your config file with <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -76,81 +97,81 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN72" +>1.6. <A +HREF="#AEN77" >Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN82" +>1.6.1. <A +HREF="#AEN87" >Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN111" +>1.6.2. <A +HREF="#AEN116" >Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN127" +>1.7. <A +HREF="#AEN132" >Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your server</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN136" +>1.8. <A +HREF="#AEN141" >Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN152" +>1.9. <A +HREF="#AEN157" >Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN166" +>1.10. <A +HREF="#AEN171" >What If Things Don't Work?</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN171" +>1.10.1. <A +HREF="#AEN176" >Diagnosing Problems</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN175" +>1.10.2. <A +HREF="#AEN180" >Scope IDs</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN178" +>1.10.3. <A +HREF="#AEN183" >Choosing the Protocol Level</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN187" +>1.10.4. <A +HREF="#AEN192" >Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN191" +>1.10.5. <A +HREF="#AEN196" >Locking</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN201" +>1.10.6. <A +HREF="#AEN206" >Mapping Usernames</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN204" +>1.10.7. <A +HREF="#AEN209" >Other Character Sets</A ></DT ></DL @@ -159,77 +180,185 @@ HREF="#AEN204" ></DD ><DT >2. <A -HREF="#AEN207" ->LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba 2.x</A +HREF="#AEN212" +>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN218" ->Introduction</A +>2.1. <A +HREF="#AEN223" +>Agenda</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN222" ->How does it work?</A +>2.2. <A +HREF="#AEN245" +>Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN233" ->Important Notes About Security</A +>2.2.1. <A +HREF="#AEN261" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts</TT +></A +></DT +><DT +>2.2.2. <A +HREF="#AEN277" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/resolv.conf</TT +></A +></DT +><DT +>2.2.3. <A +HREF="#AEN288" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/host.conf</TT +></A +></DT +><DT +>2.2.4. <A +HREF="#AEN296" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT +></A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>2.3. <A +HREF="#AEN308" +>Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN252" ->Advantages of SMB Encryption</A +>2.3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN320" +>The NetBIOS Name Cache</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN259" ->Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A +>2.3.2. <A +HREF="#AEN325" +>The LMHOSTS file</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.3. <A +HREF="#AEN333" +>HOSTS file</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.4. <A +HREF="#AEN338" +>DNS Lookup</A +></DT +><DT +>2.3.5. <A +HREF="#AEN341" +>WINS Lookup</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN268" -><A -NAME="SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT" -></A ->The smbpasswd file</A +>2.4. <A +HREF="#AEN353" +>How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and +dependable browsing using Samba</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN320" ->The smbpasswd Command</A +>2.5. <A +HREF="#AEN363" +>MS Windows security options and how to configure +Samba for seemless integration</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>2.5.1. <A +HREF="#AEN391" +>Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN359" ->Setting up Samba to support LanManager Encryption</A +>2.5.2. <A +HREF="#AEN399" +>Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</A +></DT +><DT +>2.5.3. <A +HREF="#AEN416" +>Configure Samba as an authentication server</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>2.5.3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN423" +>Users</A +></DT +><DT +>2.5.3.2. <A +HREF="#AEN428" +>MS Windows NT Machine Accounts</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +></DL +></DD +><DT +>2.6. <A +HREF="#AEN433" +>Conclusions</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT >3. <A -HREF="#AEN374" +HREF="#AEN443" +>Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally +managed authentication</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN454" +>Samba and PAM</A +></DT +><DT +>3.2. <A +HREF="#AEN496" +>Distributed Authentication</A +></DT +><DT +>3.3. <A +HREF="#AEN503" +>PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>4. <A +HREF="#AEN512" >Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN385" +>4.1. <A +HREF="#AEN523" >Instructions</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN420" +>4.1.1. <A +HREF="#AEN558" >Notes</A ></DT ></DL @@ -237,334 +366,449 @@ HREF="#AEN420" ></DL ></DD ><DT ->4. <A -HREF="#AEN429" +>5. <A +HREF="#AEN567" +>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>5.1. <A +HREF="#AEN578" +>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT + security dialogs</A +></DT +><DT +>5.2. <A +HREF="#AEN587" +>How to view file security on a Samba share</A +></DT +><DT +>5.3. <A +HREF="#AEN598" +>Viewing file ownership</A +></DT +><DT +>5.4. <A +HREF="#AEN618" +>Viewing file or directory permissions</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>5.4.1. <A +HREF="#AEN633" +>File Permissions</A +></DT +><DT +>5.4.2. <A +HREF="#AEN647" +>Directory Permissions</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>5.5. <A +HREF="#AEN654" +>Modifying file or directory permissions</A +></DT +><DT +>5.6. <A +HREF="#AEN676" +>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask + parameters</A +></DT +><DT +>5.7. <A +HREF="#AEN740" +>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute + mapping</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>6. <A +HREF="#AEN750" >Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN440" +>6.1. <A +HREF="#AEN761" >Introduction</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN457" +>6.2. <A +HREF="#AEN783" >Configuration</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN511" +>6.2.1. <A +HREF="#AEN794" +>Creating [print$]</A +></DT +><DT +>6.2.2. <A +HREF="#AEN829" +>Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A +></DT +><DT +>6.2.3. <A +HREF="#AEN846" >Support a large number of printers</A ></DT +><DT +>6.2.4. <A +HREF="#AEN857" +>Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A +></DT +><DT +>6.2.5. <A +HREF="#AEN882" +>Samba and Printer Ports</A +></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN522" +>6.3. <A +HREF="#AEN890" >The Imprints Toolset</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN526" +>6.3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN894" >What is Imprints?</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN536" +>6.3.2. <A +HREF="#AEN904" >Creating Printer Driver Packages</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN539" +>6.3.3. <A +HREF="#AEN907" >The Imprints server</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN543" +>6.3.4. <A +HREF="#AEN911" >The Installation Client</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN565" +>6.4. <A +HREF="#AEN933" ><A NAME="MIGRATION" ></A ->Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to - 2.2.x</A +>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to 2.2.x</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->5. <A -HREF="#AEN594" +>7. <A +HREF="#AEN977" >security = domain in Samba 2.x</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN612" +>7.1. <A +HREF="#AEN995" >Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN676" +>7.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1059" >Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN681" +>7.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1064" >Why is this better than security = server?</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->6. <A -HREF="#AEN697" ->How to Configure Samba 2.2.x as a Primary Domain Controller</A +>8. <A +HREF="#AEN1080" +>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN708" +>8.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1097" +>Prerequisite Reading</A +></DT +><DT +>8.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1103" >Background</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN745" +>8.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1143" >Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN788" +>8.4. <A +HREF="#AEN1186" >Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the Domain</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN827" +>8.4.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1200" +>Manually creating machine trust accounts</A +></DT +><DT +>8.4.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1228" +>Creating machine trust accounts "on the fly"</A +></DT +></DL +></DD +><DT +>8.5. <A +HREF="#AEN1239" >Common Problems and Errors</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN855" +>8.6. <A +HREF="#AEN1287" >System Policies and Profiles</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN895" +>8.7. <A +HREF="#AEN1331" >What other help can I get ?</A ></DT +><DT +>8.8. <A +HREF="#AEN1445" +>Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A +></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN942" ->URLs and similar</A +>8.8.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1475" +>Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN966" ->Mailing Lists</A +>8.8.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1509" +>Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</A +></DT +><DD +><DL +><DT +>8.8.2.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1517" +>Windows NT Configuration</A +></DT +><DT +>8.8.2.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1525" +>Windows 9X Configuration</A +></DT +><DT +>8.8.2.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1533" +>Win9X and WinNT Configuration</A +></DT +><DT +>8.8.2.4. <A +HREF="#AEN1540" +>Windows 9X Profile Setup</A +></DT +><DT +>8.8.2.5. <A +HREF="#AEN1576" +>Windows NT Workstation 4.0</A +></DT +><DT +>8.8.2.6. <A +HREF="#AEN1589" +>Windows NT Server</A +></DT +><DT +>8.8.2.7. <A +HREF="#AEN1592" +>Sharing Profiles between W95 and NT Workstation 4.0</A ></DT ></DL ></DD +></DL +></DD ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1005" +>8.9. <A +HREF="#AEN1602" >DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->7. <A -HREF="#AEN1029" ->Unifed Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A +>9. <A +HREF="#AEN1627" +>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1047" +>9.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1645" >Abstract</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1051" +>9.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1649" >Introduction</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1064" +>9.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1662" >What Winbind Provides</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1071" +>9.3.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1669" >Target Uses</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1075" +>9.4. <A +HREF="#AEN1673" >How Winbind Works</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1080" +>9.4.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1678" >Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1084" +>9.4.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1682" >Name Service Switch</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1100" +>9.4.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1698" >Pluggable Authentication Modules</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1108" +>9.4.4. <A +HREF="#AEN1706" >User and Group ID Allocation</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1112" +>9.4.5. <A +HREF="#AEN1710" >Result Caching</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1115" +>9.5. <A +HREF="#AEN1713" >Installation and Configuration</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1121" +>9.6. <A +HREF="#AEN1719" >Limitations</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1133" +>9.7. <A +HREF="#AEN1731" >Conclusion</A ></DT ></DL ></DD ><DT ->8. <A -HREF="#AEN1136" ->UNIX Permission Bits and WIndows NT Access Control Lists</A +>10. <A +HREF="#AEN1734" +>OS2 Client HOWTO</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1147" ->Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT - security dialogs</A -></DT -><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1156" ->How to view file security on a Samba share</A -></DT -><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1167" ->Viewing file ownership</A -></DT -><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1187" ->Viewing file or directory permissions</A +>10.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1745" +>FAQs</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1202" ->File Permissions</A -></DT -><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1216" ->Directory Permissions</A +>10.1.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1747" +>How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or + OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A ></DT -></DL -></DD ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1223" ->Modifying file or directory permissions</A +>10.1.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1762" +>How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), + OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1245" ->Interaction with the standard Samba create mask - parameters</A +>10.1.3. <A +HREF="#AEN1771" +>Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) + is used as a client?</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1309" ->Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute - mapping</A +>10.1.4. <A +HREF="#AEN1775" +>How do I get printer driver download working + for OS/2 clients?</A ></DT ></DL ></DD +></DL +></DD ><DT ->9. <A -HREF="#AEN1319" ->OS2 Client HOWTO</A -></DT -><DD -><DL -><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1330" ->FAQs</A +>11. <A +HREF="#AEN1784" +>HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</A ></DT ><DD ><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1332" ->How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or - OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A +>11.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1791" +>Introduction</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1347" ->How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), - OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A +>11.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1796" +>CVS Access to samba.org</A ></DT +><DD +><DL ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1356" ->Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) - is used as a client?</A +>11.2.1. <A +HREF="#AEN1799" +>Access via CVSweb</A ></DT ><DT -><A -HREF="#AEN1360" ->How do I get printer driver download working - for OS/2 clients?</A +>11.2.2. <A +HREF="#AEN1804" +>Access via cvs</A ></DT ></DL ></DD @@ -576,7 +820,7 @@ HREF="#AEN1360" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="AEN10" +NAME="AEN15" >Chapter 1. How to Install and Test SAMBA</A ></H1 ><DIV @@ -584,8 +828,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN12" ->Step 0: Read the man pages</A +NAME="AEN17" +>1.1. Step 0: Read the man pages</A ></H1 ><P >The man pages distributed with SAMBA contain @@ -616,8 +860,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN20" ->Step 1: Building the Binaries</A +NAME="AEN25" +>1.2. Step 1: Building the Binaries</A ></H1 ><P >To do this, first run the program <B @@ -640,7 +884,7 @@ CLASS="USERINPUT" ></P ><P >first to see what special options you can enable. - Then exectuting</P + Then executing</P ><P ><TT CLASS="PROMPT" @@ -715,8 +959,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN48" ->Step 2: The all important step</A +NAME="AEN53" +>1.3. Step 2: The all important step</A ></H1 ><P >At this stage you must fetch yourself a @@ -732,8 +976,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN52" ->Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</A +NAME="AEN57" +>1.4. Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</A ></H1 ><P >There are sample configuration files in the examples @@ -744,6 +988,12 @@ NAME="AEN52" >The simplest useful configuration file would be something like this:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > [global] @@ -753,12 +1003,15 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" guest ok = no read only = no </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >which would allow connections by anyone with an account on the server, using either their login name or "homes" as the service name. (Note that I also set the - workgroup that Samba is part of. See BROWSING.txt for defails)</P + workgroup that Samba is part of. See BROWSING.txt for details)</P ><P >Note that <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -788,8 +1041,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN66" ->Step 4: Test your config file with +NAME="AEN71" +>1.5. Step 4: Test your config file with <B CLASS="COMMAND" >testparm</B @@ -805,15 +1058,15 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" not it will give an error message.</P ><P >Make sure it runs OK and that the services look - resonable before proceeding. </P + reasonable before proceeding. </P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN72" ->Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</A +NAME="AEN77" +>1.6. Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</A ></H1 ><P >You must choose to start smbd and nmbd either @@ -852,8 +1105,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN82" ->Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</A +NAME="AEN87" +>1.6.1. Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</A ></H2 ><P >NOTE; The following will be different if @@ -888,11 +1141,20 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > and add two lines something like this:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > netbios-ssn stream tcp nowait root /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd smbd netbios-ns dgram udp wait root /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd nmbd </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >The exact syntax of <TT @@ -914,7 +1176,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/inetd.conf</TT -> to make them consistant.</P +> to make them consistent.</P ><P >NOTE: On many systems you may need to use the "interfaces" option in smb.conf to specify the IP address @@ -927,7 +1189,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > tries to determine it at run - time, but fails on somunixes. See the section on "testing nmbd" + time, but fails on some unixes. See the section on "testing nmbd" for a method of finding if you need to do this.</P ><P >!!!WARNING!!! Many unixes only accept around 5 @@ -956,8 +1218,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN111" ->Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A +NAME="AEN116" +>1.6.2. Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A ></H2 ><P >To start the server as a daemon you should create @@ -967,12 +1229,21 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >startsmb</TT >.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > #!/bin/sh /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd -D /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd -D </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >then make it executable with <B @@ -1013,8 +1284,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN127" ->Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your +NAME="AEN132" +>1.7. Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your server</A ></H1 ><P @@ -1054,8 +1325,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN136" ->Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</A +NAME="AEN141" +>1.8. Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</A ></H1 ><P ><TT @@ -1117,8 +1388,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN152" ->Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, +NAME="AEN157" +>1.9. Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A ></H1 ><P @@ -1166,8 +1437,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN166" ->What If Things Don't Work?</A +NAME="AEN171" +>1.10. What If Things Don't Work?</A ></H1 ><P >If nothing works and you start to think "who wrote @@ -1189,11 +1460,11 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN171" ->Diagnosing Problems</A +NAME="AEN176" +>1.10.1. Diagnosing Problems</A ></H2 ><P ->If you have instalation problems then go to +>If you have installation problems then go to <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >DIAGNOSIS.txt</TT @@ -1205,14 +1476,14 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN175" ->Scope IDs</A +NAME="AEN180" +>1.10.2. Scope IDs</A ></H2 ><P >By default Samba uses a blank scope ID. This means all your windows boxes must also have a blank scope ID. If you really want to use a non-blank scope ID then you will - need to use the -i <scope> option to nmbd, smbd, and + need to use the -i <scope> option to nmbd, smbd, and smbclient. All your PCs will need to have the same setting for this to work. I do not recommend scope IDs.</P ></DIV @@ -1221,8 +1492,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN178" ->Choosing the Protocol Level</A +NAME="AEN183" +>1.10.3. Choosing the Protocol Level</A ></H2 ><P >The SMB protocol has many dialects. Currently @@ -1262,8 +1533,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN187" ->Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A +NAME="AEN192" +>1.10.4. Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A ></H2 ><P >To use a printer that is available via a smb-based @@ -1280,8 +1551,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN191" ->Locking</A +NAME="AEN196" +>1.10.5. Locking</A ></H2 ><P >One area which sometimes causes trouble is locking.</P @@ -1327,7 +1598,7 @@ NAME="AEN191" are set by an application when it opens a file to determine what types of access should be allowed simultaneously with its open. A client may ask for DENY_NONE, DENY_READ, DENY_WRITE - or DENY_ALL. There are also special compatability modes called + or DENY_ALL. There are also special compatibility modes called DENY_FCB and DENY_DOS.</P ><P >You can disable share modes using "share modes = no". @@ -1341,8 +1612,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN201" ->Mapping Usernames</A +NAME="AEN206" +>1.10.6. Mapping Usernames</A ></H2 ><P >If you have different usernames on the PCs and @@ -1354,13 +1625,13 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN204" ->Other Character Sets</A +NAME="AEN209" +>1.10.7. Other Character Sets</A ></H2 ><P >If you have problems using filenames with accented characters in them (like the German, French or Scandinavian - character sets) then I recommmend you look at the "valid chars" + character sets) then I recommend you look at the "valid chars" option in smb.conf and also take a look at the validchars package in the examples directory.</P ></DIV @@ -1370,213 +1641,243 @@ NAME="AEN204" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="AEN207" ->Chapter 2. LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba 2.x</A +NAME="AEN212" +>Chapter 2. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</A ></H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN218" ->Introduction</A +NAME="AEN223" +>2.1. Agenda</A ></H1 ><P ->With the development of LanManager and Windows NT - compatible password encryption for Samba, it is now able - to validate user connections in exactly the same way as - a LanManager or Windows NT server.</P +>To identify the key functional mechanisms of MS Windows networking +to enable the deployment of Samba as a means of extending and/or +replacing MS Windows NT/2000 technology.</P ><P ->This document describes how the SMB password encryption - algorithm works and what issues there are in choosing whether - you want to use it. You should read it carefully, especially - the part about security and the "PROS and CONS" section.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN222" ->How does it work?</A -></H1 +>We will examine:</P ><P ->LanManager encryption is somewhat similar to UNIX - password encryption. The server uses a file containing a - hashed value of a user's password. This is created by taking - the user's plaintext password, capitalising it, and either - truncating to 14 bytes or padding to 14 bytes with null bytes. - This 14 byte value is used as two 56 bit DES keys to encrypt - a 'magic' eight byte value, forming a 16 byte value which is - stored by the server and client. Let this value be known as - the "hashed password".</P -><P ->Windows NT encryption is a higher quality mechanism, - consisting of doing an MD4 hash on a Unicode version of the user's - password. This also produces a 16 byte hash value that is - non-reversible.</P -><P ->When a client (LanManager, Windows for WorkGroups, Windows - 95 or Windows NT) wishes to mount a Samba drive (or use a Samba - resource), it first requests a connection and negotiates the - protocol that the client and server will use. In the reply to this - request the Samba server generates and appends an 8 byte, random - value - this is stored in the Samba server after the reply is sent - and is known as the "challenge". The challenge is different for - every client connection.</P -><P ->The client then uses the hashed password (16 byte values - described above), appended with 5 null bytes, as three 56 bit - DES keys, each of which is used to encrypt the challenge 8 byte - value, forming a 24 byte value known as the "response".</P -><P ->In the SMB call SMBsessionsetupX (when user level security - is selected) or the call SMBtconX (when share level security is - selected), the 24 byte response is returned by the client to the - Samba server. For Windows NT protocol levels the above calculation - is done on both hashes of the user's password and both responses are - returned in the SMB call, giving two 24 byte values.</P -><P ->The Samba server then reproduces the above calculation, using - its own stored value of the 16 byte hashed password (read from the - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smbpasswd</TT -> file - described later) and the challenge - value that it kept from the negotiate protocol reply. It then checks - to see if the 24 byte value it calculates matches the 24 byte value - returned to it from the client.</P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +>Name resolution in a pure Unix/Linux TCP/IP + environment + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Name resolution as used within MS Windows + networking + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>How browsing functions and how to deploy stable + and dependable browsing using Samba + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>MS Windows security options and how to + configure Samba for seemless integration + </P +></LI +><LI ><P ->If these values match exactly, then the client knew the - correct password (or the 16 byte hashed value - see security note - below) and is thus allowed access. If not, then the client did not - know the correct password and is denied access.</P +>Configuration of Samba as:</P ><P ->Note that the Samba server never knows or stores the cleartext - of the user's password - just the 16 byte hashed values derived from - it. Also note that the cleartext password or 16 byte hashed values - are never transmitted over the network - thus increasing security.</P +></P +><OL +TYPE="a" +><LI +><P +>A stand-alone server</P +></LI +><LI +><P +>An MS Windows NT 3.x/4.0 security domain member + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>An alternative to an MS Windows NT 3.x/4.0 Domain Controller + </P +></LI +></OL +></LI +></OL ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN233" ->Important Notes About Security</A +NAME="AEN245" +>2.2. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A ></H1 ><P ->The unix and SMB password encryption techniques seem similar - on the surface. This similarity is, however, only skin deep. The unix - scheme typically sends clear text passwords over the nextwork when - logging in. This is bad. The SMB encryption scheme never sends the - cleartext password over the network but it does store the 16 byte - hashed values on disk. This is also bad. Why? Because the 16 byte hashed - values are a "password equivalent". You cannot derive the user's - password from them, but they could potentially be used in a modified - client to gain access to a server. This would require considerable - technical knowledge on behalf of the attacker but is perfectly possible. - You should thus treat the smbpasswd file as though it contained the - cleartext passwords of all your users. Its contents must be kept - secret, and the file should be protected accordingly.</P -><P ->Ideally we would like a password scheme which neither requires - plain text passwords on the net or on disk. Unfortunately this - is not available as Samba is stuck with being compatible with - other SMB systems (WinNT, WfWg, Win95 etc). </P -><DIV -CLASS="WARNING" -><P -></P -><TABLE -CLASS="WARNING" -BORDER="1" -WIDTH="100%" -><TR -><TD -ALIGN="CENTER" -><B ->Warning</B -></TD -></TR -><TR -><TD -ALIGN="LEFT" -><P ->Note that Windows NT 4.0 Service pack 3 changed the - default for permissible authentication so that plaintext - passwords are <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->never</I -> sent over the wire. - The solution to this is either to switch to encrypted passwords - with Samba or edit the Windows NT registry to re-enable plaintext - passwords. See the document WinNT.txt for details on how to do - this.</P -><P ->Other Microsoft operating systems which also exhibit - this behavior includes</P +>The key configuration files covered in this section are:</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P ->MS DOS Network client 3.0 with - the basic network redirector installed</P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts</TT +></P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Windows 95 with the network redirector - update installed</P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/resolv.conf</TT +></P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Windows 98 [se]</P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/host.conf</TT +></P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Windows 2000</P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT +></P ></LI ></UL +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN261" +>2.2.1. <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts</TT +></A +></H2 ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note :</I ->All current release of - Microsoft SMB/CIFS clients support authentication via the - SMB Challenge/Response mechanism described here. Enabling - clear text authentication does not disable the ability - of the client to particpate in encrypted authentication.</P +>Contains a static list of IP Addresses and names. +eg:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> 127.0.0.1 localhost localhost.localdomain + 192.168.1.1 bigbox.caldera.com bigbox alias4box</PRE ></TD ></TR ></TABLE +></P +><P +>The purpose of <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts</TT +> is to provide a +name resolution mechanism so that uses do not need to remember +IP addresses.</P +><P +>Network packets that are sent over the physical network transport +layer communicate not via IP addresses but rather using the Media +Access Control address, or MAC address. IP Addresses are currently +32 bits in length and are typically presented as four (4) decimal +numbers that are separated by a dot (or period). eg: 168.192.1.1</P +><P +>MAC Addresses use 48 bits (or 6 bytes) and are typically represented +as two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons. eg: +40:8e:0a:12:34:56</P +><P +>Every network interfrace must have an MAC address. Associated with +a MAC address there may be one or more IP addresses. There is NO +relationship between an IP address and a MAC address, all such assignments +are arbitary or discretionary in nature. At the most basic level all +network communications takes place using MAC addressing. Since MAC +addresses must be globally unique, and generally remains fixed for +any particular interface, the assignment of an IP address makes sense +from a network management perspective. More than one IP address can +be assigned per MAC address. One address must be the primary IP address, +this is the address that will be returned in the ARP reply.</P +><P +>When a user or a process wants to communicate with another machine +the protocol implementation ensures that the "machine name" or "host +name" is resolved to an IP address in a manner that is controlled +by the TCP/IP configuration control files. The file +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts</TT +> is one such file.</P +><P +>When the IP address of the destination interface has been +determined a protocol called ARP/RARP isused to identify +the MAC address of the target interface. ARP stands for Address +Resolution Protocol, and is a broadcast oriented method that +uses UDP (User Datagram Protocol) to send a request to all +interfaces on the local network segment using the all 1's MAC +address. Network interfaces are programmed to respond to two +MAC addresses only; their own unique address and the address +ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff. The reply packet from an ARP request will +contain the MAC address and the primary IP address for each +interface.</P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts</TT +> file is foundational to all +Unix/Linux TCP/IP installations and as a minumum will contain +the localhost and local network interface IP addresses and the +primary names by which they are known within the local machine. +This file helps to prime the pump so that a basic level of name +resolution can exist before any other method of name resolution +becomes available.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN252" ->Advantages of SMB Encryption</A +NAME="AEN277" +>2.2.2. <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/resolv.conf</TT +></A ></H2 ><P +>This file tells the name resolution libraries:</P +><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P ->plain text passwords are not passed across - the network. Someone using a network sniffer cannot just - record passwords going to the SMB server.</P +>The name of the domain to which the machine + belongs + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->WinNT doesn't like talking to a server - that isn't using SMB encrypted passwords. It will refuse - to browse the server if the server is also in user level - security mode. It will insist on prompting the user for the - password on each connection, which is very annoying. The - only things you can do to stop this is to use SMB encryption. - </P +>The name(s) of any domains that should be + automatically searched when trying to resolve unqualified + host names to their IP address + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>The name or IP address of available Domain + Name Servers that may be asked to perform name to address + translation lookups + </P ></LI ></UL ></DIV @@ -1585,30 +1886,115 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN259" ->Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A +NAME="AEN288" +>2.2.3. <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/host.conf</TT +></A ></H2 ><P +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/host.conf</TT +> is the primary means by +which the setting in /etc/resolv.conf may be affected. It is a +critical configuration file. This file controls the order by +which name resolution may procede. The typical structure is:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> order hosts,bind + multi on</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P -><UL -><LI ><P ->plain text passwords are not kept - on disk. </P -></LI -><LI +>then both addresses should be returned. Please refer to the +man page for host.conf for further details.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN296" +>2.2.4. <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT +></A +></H2 ><P ->uses same password file as other unix - services such as login and ftp</P -></LI -><LI +>This file controls the actual name resolution targets. The +file typically has resolver object specifications as follows:</P ><P ->you are probably already using other - services (such as telnet and ftp) which send plain text - passwords over the net, so sending them for SMB isn't - such a big deal.</P -></LI -></UL +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> # /etc/nsswitch.conf + # + # Name Service Switch configuration file. + # + + passwd: compat + # Alternative entries for password authentication are: + # passwd: compat files nis ldap winbind + shadow: compat + group: compat + + hosts: files nis dns + # Alternative entries for host name resolution are: + # hosts: files dns nis nis+ hesoid db compat ldap wins + networks: nis files dns + + ethers: nis files + protocols: nis files + rpc: nis files + services: nis files</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +>Of course, each of these mechanisms requires that the appropriate +facilities and/or services are correctly configured.</P +><P +>It should be noted that unless a network request/message must be +sent, TCP/IP networks are silent. All TCP/IP communications assumes a +principal of speaking only when necessary.</P +><P +>Samba version 2.2.0 will add Linux support for extensions to +the name service switch infrastructure so that linux clients will +be able to obtain resolution of MS Windows NetBIOS names to IP +Addresses. To gain this functionality Samba needs to be compiled +with appropriate arguments to the make command (ie: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>make +nsswitch/libnss_wins.so</B +>). The resulting library should +then be installed in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/lib</TT +> directory and +the "wins" parameter needs to be added to the "hosts:" line in +the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT +> file. At this point it +will be possible to ping any MS Windows machine by it's NetBIOS +machine name, so long as that machine is within the workgroup to +which both the samba machine and the MS Windows machine belong.</P ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV @@ -1616,405 +2002,1154 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN268" -><A -NAME="SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT" -></A ->The smbpasswd file</A +NAME="AEN308" +>2.3. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A ></H1 ><P ->In order for Samba to participate in the above protocol - it must be able to look up the 16 byte hashed values given a user name. - Unfortunately, as the UNIX password value is also a one way hash - function (ie. it is impossible to retrieve the cleartext of the user's - password given the UNIX hash of it), a separate password file - containing this 16 byte value must be kept. To minimise problems with - these two password files, getting out of sync, the UNIX <TT +>MS Windows networking is predicated about the name each machine +is given. This name is known variously (and inconsistently) as +the "computer name", "machine name", "networking name", "netbios name", +"SMB name". All terms mean the same thing with the exception of +"netbios name" which can apply also to the name of the workgroup or the +domain name. The terms "workgroup" and "domain" are really just a +simply name with which the machine is associated. All NetBIOS names +are exactly 16 characters in length. The 16th character is reserved. +It is used to store a one byte value that indicates service level +information for the NetBIOS name that is registered. A NetBIOS machine +name is therefore registered for each service type that is provided by +the client/server.</P +><P +>The following are typical NetBIOS name/service type registrations:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> Unique NetBIOS Names: + MACHINENAME<00> = Server Service is running on MACHINENAME + MACHINENAME<03> = Generic Machine Name (NetBIOS name) + MACHINENAME<20> = LanMan Server service is running on MACHINENAME + WORKGROUP<1b> = Domain Master Browser + + Group Names: + WORKGROUP<03> = Generic Name registered by all members of WORKGROUP + WORKGROUP<1c> = Domain Controllers / Netlogon Servers + WORKGROUP<1d> = Local Master Browsers + WORKGROUP<1e> = Internet Name Resolvers</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +>It should be noted that all NetBIOS machines register their own +names as per the above. This is in vast contrast to TCP/IP +installations where traditionally the system administrator will +determine in the /etc/hosts or in the DNS database what names +are associated with each IP address.</P +><P +>One further point of clarification should be noted, the <TT CLASS="FILENAME" -> /etc/passwd</TT -> and the <TT +>/etc/hosts</TT +> +file and the DNS records do not provide the NetBIOS name type information +that MS Windows clients depend on to locate the type of service that may +be needed. An example of this is what happens when an MS Windows client +wants to locate a domain logon server. It find this service and the IP +address of a server that provides it by performing a lookup (via a +NetBIOS broadcast) for enumeration of all machines that have +registered the name type *<1c>. A logon request is then sent to each +IP address that is returned in the enumerated list of IP addresses. Which +ever machine first replies then ends up providing the logon services.</P +><P +>The name "workgroup" or "domain" really can be confusing since these +have the added significance of indicating what is the security +architecture of the MS Windows network. The term "workgroup" indicates +that the primary nature of the network environment is that of a +peer-to-peer design. In a WORKGROUP all machines are responsible for +their own security, and generally such security is limited to use of +just a password (known as SHARE MORE security). In most situations +with peer-to-peer networking the users who control their own machines +will simply opt to have no security at all. It is possible to have +USER MODE security in a WORKGROUP environment, thus requiring use +of a user name and a matching password.</P +><P +>MS Windows networking is thus predetermined to use machine names +for all local and remote machine message passing. The protocol used is +called Server Message Block (SMB) and this is implemented using +the NetBIOS protocol (Network Basic Input Output System). NetBIOS can +be encapsulated using LLC (Logical Link Control) protocol - in which case +the resulting protocol is called NetBEUI (Network Basic Extended User +Interface). NetBIOS can also be run over IPX (Internetworking Packet +Exchange) protocol as used by Novell NetWare, and it can be run +over TCP/IP protocols - in which case the resulting protocol is called +NBT or NetBT, the NetBIOS over TCP/IP.</P +><P +>MS Windows machines use a complex array of name resolution mechanisms. +Since we are primarily concerned with TCP/IP this demonstration is +limited to this area.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN320" +>2.3.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</A +></H2 +><P +>All MS Windows machines employ an in memory buffer in which is +stored the NetBIOS names and their IP addresses for all external +machines that that the local machine has communicated with over the +past 10-15 minutes. It is more efficient to obtain an IP address +for a machine from the local cache than it is to go through all the +configured name resolution mechanisms.</P +><P +>If a machine whose name is in the local name cache has been shut +down before the name had been expired and flushed from the cache, then +an attempt to exchange a message with that machine will be subject +to time-out delays. ie: It's name is in the cache, so a name resolution +lookup will succeed, but the machine can not respond. This can be +frustrating for users - but it is a characteristic of the protocol.</P +><P +>The MS Windows utility that allows examination of the NetBIOS +name cache is called "nbtstat". The Samba equivalent of this +is called "nmblookup".</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN325" +>2.3.2. The LMHOSTS file</A +></H2 +><P +>This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or +2000 in <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->smbpasswd</TT -> file, - a utility, <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->mksmbpasswd.sh</B ->, is provided to generate - a smbpasswd file from a UNIX <TT +>C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC</TT +> and contains +the IP Address and the machine name in matched pairs. The +<TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> file. - </P +>LMHOSTS</TT +> file performs NetBIOS name +to IP address mapping oriented.</P +><P +>It typically looks like:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> # Copyright (c) 1998 Microsoft Corp. + # + # This is a sample LMHOSTS file used by the Microsoft Wins Client (NetBIOS + # over TCP/IP) stack for Windows98 + # + # This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to NT computernames + # (NetBIOS) names. Each entry should be kept on an individual line. + # The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the + # corresponding computername. The address and the comptername + # should be separated by at least one space or tab. The "#" character + # is generally used to denote the start of a comment (see the exceptions + # below). + # + # This file is compatible with Microsoft LAN Manager 2.x TCP/IP lmhosts + # files and offers the following extensions: + # + # #PRE + # #DOM:<domain> + # #INCLUDE <filename> + # #BEGIN_ALTERNATE + # #END_ALTERNATE + # \0xnn (non-printing character support) + # + # Following any entry in the file with the characters "#PRE" will cause + # the entry to be preloaded into the name cache. By default, entries are + # not preloaded, but are parsed only after dynamic name resolution fails. + # + # Following an entry with the "#DOM:<domain>" tag will associate the + # entry with the domain specified by <domain>. This affects how the + # browser and logon services behave in TCP/IP environments. To preload + # the host name associated with #DOM entry, it is necessary to also add a + # #PRE to the line. The <domain> is always preloaded although it will not + # be shown when the name cache is viewed. + # + # Specifying "#INCLUDE <filename>" will force the RFC NetBIOS (NBT) + # software to seek the specified <filename> and parse it as if it were + # local. <filename> is generally a UNC-based name, allowing a + # centralized lmhosts file to be maintained on a server. + # It is ALWAYS necessary to provide a mapping for the IP address of the + # server prior to the #INCLUDE. This mapping must use the #PRE directive. + # In addtion the share "public" in the example below must be in the + # LanManServer list of "NullSessionShares" in order for client machines to + # be able to read the lmhosts file successfully. This key is under + # \machine\system\currentcontrolset\services\lanmanserver\parameters\nullsessionshares + # in the registry. Simply add "public" to the list found there. + # + # The #BEGIN_ and #END_ALTERNATE keywords allow multiple #INCLUDE + # statements to be grouped together. Any single successful include + # will cause the group to succeed. + # + # Finally, non-printing characters can be embedded in mappings by + # first surrounding the NetBIOS name in quotations, then using the + # \0xnn notation to specify a hex value for a non-printing character. + # + # The following example illustrates all of these extensions: + # + # 102.54.94.97 rhino #PRE #DOM:networking #net group's DC + # 102.54.94.102 "appname \0x14" #special app server + # 102.54.94.123 popular #PRE #source server + # 102.54.94.117 localsrv #PRE #needed for the include + # + # #BEGIN_ALTERNATE + # #INCLUDE \\localsrv\public\lmhosts + # #INCLUDE \\rhino\public\lmhosts + # #END_ALTERNATE + # + # In the above example, the "appname" server contains a special + # character in its name, the "popular" and "localsrv" server names are + # preloaded, and the "rhino" server name is specified so it can be used + # to later #INCLUDE a centrally maintained lmhosts file if the "localsrv" + # system is unavailable. + # + # Note that the whole file is parsed including comments on each lookup, + # so keeping the number of comments to a minimum will improve performance. + # Therefore it is not advisable to simply add lmhosts file entries onto the + # end of this file.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN333" +>2.3.3. HOSTS file</A +></H2 ><P ->To generate the smbpasswd file from your <TT +>This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 in +<TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd - </TT -> file use the following command :</P +>C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC</TT +> and contains +the IP Address and the IP hostname in matched pairs. It can be +used by the name resolution infrastructure in MS Windows, depending +on how the TCP/IP environment is configured. This file is in +every way the equivalent of the Unix/Linux <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/hosts</TT +> file.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN338" +>2.3.4. DNS Lookup</A +></H2 ><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->$ </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->cat /etc/passwd | mksmbpasswd.sh - > /usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</B -></TT +>This capability is configured in the TCP/IP setup area in the network +configuration facility. If enabled an elaborate name resolution sequence +is followed the precise nature of which isdependant on what the NetBIOS +Node Type parameter is configured to. A Node Type of 0 means use +NetBIOS broadcast (over UDP broadcast) is first used if the name +that is the subject of a name lookup is not found in the NetBIOS name +cache. If that fails then DNS, HOSTS and LMHOSTS are checked. If set to +Node Type 8, then a NetBIOS Unicast (over UDP Unicast) is sent to the +WINS Server to obtain a lookup before DNS, HOSTS, LMHOSTS, or broadcast +lookup is used.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN341" +>2.3.5. WINS Lookup</A +></H2 +><P +>A WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) service is the equivaent of the +rfc1001/1002 specified NBNS (NetBIOS Name Server). A WINS server stores +the names and IP addresses that are registered by a Windows client +if the TCP/IP setup has been given at least one WINS Server IP Address.</P +><P +>To configure Samba to be a WINS server the following parameter needs +to be added to the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> wins support = Yes</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P ->If you are running on a system that uses NIS, use</P +>To configure Samba to use a WINS server the following parameters are +needed in the smb.conf file:</P ><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->$ </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->ypcat passwd | mksmbpasswd.sh - > /usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</B -></TT +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> wins support = No + wins server = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P ->The <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->mksmbpasswd.sh</B -> program is found in - the Samba source directory. By default, the smbpasswd file is - stored in :</P +>where <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx</I +></TT +> is the IP address +of the WINS server.</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN353" +>2.4. How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and +dependable browsing using Samba</A +></H1 ><P -><TT +>As stated above, MS Windows machines register their NetBIOS names +(ie: the machine name for each service type in operation) on start +up. Also, as stated above, the exact method by which this name registration +takes place is determined by whether or not the MS Windows client/server +has been given a WINS server address, whether or not LMHOSTS lookup +is enabled, or if DNS for NetBIOS name resolution is enabled, etc.</P +><P +>In the case where there is no WINS server all name registrations as +well as name lookups are done by UDP broadcast. This isolates name +resolution to the local subnet, unless LMHOSTS is used to list all +names and IP addresses. In such situations Samba provides a means by +which the samba server name may be forcibly injected into the browse +list of a remote MS Windows network (using the "remote announce" parameter).</P +><P +>Where a WINS server is used, the MS Windows client will use UDP +unicast to register with the WINS server. Such packets can be routed +and thus WINS allows name resolution to function across routed networks.</P +><P +>During the startup process an election will take place to create a +local master browser if one does not already exist. On each NetBIOS network +one machine will be elected to function as the domain master browser. This +domain browsing has nothing to do with MS security domain control. +Instead, the domain master browser serves the role of contacting each local +master browser (found by asking WINS or from LMHOSTS) and exchanging browse +list contents. This way every master browser will eventually obtain a complete +list of all machines that are on the network. Every 11-15 minutes an election +is held to determine which machine will be the master browser. By nature of +the election criteria used, the machine with the highest uptime, or the +most senior protocol version, or other criteria, will win the election +as domain master browser.</P +><P +>Clients wishing to browse the network make use of this list, but also depend +on the availability of correct name resolution to the respective IP +address/addresses. </P +><P +>Any configuration that breaks name resolution and/or browsing intrinsics +will annoy users because they will have to put up with protracted +inability to use the network services.</P +><P +>Samba supports a feature that allows forced synchonisation +of browse lists across routed networks using the "remote +browse sync" parameter in the smb.conf file. This causes Samba +to contact the local master browser on a remote network and +to request browse list synchronisation. This effectively bridges +two networks that are separated by routers. The two remote +networks may use either broadcast based name resolution or WINS +based name resolution, but it should be noted that the "remote +browse sync" parameter provides browse list synchronisation - and +that is distinct from name to address resolution, in other +words, for cross subnet browsing to function correctly it is +essential that a name to address resolution mechanism be provided. +This mechanism could be via DNS, <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->/usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</TT +>/etc/hosts</TT +>, +and so on.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN363" +>2.5. MS Windows security options and how to configure +Samba for seemless integration</A +></H1 +><P +>MS Windows clients may use encrypted passwords as part of a +challenege/response authentication model (a.k.a. NTLMv1) or +alone, or clear text strings for simple password based +authentication. It should be realized that with the SMB +protocol the password is passed over the network either +in plain text or encrypted, but not both in the same +authentication requets.</P +><P +>When encrypted passwords are used a password that has been +entered by the user is encrypted in two ways:</P +><P ></P +><UL +><LI ><P ->The owner of the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/usr/local/samba/private/</TT -> - directory should be set to root, and the permissions on it should - be set to 0500 (<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->chmod 500 /usr/local/samba/private</B ->). +>An MD4 hash of the UNICODE of the password + string. This is known as the NT hash. </P +></LI +><LI ><P ->Likewise, the smbpasswd file inside the private directory should - be owned by root and the permissions on is should be set to 0600 - (<B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->chmod 600 smbpasswd</B ->).</P +>The password is converted to upper case, + and then padded or trucated to 14 bytes. This string is + then appended with 5 bytes of NULL characters and split to + form two 56 bit DES keys to encrypt a "magic" 8 byte value. + The resulting 16 bytes for the LanMan hash. + </P +></LI +></UL ><P ->The format of the smbpasswd file is (The line has been - wrapped here. It should appear as one entry per line in - your smbpasswd file.)</P +>You should refer to the <A +HREF="ENCRYPTION.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Password Encryption</A +> chapter in this HOWTO collection +for more details on the inner workings</P +><P +>MS Windows 95 pre-service pack 1, MS Windows NT versions 3.x +and version 4.0 pre-service pack 3 will use either mode of +password authentication. All versions of MS Windows that follow +these versions no longer support plain text passwords by default.</P +><P +>MS Windows clients have a habit of dropping network mappings that +have been idle for 10 minutes or longer. When the user attempts to +use the mapped drive connection that has been dropped the SMB protocol +has a mechanism by which the connection can be re-established using +a cached copy of the password.</P +><P +>When Microsoft changed the default password mode, they dropped support for +caching of the plain text password. This means that when the registry +parameter is changed to re-enable use of plain text passwords it appears to +work, but when a dropped mapping attempts to revalidate it will fail if +the remote authentication server does not support encrypted passwords. +This means that it is definitely not a good idea to re-enable plain text +password support in such clients.</P +><P +>The following parameters can be used to work around the +issue of Windows 9x client upper casing usernames and +password before transmitting them to the SMB server +when using clear text authentication.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->username:uid:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX: - [Account type]:LCT-<last-change-time>:Long name - </PRE -></P -><P ->Although only the <TT +> <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDLEVEL" +TARGET="_top" +>passsword level</A +> = <TT CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ><I ->username</I +>integer</I ></TT ->, - <TT +> + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMELEVEL" +TARGET="_top" +>username level</A +> = <TT CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ><I ->uid</I +>integer</I ></TT ->, <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +></PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +>By default Samba will lower case the username before attempting +to lookup the user in the database of local system accounts. +Because UNIX usernames conventionally only contain lower case +character, the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I -> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</I +>username level</I ></TT ->, - [<TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +> parameter +is rarely even needed.</P +><P +>However, password on UNIX systems often make use of mixed case +characters. This means that in order for a user on a Windows 9x +client to connect to a Samba server using clear text authentication, +the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->Account type</I +>password level</I ></TT ->] and <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +> must be set to the maximum +number of upper case letter which <EM +>could</EM +> appear +is a password. Note that is the server OS uses the traditional +DES version of crypt(), then a <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I -> last-change-time</I +>password level</I ></TT -> sections are significant - and are looked at in the Samba code.</P -><P ->It is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->VITALLY</I -> important that there by 32 - 'X' characters between the two ':' characters in the XXX sections - - the smbpasswd and Samba code will fail to validate any entries that - do not have 32 characters between ':' characters. The first XXX - section is for the Lanman password hash, the second is for the - Windows NT version.</P -><P ->When the password file is created all users have password entries - consisting of 32 'X' characters. By default this disallows any access - as this user. When a user has a password set, the 'X' characters change - to 32 ascii hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F). These are an ascii - representation of the 16 byte hashed value of a user's password.</P -><P ->To set a user to have no password (not recommended), edit the file - using vi, and replace the first 11 characters with the ascii text - <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->"NO PASSWORD"</TT -> (minus the quotes).</P +> +of 8 will result in case insensitive passwords as seen from Windows +users. This will also result in longer login times as Samba +hash to compute the permutations of the password string and +try them one by one until a match is located (or all combinations fail).</P +><P +>The best option to adopt is to enable support for encrypted passwords +where ever Samba is used. There are three configuration possibilities +for support of encrypted passwords:</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN391" +>2.5.1. Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</A +></H2 ><P ->For example, to clear the password for user bob, his smbpasswd file - entry would look like :</P +>This method involves the additions of the following parameters +in the smb.conf file:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> bob:100:NO PASSWORDXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:[U ]:LCT-00000000:Bob's full name:/bobhome:/bobshell - </PRE +> encrypt passwords = Yes + security = server + password server = "NetBIOS_name_of_PDC"</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P ->If you are allowing users to use the smbpasswd command to set - their own passwords, you may want to give users NO PASSWORD initially - so they do not have to enter a previous password when changing to their - new password (not recommended). In order for you to allow this the - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> program must be able to connect to the - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbd</B -> daemon as that user with no password. Enable this - by adding the line :</P +>There are two ways of identifying whether or not a username and +password pair was valid or not. One uses the reply information provided +as part of the authentication messaging process, the other uses +just and error code.</P +><P +>The down-side of this mode of configuration is the fact that +for security reasons Samba will send the password server a bogus +username and a bogus password and if the remote server fails to +reject the username and password pair then an alternative mode +of identification of validation is used. Where a site uses password +lock out after a certain number of failed authentication attempts +this will result in user lockouts.</P +><P +>Use of this mode of authentication does require there to be +a standard Unix account for the user, this account can be blocked +to prevent logons by other than MS Windows clients.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN399" +>2.5.2. Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</A +></H2 ><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->null passwords = yes</B +>This method involves additon of the following paramters in the smb.conf file:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> encrypt passwords = Yes + security = domain + workgroup = "name of NT domain" + password server = *</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P ->to the [global] section of the smb.conf file (this is why - the above scenario is not recommended). Preferably, allocate your - users a default password to begin with, so you do not have - to enable this on your server.</P +>The use of the "*" argument to "password server" will cause samba +to locate the domain controller in a way analogous to the way +this is done within MS Windows NT.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note : </I ->This file should be protected very - carefully. Anyone with access to this file can (with enough knowledge of - the protocols) gain access to your SMB server. The file is thus more - sensitive than a normal unix <TT +>In order for this method to work the Samba server needs to join the +MS Windows NT security domain. This is done as follows:</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>On the MS Windows NT domain controller using + the Server Manager add a machine account for the Samba server. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>Next, on the Linux system execute: + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd -r PDC_NAME -j DOMAIN_NAME</B +> + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +>Use of this mode of authentication does require there to be +a standard Unix account for the user in order to assign +a uid once the account has been authenticated by the remote +Windows DC. This account can be blocked to prevent logons by +other than MS Windows clients by things such as setting an invalid +shell in the <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/passwd</TT -> file.</P +> entry.</P +><P +>An alternative to assigning UIDs to Windows users on a +Samba member server is presented in the <A +HREF="winbind.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Winbind Overview</A +> chapter in +this HOWTO collection.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN416" +>2.5.3. Configure Samba as an authentication server</A +></H2 +><P +>This mode of authentication demands that there be on the +Unix/Linux system both a Unix style account as well as and +smbpasswd entry for the user. The Unix system account can be +locked if required as only the encrypted password will be +used for SMB client authentication.</P +><P +>This method involves addition of the following parameters to +the smb.conf file:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>## please refer to the Samba PDC HOWTO chapter later in +## this collection for more details +[global] + encrypt passwords = Yes + security = user + domain logons = Yes + ; an OS level of 33 or more is recommended + os level = 33 + +[NETLOGON] + path = /somewhare/in/file/system + read only = yes</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +>in order for this method to work a Unix system account needs +to be created for each user, as well as for each MS Windows NT/2000 +machine. The following structure is required.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN423" +>2.5.3.1. Users</A +></H3 +><P +>A user account that may provide a home directory should be +created. The following Linux system commands are typical of +the procedure for creating an account.</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> # useradd -s /bin/bash -d /home/"userid" -m + # passwd "userid" + Enter Password: <pw> + + # smbpasswd -a "userid" + Enter Password: <pw></PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN428" +>2.5.3.2. MS Windows NT Machine Accounts</A +></H3 +><P +>These are required only when Samba is used as a domain +controller. Refer to the Samba-PDC-HOWTO for more details.</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> # useradd -a /bin/false -d /dev/null "machine_name"\$ + # passwd -l "machine_name"\$ + # smbpasswd -a -m "machine_name"</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +></DIV +></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN320" ->The smbpasswd Command</A +NAME="AEN433" +>2.6. Conclusions</A ></H1 ><P ->The smbpasswd command maintains the two 32 byte password fields - in the smbpasswd file. If you wish to make it similar to the unix - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passwd</B -> or <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->yppasswd</B -> programs, - install it in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/usr/local/samba/bin/</TT -> (or your - main Samba binary directory).</P -><P ->Note that as of Samba 1.9.18p4 this program <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MUST NOT - BE INSTALLED</I -> setuid root (the new <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> - code enforces this restriction so it cannot be run this way by - accident).</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> now works in a client-server mode - where it contacts the local smbd to change the user's password on its - behalf. This has enormous benefits - as follows.</P +>Samba provides a flexible means to operate as...</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P ->smbpasswd no longer has to be setuid root - - an enormous range of potential security problems is - eliminated.</P +>A Stand-alone server - No special action is needed + other than to create user accounts. Stand-alone servers do NOT + provide network logon services, meaning that machines that use this + server do NOT perform a domain logon but instead make use only of + the MS Windows logon which is local to the MS Windows + workstation/server. + </P ></LI ><LI ><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> now has the capability - to change passwords on Windows NT servers (this only works when - the request is sent to the NT Primary Domain Controller if you - are changing an NT Domain user's password).</P +>An MS Windows NT 3.x/4.0 security domain member. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +>An alternative to an MS Windows NT 3.x/4.0 + Domain Controller. + </P ></LI ></UL +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><HR><H1 +><A +NAME="AEN443" +>Chapter 3. Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally +managed authentication</A +></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN454" +>3.1. Samba and PAM</A +></H1 ><P ->To run smbpasswd as a normal user just type :</P +>A number of Unix systems (eg: Sun Solaris), as well as the +xxxxBSD family and Linux, now utilize the Pluggable Authentication +Modules (PAM) facility to provide all authentication, +authorization and resource control services. Prior to the +introduction of PAM, a decision to use an alternative to +the system password database (<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +>) +would require the provision of alternatives for all programs that provide +security services. Such a choice would involve provision of +alternatives to such programs as: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>login</B +>, +<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>passwd</B +>, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>chown</B +>, etc.</P ><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->$ </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B ->smbpasswd</B -></TT +>PAM provides a mechanism that disconnects these security programs +from the underlying authentication/authorization infrastructure. +PAM is configured either through one file <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/pam.conf</TT +> (Solaris), +or by editing individual files that are located in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/pam.d</TT +>.</P +><P +>The following is an example <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/pam.d/login</TT +> configuration file. +This example had all options been uncommented is probably not usable +as it stacks many conditions before allowing successful completion +of the login process. Essentially all conditions can be disabled +by commenting them out except the calls to <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_pwdb.so</TT +>.</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>#%PAM-1.0 +# The PAM configuration file for the `login' service +# +auth required pam_securetty.so +auth required pam_nologin.so +# auth required pam_dialup.so +# auth optional pam_mail.so +auth required pam_pwdb.so shadow md5 +# account requisite pam_time.so +account required pam_pwdb.so +session required pam_pwdb.so +# session optional pam_lastlog.so +# password required pam_cracklib.so retry=3 +password required pam_pwdb.so shadow md5</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->Old SMB password: </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B -><type old value here - - or hit return if there was no old password></B -></TT +>PAM allows use of replacable modules. Those available on a +sample system include:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>$ /bin/ls /lib/security +pam_access.so pam_ftp.so pam_limits.so +pam_ncp_auth.so pam_rhosts_auth.so pam_stress.so +pam_cracklib.so pam_group.so pam_listfile.so +pam_nologin.so pam_rootok.so pam_tally.so +pam_deny.so pam_issue.so pam_mail.so +pam_permit.so pam_securetty.so pam_time.so +pam_dialup.so pam_lastlog.so pam_mkhomedir.so +pam_pwdb.so pam_shells.so pam_unix.so +pam_env.so pam_ldap.so pam_motd.so +pam_radius.so pam_smbpass.so pam_unix_acct.so +pam_wheel.so pam_unix_auth.so pam_unix_passwd.so +pam_userdb.so pam_warn.so pam_unix_session.so</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->New SMB Password: </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B -><type new value> - </B -></TT +>The following example for the login program replaces the use of +the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_pwdb.so</TT +> module which uses the system +password database (<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +>, +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/shadow</TT +>, <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/group</TT +>) with +the module <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_smbpass.so</TT +> which uses the Samba +database which contains the Microsoft MD4 encrypted password +hashes. This database is stored in either +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</TT +>, +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/samba/smbpasswd</TT +>, or in +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/samba.d/smbpasswd</TT +>, depending on the +Samba implementation for your Unix/Linux system. The +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_smbpass.so</TT +> module is provided by +Samba version 2.2.1 or later. It can be compiled only if the +<TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>--with-pam --with-pam_smbpass</TT +> options are both +provided to the Samba <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>configure</B +> program.</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>#%PAM-1.0 +# The PAM configuration file for the `login' service +# +auth required pam_smbpass.so nodelay +account required pam_smbpass.so nodelay +session required pam_smbpass.so nodelay +password required pam_smbpass.so nodelay</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P -><TT -CLASS="PROMPT" ->Repeat New SMB Password: </TT -><TT -CLASS="USERINPUT" -><B -><re-type new value - </B -></TT +>The following is the PAM configuration file for a particular +Linux system. The default condition uses <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_pwdb.so</TT +>.</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>#%PAM-1.0 +# The PAM configuration file for the `samba' service +# +auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nullok nodelay shadow audit +account required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay +session required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nodelay +password required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so shadow md5</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P ->If the old value does not match the current value stored for - that user, or the two new values do not match each other, then the - password will not be changed.</P +>In the following example the decision has been made to use the +smbpasswd database even for basic samba authentication. Such a +decision could also be made for the passwd program and would +thus allow the smbpasswd passwords to be changed using the passwd +program.</P ><P ->If invoked by an ordinary user it will only allow the user - to change his or her own Samba password.</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>#%PAM-1.0 +# The PAM configuration file for the `samba' service +# +auth required /lib/security/pam_smbpass.so nodelay +account required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay +session required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nodelay +password required /lib/security/pam_smbpass.so nodelay smbconf=/etc/samba.d/smb.conf</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P ><P ->If run by the root user smbpasswd may take an optional - argument, specifying the user name whose SMB password you wish to - change. Note that when run as root smbpasswd does not prompt for - or check the old password value, thus allowing root to set passwords - for users who have forgotten their passwords.</P +>Note: PAM allows stacking of authentication mechanisms. It is +also possible to pass information obtained within on PAM module through +to the next module in the PAM stack. Please refer to the documentation for +your particular system implementation for details regarding the specific +capabilities of PAM in this environment. Some Linux implmentations also +provide the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_stack.so</TT +> module that allows all +authentication to be configured in a single central file. The +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_stack.so</TT +> method has some very devoted followers +on the basis that it allows for easier administration. As with all issues in +life though, every decision makes trade-offs, so you may want examine the +PAM documentation for further helpful information.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN496" +>3.2. Distributed Authentication</A +></H1 ><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> is designed to work in the same way - and be familiar to UNIX users who use the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->passwd</B -> or - <B +>The astute administrator will realize from this that the +combination of <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_smbpass.so</TT +>, +<B CLASS="COMMAND" ->yppasswd</B -> commands.</P -><P ->For more details on using <B +>winbindd</B +>, and <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbpasswd</B -> refer - to the man page which will always be the definitive reference.</P +>rsync</B +> (see +<A +HREF="http://rsync.samba.org/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://rsync.samba.org/</A +>) +will allow the establishment of a centrally managed, distributed +user/password database that can also be used by all +PAM (eg: Linux) aware programs and applications. This arrangement +can have particularly potent advantages compared with the +use of Microsoft Active Directory Service (ADS) in so far as +reduction of wide area network authentication traffic.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN359" ->Setting up Samba to support LanManager Encryption</A +NAME="AEN503" +>3.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A ></H1 ><P ->This is a very brief description on how to setup samba to - support password encryption. </P -><P -></P -><OL -TYPE="1" -><LI +>There is an option in smb.conf called <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS" +TARGET="_top" +>obey pam restrictions</A +>. +The following is from the on-line help for this option in SWAT;</P ><P ->compile and install samba as usual</P -></LI -><LI +>When Samba 2.2 is configure to enable PAM support (i.e. +<TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>--with-pam</TT +>), this parameter will +control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account +and session management directives. The default behavior +is to use PAM for clear text authentication only and to +ignore any account or session management. Note that Samba always +ignores PAM for authentication in the case of +<A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +TARGET="_top" +>encrypt passwords = yes</A +>. +The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response +authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB +password encryption. </P ><P ->enable encrypted passwords in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" -> smb.conf</TT -> by adding the line <B +>Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->encrypt - passwords = yes</B -> in the [global] section</P -></LI -><LI -><P ->create the initial <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smbpasswd</TT -> - password file in the place you specified in the Makefile - (--prefix=<dir>). See the notes under the <A -HREF="#SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT" ->The smbpasswd File</A -> - section earlier in the document for details.</P -></LI -></OL -><P ->Note that you can test things using smbclient.</P +>obey pam restrictions = no</B +></P ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="AEN374" ->Chapter 3. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A +NAME="AEN512" +>Chapter 4. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A ></H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN385" ->Instructions</A +NAME="AEN523" +>4.1. Instructions</A ></H1 ><P >The Distributed File System (or Dfs) provides a means of @@ -2066,7 +3201,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" to other servers. For example, a symbolic link <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->junction->msdfs:storage1\share1</TT +>junction->msdfs:storage1\share1</TT > in the share directory acts as the Dfs junction. When Dfs-aware clients attempt to access the junction link, they are redirected @@ -2078,6 +3213,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >Here's an example of setting up a Dfs tree on a Samba server.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ># The smb.conf file: @@ -2089,6 +3230,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" path = /export/dfsroot msdfs root = yes </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >In the /export/dfsroot directory we set up our dfs links to @@ -2161,8 +3305,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN420" ->Notes</A +NAME="AEN558" +>4.1.1. Notes</A ></H2 ><P ></P @@ -2194,84 +3338,854 @@ NAME="AEN420" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="AEN429" ->Chapter 4. Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</A +NAME="AEN567" +>Chapter 5. UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A ></H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN440" ->Introduction</A +NAME="AEN578" +>5.1. Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT + security dialogs</A +></H1 +><P +>New in the Samba 2.0.4 release is the ability for Windows + NT clients to use their native security settings dialog box to + view and modify the underlying UNIX permissions.</P +><P +>Note that this ability is careful not to compromise + the security of the UNIX host Samba is running on, and + still obeys all the file permission rules that a Samba + administrator can set.</P +><P +>In Samba 2.0.4 and above the default value of the + parameter <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NTACLSUPPORT" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> nt acl support</I +></TT +></A +> has been changed from + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, so + manipulation of permissions is turned on by default.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN587" +>5.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</A +></H1 +><P +>From an NT 4.0 client, single-click with the right + mouse button on any file or directory in a Samba mounted + drive letter or UNC path. When the menu pops-up, click + on the <EM +>Properties</EM +> entry at the bottom of + the menu. This brings up the normal file properties dialog + box, but with Samba 2.0.4 this will have a new tab along the top + marked <EM +>Security</EM +>. Click on this tab and you + will see three buttons, <EM +>Permissions</EM +>, + <EM +>Auditing</EM +>, and <EM +>Ownership</EM +>. + The <EM +>Auditing</EM +> button will cause either + an error message <SPAN +CLASS="ERRORNAME" +>A requested privilege is not held + by the client</SPAN +> to appear if the user is not the + NT Administrator, or a dialog which is intended to allow an + Administrator to add auditing requirements to a file if the + user is logged on as the NT Administrator. This dialog is + non-functional with a Samba share at this time, as the only + useful button, the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Add</B +> button will not currently + allow a list of users to be seen.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN598" +>5.3. Viewing file ownership</A +></H1 +><P +>Clicking on the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Ownership"</B +> button + brings up a dialog box telling you who owns the given file. The + owner name will be of the form :</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B +></P +><P +>Where <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>SERVER</I +></TT +> is the NetBIOS name of + the Samba server, <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> is the user name of + the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>(Long name)</I +></TT +> + is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the + GECOS field of the UNIX password database). Click on the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Close + </B +> button to remove this dialog.</P +><P +>If the parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt acl support</I +></TT +> + is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> then the file owner will + be shown as the NT user <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Everyone"</B +>.</P +><P +>The <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Take Ownership</B +> button will not allow + you to change the ownership of this file to yourself (clicking on + it will display a dialog box complaining that the user you are + currently logged onto the NT client cannot be found). The reason + for this is that changing the ownership of a file is a privileged + operation in UNIX, available only to the <EM +>root</EM +> + user. As clicking on this button causes NT to attempt to change + the ownership of a file to the current user logged into the NT + client this will not work with Samba at this time.</P +><P +>There is an NT chown command that will work with Samba + and allow a user with Administrator privilege connected + to a Samba 2.0.4 server as root to change the ownership of + files on both a local NTFS filesystem or remote mounted NTFS + or Samba drive. This is available as part of the <EM +>Seclib + </EM +> NT security library written by Jeremy Allison of + the Samba Team, available from the main Samba ftp site.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN618" +>5.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</A +></H1 +><P +>The third button is the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Permissions"</B +> + button. Clicking on this brings up a dialog box that shows both + the permissions and the UNIX owner of the file or directory. + The owner is displayed in the form :</P +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B +></P +><P +>Where <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>SERVER</I +></TT +> is the NetBIOS name of + the Samba server, <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>user</I +></TT +> is the user name of + the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>(Long name)</I +></TT +> + is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the + GECOS field of the UNIX password database).</P +><P +>If the parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt acl support</I +></TT +> + is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> then the file owner will + be shown as the NT user <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Everyone"</B +> and the + permissions will be shown as NT "Full Control".</P +><P +>The permissions field is displayed differently for files + and directories, so I'll describe the way file permissions + are displayed first.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN633" +>5.4.1. File Permissions</A +></H2 +><P +>The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and + the corresponding "read", "write", "execute" permissions + triples are mapped by Samba into a three element NT ACL + with the 'r', 'w', and 'x' bits mapped into the corresponding + NT permissions. The UNIX world permissions are mapped into + the global NT group <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>Everyone</B +>, followed + by the list of permissions allowed for UNIX world. The UNIX + owner and group permissions are displayed as an NT + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>user</B +> icon and an NT <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>local + group</B +> icon respectively followed by the list + of permissions allowed for the UNIX user and group.</P +><P +>As many UNIX permission sets don't map into common + NT names such as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"read"</B +>, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> "change"</B +> or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"full control"</B +> then + usually the permissions will be prefixed by the words <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> "Special Access"</B +> in the NT display list.</P +><P +>But what happens if the file has no permissions allowed + for a particular UNIX user group or world component ? In order + to allow "no permissions" to be seen and modified then Samba + overloads the NT <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Take Ownership"</B +> ACL attribute + (which has no meaning in UNIX) and reports a component with + no permissions as having the NT <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"O"</B +> bit set. + This was chosen of course to make it look like a zero, meaning + zero permissions. More details on the decision behind this will + be given below.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN647" +>5.4.2. Directory Permissions</A +></H2 +><P +>Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two + different sets of permissions. The first set of permissions + is the ACL set on the directory itself, this is usually displayed + in the first set of parentheses in the normal <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"RW"</B +> + NT style. This first set of permissions is created by Samba in + exactly the same way as normal file permissions are, described + above, and is displayed in the same way.</P +><P +>The second set of directory permissions has no real meaning + in the UNIX permissions world and represents the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +> "inherited"</B +> permissions that any file created within + this directory would inherit.</P +><P +>Samba synthesises these inherited permissions for NT by + returning as an NT ACL the UNIX permission mode that a new file + created by Samba on this share would receive.</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN654" +>5.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</A +></H1 +><P +>Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple + as changing the displayed permissions in the dialog box, and + clicking the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>OK</B +> button. However, there are + limitations that a user needs to be aware of, and also interactions + with the standard Samba permission masks and mapping of DOS + attributes that need to also be taken into account.</P +><P +>If the parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>nt acl support</I +></TT +> + is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> then any attempt to set + security permissions will fail with an <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Access Denied" + </B +> message.</P +><P +>The first thing to note is that the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Add"</B +> + button will not return a list of users in Samba 2.0.4 (it will give + an error message of <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"The remote procedure call failed + and did not execute"</B +>). This means that you can only + manipulate the current user/group/world permissions listed in + the dialog box. This actually works quite well as these are the + only permissions that UNIX actually has.</P +><P +>If a permission triple (either user, group, or world) + is removed from the list of permissions in the NT dialog box, + then when the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> button is pressed it will + be applied as "no permissions" on the UNIX side. If you then + view the permissions again the "no permissions" entry will appear + as the NT <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"O"</B +> flag, as described above. This + allows you to add permissions back to a file or directory once + you have removed them from a triple component.</P +><P +>As UNIX supports only the "r", "w" and "x" bits of + an NT ACL then if other NT security attributes such as "Delete + access" are selected then they will be ignored when applied on + the Samba server.</P +><P +>When setting permissions on a directory the second + set of permissions (in the second set of parentheses) is + by default applied to all files within that directory. If this + is not what you want you must uncheck the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Replace + permissions on existing files"</B +> checkbox in the NT + dialog before clicking <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +>.</P +><P +>If you wish to remove all permissions from a + user/group/world component then you may either highlight the + component and click the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Remove"</B +> button, + or set the component to only have the special <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Take + Ownership"</B +> permission (displayed as <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"O" + </B +>) highlighted.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN676" +>5.6. Interaction with the standard Samba create mask + parameters</A +></H1 +><P +>Note that with Samba 2.0.5 there are four new parameters + to control this interaction. These are :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security mask</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security mode</I +></TT +></P +><P +>Once a user clicks <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> to apply the + permissions Samba maps the given permissions into a user/group/world + r/w/x triple set, and then will check the changed permissions for a + file against the bits set in the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK" +TARGET="_top" +> + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. Any bits that + were changed that are not set to '1' in this parameter are left alone + in the file permissions.</P +><P +>Essentially, zero bits in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +> + mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is <EM +>not</EM +> + allowed to change, and one bits are those the user is allowed to change. + </P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value as + the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask + </I +></TT +></A +> parameter to provide compatibility with Samba 2.0.4 + where this permission change facility was introduced. To allow a user to + modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, set this parameter + to 0777.</P +><P +>Next Samba checks the changed permissions for a file against + the bits set in the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCESECURITYMODE" +TARGET="_top" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter. Any bits + that were changed that correspond to bits set to '1' in this parameter + are forced to be set.</P +><P +>Essentially, bits set in the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode + </I +></TT +> parameter may be treated as a set of bits that, when + modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P +><P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value + as the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + create mode</I +></TT +></A +> parameter to provide compatibility + with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility was introduced. + To allow a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file + with no restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +> and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + security mode</I +></TT +> parameters are applied to the change + request in that order.</P +><P +>For a directory Samba will perform the same operations as + described above for a file except using the parameter <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> directory security mask</I +></TT +> instead of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security + mask</I +></TT +>, and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security mode + </I +></TT +> parameter instead of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode + </I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security mask</I +></TT +> parameter + by default is set to the same value as the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask + </I +></TT +> parameter and the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security + mode</I +></TT +> parameter by default is set to the same value as + the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode</I +></TT +> parameter to provide + compatibility with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility + was introduced.</P +><P +>In this way Samba enforces the permission restrictions that + an administrator can set on a Samba share, whilst still allowing users + to modify the permission bits within that restriction.</P +><P +>If you want to set up a share that allows users full control + in modifying the permission bits on their files and directories and + doesn't force any particular bits to be set 'on', then set the following + parameters in the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf(5) + </TT +></A +> file in that share specific section :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask = 0777</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force security mode = 0</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security mask = 0777</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory security mode = 0</I +></TT +></P +><P +>As described, in Samba 2.0.4 the parameters :</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask</I +></TT +></P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode</I +></TT +></P +><P +>were used instead of the parameters discussed here.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN740" +>5.7. Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute + mapping</A +></H1 +><P +>Samba maps some of the DOS attribute bits (such as "read + only") into the UNIX permissions of a file. This means there can + be a conflict between the permission bits set via the security + dialog and the permission bits set by the file attribute mapping. + </P +><P +>One way this can show up is if a file has no UNIX read access + for the owner it will show up as "read only" in the standard + file attributes tabbed dialog. Unfortunately this dialog is + the same one that contains the security info in another tab.</P +><P +>What this can mean is that if the owner changes the permissions + to allow themselves read access using the security dialog, clicks + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> to get back to the standard attributes tab + dialog, and then clicks <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> on that dialog, then + NT will set the file permissions back to read-only (as that is what + the attributes still say in the dialog). This means that after setting + permissions and clicking <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> to get back to the + attributes dialog you should always hit <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"Cancel"</B +> + rather than <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>"OK"</B +> to ensure that your changes + are not overridden.</P +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><HR><H1 +><A +NAME="AEN750" +>Chapter 6. Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</A +></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN761" +>6.1. Introduction</A ></H1 ><P >Beginning with the 2.2.0 release, Samba supports - the native Windows NT printing mechanisms implemented via - MS-RPC (i.e. the SPOOLSS named pipe). Previous versions of - Samba only supported LanMan printing calls.</P +the native Windows NT printing mechanisms implemented via +MS-RPC (i.e. the SPOOLSS named pipe). Previous versions of +Samba only supported LanMan printing calls.</P ><P >The additional functionality provided by the new - SPOOLSS support includes:</P +SPOOLSS support includes:</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P >Support for downloading printer driver - files to Windows 95/98/NT/2000 clients upon demand. - </P + files to Windows 95/98/NT/2000 clients upon demand. + </P ></LI ><LI ><P >Uploading of printer drivers via the - Windows NT Add Printer Wizard (APW) or the <A + Windows NT Add Printer Wizard (APW) or the + Imprints tool set (refer to <A HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net" TARGET="_top" ->Imprints tool set - </A -></P +>http://imprints.sourceforge.net</A +>). + </P ></LI ><LI ><P >Support for the native MS-RPC printing - calls such as StartDocPrinter, EnumJobs(), etc... (See - the <A + calls such as StartDocPrinter, EnumJobs(), etc... (See + the MSDN documentation at <A HREF="http://msdn.microsoft.com/" TARGET="_top" ->MSDN documentation - </A -> for more information on the Win32 printing API) - </P +>http://msdn.microsoft.com/</A +> + for more information on the Win32 printing API) + </P ></LI ><LI ><P >Support for NT Access Control Lists (ACL) - on printer objects</P + on printer objects</P ></LI ><LI ><P >Improved support for printer queue manipulation - through the use of an internal databases for spooled job - information</P + through the use of an internal databases for spooled job + information</P ></LI ></UL +><P +>There has been some initial confusion about what all this means +and whether or not it is a requirement for printer drivers to be +installed on a Samba host in order to support printing from Windows +clients. A bug existed in Samba 2.2.0 which made Windows NT/2000 clients +require that the Samba server possess a valid driver for the printer. +This is fixed in Samba 2.2.1 and once again, Windows NT/2000 clients +can use the local APW for installing drivers to be used with a Samba +served printer. This is the same behavior exhibited by Windows 9x clients. +As a side note, Samba does not use these drivers in any way to process +spooled files. They are utilized entirely by the clients.</P +><P +>The following MS KB article, may be of some help if you are dealing with +Windows 2000 clients: <EM +>How to Add Printers with No User +Interaction in Windows 2000</EM +></P +><P +><A +HREF="http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q189/1/05.ASP" +TARGET="_top" +>http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q189/1/05.ASP</A +></P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN457" ->Configuration</A +NAME="AEN783" +>6.2. Configuration</A ></H1 -><P ->In order to support the uploading of printer driver - files, you must first configure a file share named [print$]. - The name of this share is hard coded in Samba's internals so - the name is very important (print$ is the service used by - Windows NT print servers to provide support for printer driver - download).</P ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" ><P @@ -2284,70 +4198,104 @@ WIDTH="100%" ><TD ALIGN="CENTER" ><B ->Warning</B +>[print$] vs. [printer$]</B ></TD ></TR ><TR ><TD ALIGN="LEFT" ><P ->Previous versions of Samba recommended using - a share named [printer$]. This name was taken from the - printer$ service created by Windows 9x clients when a - printer was shared. Windows 9x printer servers always have - a printer$ service which provides read-only access via no - password in order to support printer driver downloads.</P +>Previous versions of Samba recommended using a share named [printer$]. +This name was taken from the printer$ service created by Windows 9x +clients when a printer was shared. Windows 9x printer servers always have +a printer$ service which provides read-only access via no +password in order to support printer driver downloads.</P ><P >However, the initial implementation allowed for a - parameter named <TT +parameter named <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >printer driver location</I ></TT > - to be used on a per share basis to specify the location of - the driver files associated with that printer. Another - parameter named <TT +to be used on a per share basis to specify the location of +the driver files associated with that printer. Another +parameter named <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >printer driver</I ></TT > provided - a means of defining the printer driver name to be sent to - the client.</P +a means of defining the printer driver name to be sent to +the client.</P ><P >These parameters, including <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->printer driver - file</I +>printer driver +file</I ></TT > parameter, are being depreciated and should not - be used in new installations. For more information on this change, - you should refer to the <A +be used in new installations. For more information on this change, +you should refer to the <A HREF="#MIGRATION" ->Migration section - </A ->of this document.</P +>Migration section</A +> +of this document.</P ></TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN794" +>6.2.1. Creating [print$]</A +></H2 ><P ->You should modify the server's smb.conf file to create the - following file share (of course, some of the parameter values, - such as 'path' are arbitrary and should be replaced with - appropriate values for your site):</P +>In order to support the uploading of printer driver +files, you must first configure a file share named [print$]. +The name of this share is hard coded in Samba's internals so +the name is very important (print$ is the service used by +Windows NT print servers to provide support for printer driver +download).</P +><P +>You should modify the server's smb.conf file to add the global +parameters and to create the +following file share (of course, some of the parameter values, +such as 'path' are arbitrary and should be replaced with +appropriate values for your site):</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->[print$] - path = /usr/local/samba/printers - guest ok = yes - browseable = yes - read only = yes - write list = ntadmin - </PRE +>[global] + ; members of the ntadmin group should be able + ; to add drivers and set printer properties + ; root is implicitly a 'printer admin' + printer admin = @ntadmin + +[print$] + path = /usr/local/samba/printers + guest ok = yes + browseable = yes + read only = yes + ; since this share is configured as read only, then we need + ; a 'write list'. Check the file system permissions to make + ; sure this account can copy files to the share. If this + ; is setup to a non-root account, then it should also exist + ; as a 'printer admin' + write list = @ntadmin,root</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >The <A @@ -2356,70 +4304,82 @@ TARGET="_top" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I -> write list</I +>write list</I ></TT ></A > is used to allow administrative - level user accounts to have write access in order to update files - on the share. See the <A +level user accounts to have write access in order to update files +on the share. See the <A HREF="smb./conf.5.html" TARGET="_top" -> smb.conf(5) man page</A -> for more information on - configuring file shares.</P +>smb.conf(5) +man page</A +> for more information on configuring file shares.</P ><P >The requirement for <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" TARGET="_top" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" -> guest ok = yes</B +>guest +ok = yes</B ></A > depends upon how your - site is configured. If users will be guaranteed to have - an account on the Samba host, then this is a non-issue.</P +site is configured. If users will be guaranteed to have +an account on the Samba host, then this is a non-issue.</P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->author's note: </I ->The non-issue is that - if all your Windows NT users are guarenteed to be authenticated - by the Samba server (such as a domain member server and the NT - user has already been validated by the Domain Controller in - order to logon to the Windows NT console), then guest access - is not necessary. Of course, in a workgroup environment where - you just want to be able to print without worrying about - silly accounts and security, then configure the share for - guest access. You'll probably want to add <A +><B +>Author's Note: </B +>The non-issue is that if all your Windows NT users are guaranteed to be +authenticated by the Samba server (such as a domain member server and the NT +user has already been validated by the Domain Controller in +order to logon to the Windows NT console), then guest access +is not necessary. Of course, in a workgroup environment where +you just want to be able to print without worrying about +silly accounts and security, then configure the share for +guest access. You'll probably want to add <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST" TARGET="_top" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->map to guest = Bad User - </B +>map to guest = Bad User</B ></A > in the [global] section as well. Make sure - you understand what this parameter does before using it - though. --jerry]</P +you understand what this parameter does before using it +though. --jerry</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV ><P >In order for a Windows NT print server to support - the downloading of driver files by multiple client architectures, - it must create subdirectories within the [print$] service - which correspond to each of the supported client architectures. - Samba follows this model as well.</P +the downloading of driver files by multiple client architectures, +it must create subdirectories within the [print$] service +which correspond to each of the supported client architectures. +Samba follows this model as well.</P ><P >Next create the directory tree below the [print$] share - for each architecture you wish to support.</P +for each architecture you wish to support.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> [print$]----- - |-W32X86 ; "Windows NT x86" - |-WIN40 ; "Windows 95/98" - |-W32ALPHA ; "Windows NT Alpha_AXP" - |-W32MIPS ; "Windows NT R4000" - |-W32PPC ; "Windows NT PowerPC" - </PRE +>[print$]----- + |-W32X86 ; "Windows NT x86" + |-WIN40 ; "Windows 95/98" + |-W32ALPHA ; "Windows NT Alpha_AXP" + |-W32MIPS ; "Windows NT R4000" + |-W32PPC ; "Windows NT PowerPC"</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" @@ -2433,38 +4393,34 @@ WIDTH="100%" ><TD ALIGN="CENTER" ><B ->Warning</B +>ATTENTION! REQUIRED PERMISSIONS</B ></TD ></TR ><TR ><TD ALIGN="LEFT" ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->ATTENTION! REQUIRED PERMISSIONS</I -></P -><P >In order to currently add a new driver to you Samba host, - one of two conditions must hold true:</P +one of two conditions must hold true:</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P >The account used to connect to the Samba host - must have a uid of 0 (i.e. a root account)</P + must have a uid of 0 (i.e. a root account)</P ></LI ><LI ><P >The account used to connect to the Samba host - must be a member of the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" + must be a member of the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERADMIN" TARGET="_top" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I -> printer admin</I +>printer + admin</I ></TT ></A > list.</P @@ -2472,97 +4428,132 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></UL ><P >Of course, the connected account must still possess access - to add files to the subdirectories beneath [print$].</P +to add files to the subdirectories beneath [print$]. Remember +that all file shares are set to 'read only' by default.</P ></TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV ><P >Once you have created the required [print$] service and - associated subdirectories, simply log onto the Samba server using - a root (or <TT +associated subdirectories, simply log onto the Samba server using +a root (or <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >printer admin</I ></TT >) account - from a Windows NT 4.0 client. Navigate to the "Printers" folder - on the Samba server. You should see an initial listing of printers - that matches the printer shares defined on your Samba host.</P +from a Windows NT 4.0 client. Navigate to the "Printers" folder +on the Samba server. You should see an initial listing of printers +that matches the printer shares defined on your Samba host.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN829" +>6.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A +></H2 ><P >The initial listing of printers in the Samba host's - Printers folder will have no printer driver assigned to them. - The way assign a driver to a printer is to view the Properties - of the printer and either</P +Printers folder will have no real printer driver assigned +to them. By default, in Samba 2.2.0 this driver name was set to +<EM +>NO PRINTER DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER</EM +>. +Later versions changed this to a NULL string to allow the use +tof the local Add Printer Wizard on NT/2000 clients. +Attempting to view the printer properties for a printer +which has this default driver assigned will result in +the error message:</P +><P +><EM +>Device settings cannot be displayed. The driver +for the specified printer is not installed, only spooler +properties will be displayed. Do you want to install the +driver now?</EM +></P +><P +>Click "No" in the error dialog and you will be presented with +the printer properties window. The way assign a driver to a +printer is to either</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P >Use the "New Driver..." button to install - a new printer driver, or</P + a new printer driver, or</P ></LI ><LI ><P >Select a driver from the popup list of - installed drivers. Initially this list will be empty.</P + installed drivers. Initially this list will be empty.</P ></LI ></UL ><P >If you wish to install printer drivers for client - operating systems other than "Windows NT x86", you will need - to use the "Sharing" tab of the printer properties dialog.</P +operating systems other than "Windows NT x86", you will need +to use the "Sharing" tab of the printer properties dialog.</P ><P >Assuming you have connected with a root account, you - will also be able modify other printer properties such as - ACLs and device settings using this dialog box.</P +will also be able modify other printer properties such as +ACLs and device settings using this dialog box.</P ><P >A few closing comments for this section, it is possible - on a Windows NT print server to have printers - listed in the Printers folder which are not shared. Samba does - not make this distinction. By definition, the only printers of - which Samba is aware are those which are specified as shares in - <TT +on a Windows NT print server to have printers +listed in the Printers folder which are not shared. Samba does +not make this distinction. By definition, the only printers of +which Samba is aware are those which are specified as shares in +<TT CLASS="FILENAME" >smb.conf</TT >.</P ><P >Another interesting side note is that Windows NT clients do - not use the SMB printer share, but rather can print directly - to any printer on another Windows NT host using MS-RPC. This - of course assumes that the printing client has the necessary - privileges on the remote host serving the printer. The default - permissions assigned by Windows NT to a printer gives the "Print" - permissions to the "Everyone" well-known group.</P +not use the SMB printer share, but rather can print directly +to any printer on another Windows NT host using MS-RPC. This +of course assumes that the printing client has the necessary +privileges on the remote host serving the printer. The default +permissions assigned by Windows NT to a printer gives the "Print" +permissions to the "Everyone" well-known group.</P +></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN511" ->Support a large number of printers</A +NAME="AEN846" +>6.2.3. Support a large number of printers</A ></H2 ><P >One issue that has arisen during the development - phase of Samba 2.2 is the need to support driver downloads for - 100's of printers. Using the Windows NT APW is somewhat - awkward to say the list. If more than one printer are using the - same driver, the <A +phase of Samba 2.2 is the need to support driver downloads for +100's of printers. Using the Windows NT APW is somewhat +awkward to say the list. If more than one printer are using the +same driver, the <A HREF="rpcclient.1.html" TARGET="_top" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >rpcclient's - setdriver command</B +setdriver command</B ></A > can be used to set the driver - associated with an installed driver. The following is example - of how this could be accomplished:</P +associated with an installed driver. The following is example +of how this could be accomplished:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > - <TT +<TT CLASS="PROMPT" >$ </TT >rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "enumdrivers" @@ -2570,36 +4561,180 @@ Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3] [Windows NT x86] Printer Driver Info 1: - Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS] + Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS] Printer Driver Info 1: - Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 2100 Series PS] + Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 2100 Series PS] Printer Driver Info 1: - Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4Si/4SiMX PS] + Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4Si/4SiMX PS] - <TT +<TT CLASS="PROMPT" >$ </TT >rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "enumprinters" Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3] - flags:[0x800000] - name:[\\POGO\hp-print] - description:[POGO\\POGO\hp-print,NO DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER,] - comment:[] + flags:[0x800000] + name:[\\POGO\hp-print] + description:[POGO\\POGO\hp-print,NO DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER,] + comment:[] - <TT +<TT CLASS="PROMPT" >$ </TT ->rpcclient pogo -U root%bleaK.er \ - <TT +>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret \ +<TT CLASS="PROMPT" ->> </TT +>> </TT > -c "setdriver hp-print \"HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS\"" Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3] -Succesfully set hp-print to driver HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS. - </PRE +Successfully set hp-print to driver HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS.</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN857" +>6.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A +></H2 +><P +>By default, Samba offers all printer shares defined in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> +in the "Printers..." folder. Also existing in this folder is the Windows NT +Add Printer Wizard icon. The APW will be show only if</P +><P ></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The connected user is able to successfully + execute an OpenPrinterEx(\\server) with administrative + privileges (i.e. root or <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer admin</I +></TT +>). + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>show + add printer wizard = yes</I +></TT +></A +> (the default). + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +>In order to be able to use the APW to successfully add a printer to a Samba +server, the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add +printer command</I +></TT +></A +> must have a defined value. The program +hook must successfully add the printer to the system (i.e. +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/printcap</TT +> or appropriate files) and +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> if necessary.</P +><P +>When using the APW from a client, if the named printer share does +not exist, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will execute the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add printer +command</I +></TT +> and reparse to the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> +to attempt to locate the new printer share. If the share is still not defined, +an error of "Access Denied" is returned to the client. Note that the +<TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add printer program</I +></TT +> is executed under the context +of the connected user, not necessarily a root account.</P +><P +>There is a complementing <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete +printer command</I +></TT +></A +> for removing entries from the "Printers..." +folder.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN882" +>6.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</A +></H2 +><P +>Windows NT/2000 print servers associate a port with each printer. These normally +take the form of LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:, etc... Samba must also support the +concept of ports associated with a printer. By default, only one printer port, +named "Samba Printer Port", exists on a system. Samba does not really a port in +order to print, rather it is a requirement of Windows clients. </P +><P +>Note that Samba does not support the concept of "Printer Pooling" internally +either. This is when a logical printer is assigned to multiple ports as +a form of load balancing or fail over.</P +><P +>If you require that multiple ports be defined for some reason, +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> possesses a <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENUMPORTSCOMMAND" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>enumports +command</I +></TT +></A +> which can be used to define an external program +that generates a listing of ports on a system.</P ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV @@ -2607,8 +4742,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN522" ->The Imprints Toolset</A +NAME="AEN890" +>6.3. The Imprints Toolset</A ></H1 ><P >The Imprints tool set provides a UNIX equivalent of the @@ -2625,8 +4760,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN526" ->What is Imprints?</A +NAME="AEN894" +>6.3.1. What is Imprints?</A ></H2 ><P >Imprints is a collection of tools for supporting the goals @@ -2657,8 +4792,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN536" ->Creating Printer Driver Packages</A +NAME="AEN904" +>6.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</A ></H2 ><P >The process of creating printer driver packages is beyond @@ -2673,8 +4808,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN539" ->The Imprints server</A +NAME="AEN907" +>6.3.3. The Imprints server</A ></H2 ><P >The Imprints server is really a database server that @@ -2683,9 +4818,8 @@ NAME="AEN539" downloading of the package. Each package is digitally signed via GnuPG which can be used to verify that package downloaded is actually the one referred in the Imprints database. It is - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not</I + <EM +>not</EM > recommended that this security check be disabled.</P ></DIV @@ -2694,8 +4828,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN543" ->The Installation Client</A +NAME="AEN911" +>6.3.4. The Installation Client</A ></H2 ><P >More information regarding the Imprints installation client @@ -2736,27 +4870,35 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >rpcclient</B >.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > - foreach (supported architecture for a given driver) - { - 1. rpcclient: Get the appropriate upload directory - on the remote server - 2. smbclient: Upload the driver files - 3. rpcclient: Issues an AddPrinterDriver() MS-RPC - } +foreach (supported architecture for a given driver) +{ + 1. rpcclient: Get the appropriate upload directory + on the remote server + 2. smbclient: Upload the driver files + 3. rpcclient: Issues an AddPrinterDriver() MS-RPC +} - 4. rpcclient: Issue an AddPrinterEx() MS-RPC to actually - create the printer - </PRE +4. rpcclient: Issue an AddPrinterEx() MS-RPC to actually + create the printer</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >One of the problems encountered when implementing the Imprints tool set was the name space issues between various supported client architectures. For example, Windows NT includes a driver named "Apple LaserWriter II NTX v51.8" - and Windows 95 callsits version of this driver "Apple + and Windows 95 calls its version of this driver "Apple LaserWriter II NTX"</P ><P >The problem is how to know what client drivers have @@ -2772,7 +4914,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ></P ><P >will reveal that Windows NT always uses the NT driver - name. The is ok as Windows NT always requires that at least + name. This is ok as Windows NT always requires that at least the Windows NT version of the printer driver is present. However, Samba does not have the requirement internally. Therefore, how can you use the NT driver name if is has not @@ -2789,18 +4931,60 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN565" -><A +NAME="AEN933" +>6.4. <A NAME="MIGRATION" ></A ->Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to - 2.2.x</A +>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to 2.2.x</A ></H1 ><P ->Given that printer driver management has changed - (we hope improved :) ) in 2.2.0 over prior releases, - migration from an existing setup to 2.2.0 can follow - several paths.</P +>Given that printer driver management has changed (we hope improved) in +2.2 over prior releases, migration from an existing setup to 2.2 can +follow several paths.</P +><P +>Windows clients have a tendency to remember things for quite a while. +For example, if a Windows NT client has attached to a Samba 2.0 server, +it will remember the server as a LanMan printer server. Upgrading +the Samba host to 2.2 makes support for MSRPC printing possible, but +the NT client will still remember the previous setting.</P +><P +>In order to give an NT client printing "amnesia" (only necessary if you +want to use the newer MSRPC printing functionality in Samba), delete +the registry keys associated with the print server contained in +<TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>[HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print]</TT +>. The +spooler service on the client should be stopped prior to doing this:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>C:\WINNT\ ></TT +> <TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>net stop spooler</B +></TT +></P +><P +><EM +>All the normal disclaimers about editing the registry go +here.</EM +> Be careful, and know what you are doing.</P +><P +>The spooler service should be restarted after you have finished +removing the appropriate registry entries by replacing the +<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>stop</B +> command above with <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>start</B +>.</P +><P +>Windows 9x clients will continue to use LanMan printing calls +with a 2.2 Samba server so there is no need to perform any of these +modifications on non-NT clients.</P ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" ><P @@ -2813,16 +4997,15 @@ WIDTH="100%" ><TD ALIGN="CENTER" ><B ->Warning</B +>Achtung!</B ></TD ></TR ><TR ><TD ALIGN="LEFT" ><P ->The following smb.conf parameters are considered to be - depreciated and will be removed soon. Do not use them - in new installations</P +>The following smb.conf parameters are considered to be depreciated and will +be removed soon. Do not use them in new installations</P ><P ></P ><UL @@ -2834,7 +5017,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >printer driver file (G)</I ></TT > - </P + </P ></LI ><LI ><P @@ -2844,7 +5027,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >printer driver (S)</I ></TT > - </P + </P ></LI ><LI ><P @@ -2854,7 +5037,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >printer driver location (S)</I ></TT > - </P + </P ></LI ></UL ></TD @@ -2869,46 +5052,54 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P >If you do not desire the new Windows NT - print driver support, nothing needs to be done. - All existing parameters work the same.</P + print driver support, nothing needs to be done. + All existing parameters work the same.</P ></LI ><LI ><P >If you want to take advantage of NT printer - driver support but do not want to migrate the - 9x drivers to the new setup, the leave the existing - printers.def file. When smbd attempts to locate a - 9x driver for the printer in the TDB and fails it - will drop down to using the printers.def (and all - associated parameters). The <B + driver support but do not want to migrate the + 9x drivers to the new setup, the leave the existing + printers.def file. When smbd attempts to locate a + 9x driver for the printer in the TDB and fails it + will drop down to using the printers.def (and all + associated parameters). The <B CLASS="COMMAND" >make_printerdef</B > - tool will also remain for backwards compatibility but will - be moved to the "this tool is the old way of doing it" - pile.</P + tool will also remain for backwards compatibility but will + be moved to the "this tool is the old way of doing it" + pile.</P ></LI ><LI ><P >If you install a Windows 9x driver for a printer - on your Samba host (in the printing TDB), this information will - take precedence and the three old printing parameters - will be ignored (including print driver location).</P + on your Samba host (in the printing TDB), this information will + take precedence and the three old printing parameters + will be ignored (including print driver location).</P ></LI ><LI ><P >If you want to migrate an existing <TT CLASS="FILENAME" -> printers.def</TT -> file into the new setup, the current only - solution is to use the Windows NT APW to install the NT drivers - and the 9x drivers. This can be scripted using smbclient and - rpcclient. See the <A +>printers.def</TT +> + file into the new setup, the current only solution is to use the Windows + NT APW to install the NT drivers and the 9x drivers. This can be scripted + using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient</B +> and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>rpcclient</B +>. See the + Imprints installation client at <A HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net/" TARGET="_top" -> Imprints insrallation client</A -> for an example. - </P +>http://imprints.sourceforge.net/</A +> + for an example. + </P ></LI ></UL ></DIV @@ -2917,16 +5108,16 @@ TARGET="_top" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="AEN594" ->Chapter 5. security = domain in Samba 2.x</A +NAME="AEN977" +>Chapter 7. security = domain in Samba 2.x</A ></H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN612" ->Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A +NAME="AEN995" +>7.1. Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A ></H1 ><P >In order for a Samba-2 server to join an NT domain, @@ -2934,9 +5125,8 @@ NAME="AEN612" NT domain on the PDC using Server Manager for Domains. This creates the machine account in the domain (PDC) SAM. Note that you should add the Samba server as a "Windows NT Workstation or Server", - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + <EM +>NOT</EM > as a Primary or backup domain controller.</P ><P >Assume you have a Samba-2 server with a NetBIOS name of @@ -3013,13 +5203,13 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><TT CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ><I -><NT DOMAIN NAME></I +><NT DOMAIN NAME></I ></TT >.<TT CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ><I -><Samba - Server Name></I +><Samba + Server Name></I ></TT >.mac</TT ></P @@ -3153,8 +5343,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN676" ->Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A +NAME="AEN1059" +>7.2. Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A ></H1 ><P >Many people have asked regarding the state of Samba's ability to participate in @@ -3178,8 +5368,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN681" ->Why is this better than security = server?</A +NAME="AEN1064" +>7.3. Why is this better than security = server?</A ></H1 ><P >Currently, domain security in Samba doesn't free you from @@ -3244,9 +5434,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" user is authenticated, making a Samba server truly plug and play in an NT domain environment. Watch for this code soon.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > Much of the text of this document was first published in the Web magazine <A HREF="http://www.linuxworld.com" @@ -3265,53 +5454,135 @@ TARGET="_top" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="AEN697" ->Chapter 6. How to Configure Samba 2.2.x as a Primary Domain Controller</A +NAME="AEN1080" +>Chapter 8. How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</A ></H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN708" ->Background</A +NAME="AEN1097" +>8.1. Prerequisite Reading</A ></H1 ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Author's Note :</I -> This document -is a combination of David Bannon's Samba 2.2 PDC HOWTO -and the Samba NT Domain FAQ. Both documents are superceeded by this one.</P +>Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure +that you are comfortable with configuring basic files services +in smb.conf and how to enable and administer password +encryption in Samba. Theses two topics are covered in the +<A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf(5)</TT +></A +> +manpage and the <A +HREF="ENCRYPTION.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Encryption chapter</A +> +of this HOWTO Collection.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1103" +>8.2. Background</A +></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +><EM +>Author's Note :</EM +> This document is a combination +of David Bannon's Samba 2.2 PDC HOWTO and the Samba NT Domain FAQ. +Both documents are superseded by this one.</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV ><P >Version of Samba prior to release 2.2 had marginal capabilities to -act as a Windows NT 4.0 Primary Domain Controller (PDC). The following -functionality should work in 2.2.0:</P +act as a Windows NT 4.0 Primary Domain Controller (PDC). Beginning with +Samba 2.2.0, we are proud to announce official support for Windows NT 4.0 +style domain logons from Windows NT 4.0 (through SP6) and Windows 2000 (through +SP1) clients. This article outlines the steps necessary for configuring Samba +as a PDC. It is necessary to have a working Samba server prior to implementing the +PDC functionality. If you have not followed the steps outlined in +<A +HREF="UNIX_INSTALL.html" +TARGET="_top" +> UNIX_INSTALL.html</A +>, please make sure +that your server is configured correctly before proceeding. Another good +resource in the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smb.conf(5) man +page</A +>. The following functionality should work in 2.2:</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P ->domain logons for Windows NT 4.0/2000 clients</P +> domain logons for Windows NT 4.0/2000 clients. + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->placing a Windows 9x client in user level security</P +> placing a Windows 9x client in user level security + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->retrieving a list of users and groups from a Samba PDC to - Windows 9x/NT/2000 clients </P +> retrieving a list of users and groups from a Samba PDC to + Windows 9x/NT/2000 clients + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->roving user profiles</P +> roving (roaming) user profiles + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Windows NT 4.0 style system policies</P +> Windows NT 4.0 style system policies + </P ></LI ></UL +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 Clients</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +> Samba 2.2.1 is required for PDC functionality when using Windows 2000 + SP2 clients. + </P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV ><P >The following pieces of functionality are not included in the 2.2 release:</P ><P @@ -3319,21 +5590,25 @@ functionality should work in 2.2.0:</P ><UL ><LI ><P ->Windows NT 4 domain trusts</P +> Windows NT 4 domain trusts + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Sam replication with Windows NT 4.0 Domain Controllers - (i.e. a Samba PDC and a Windows NT BDC or vice versa) </P +> SAM replication with Windows NT 4.0 Domain Controllers + (i.e. a Samba PDC and a Windows NT BDC or vice versa) + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Adding users via the User Manager for Domains</P +> Adding users via the User Manager for Domains + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Acting as a Windows 2000 Domain Controller (i.e. Kerberos - and Active Directory)</P +> Acting as a Windows 2000 Domain Controller (i.e. Kerberos and + Active Directory) + </P ></LI ></UL ><P @@ -3343,25 +5618,6 @@ support Windows 9x style domain logons is completely different from NT4 domain logons and has been officially supported for some time.</P ><P ->Beginning with Samba 2.2.0, we are proud to announce official -support for Windows NT 4.0 style domain logons from Windows NT -4.0 and Windows 2000 (including SP1) clients. This article -outlines the steps necessary for configuring Samba as a PDC. -Note that it is necessary to have a working Samba server -prior to implementing the PDC functionality. If you have not -followed the steps outlined in <A -HREF="UNIX_INSTALL.html" -TARGET="_top" ->UNIX_INSTALL.html</A ->, please make sure that your server -is configured correctly before proceeding. Another good -resource in the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" ->smb.conf(5) man -page</A ->.</P -><P >Implementing a Samba PDC can basically be divided into 2 broad steps.</P ><P @@ -3370,13 +5626,14 @@ steps.</P TYPE="1" ><LI ><P ->Configuring the Samba Domain Controller +> Configuring the Samba PDC </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Creating machine trust accounts - and joining clients to the domain</P +> Creating machine trust accounts and joining clients + to the domain + </P ></LI ></OL ><P @@ -3390,8 +5647,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN745" ->Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A +NAME="AEN1143" +>8.3. Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A ></H1 ><P >The first step in creating a working Samba PDC is to @@ -3407,6 +5664,12 @@ linked with the actual smb.conf description.</P ><P >Here is an example smb.conf for acting as a PDC:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >[global] @@ -3496,7 +5759,7 @@ TARGET="_top" > = \\homeserver\%u ; specify a generic logon script for all users - ; this is a relative path to the [netlogon] share + ; this is a relative **DOS** path to the [netlogon] share <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONSCRIPT" TARGET="_top" @@ -3548,18 +5811,19 @@ HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK" TARGET="_top" >directory mask</A > = 0700</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P ->There are a couple of points to emphasize in the above -configuration.</P +>There are a couple of points to emphasize in the above configuration.</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P ->encrypted passwords must be enabled. - For more details on how to do this, refer to - <A +> Encrypted passwords must be enabled. For more details on how + to do this, refer to <A HREF="ENCRYPTION.html" TARGET="_top" >ENCRYPTION.html</A @@ -3568,23 +5832,27 @@ TARGET="_top" ></LI ><LI ><P ->The server must support domain logons - and a <TT +> The server must support domain logons and a + <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >[netlogon]</TT -> share</P +> share + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->The server must be the domain master browser - in order for Windows client to locate the server as a DC.</P +> The server must be the domain master browser in order for Windows + client to locate the server as a DC. Please refer to the various + Network Browsing documentation included with this distribution for + details. + </P ></LI ></UL ><P >As Samba 2.2 does not offer a complete implementation of group mapping between Windows NT groups and UNIX groups (this is really quite complicated to explain in a short space), you should refer to the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINADMONUSERS" +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINADMINUSERS" TARGET="_top" >domain admin users</A @@ -3601,28 +5869,38 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN788" ->Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients +NAME="AEN1186" +>8.4. Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the Domain</A ></H1 ><P ->First you must understand what a machine trust account is and what -it is used for.</P -><P ->A machine trust account is a user account owned by a computer. +>A machine trust account is a samba user account owned by a computer. The account password acts as the shared secret for secure -communication with the Domain Controller. Hence the reason that -a Windows 9x host is never a true member of a domain because -it does not posses a machine trust account and thus has no shared -secret with the DC.</P +communication with the Domain Controller. This is a security feature +to prevent an unauthorized machine with the same NetBIOS name from +joining the domain and gaining access to domain user/group accounts. +Hence a Windows 9x host is never a true member of a domain because it does +not posses a machine trust account, and thus has no shared secret with the DC.</P ><P >On a Windows NT PDC, these machine trust account passwords are stored -in the registry. A Samba PDC stores these accounts in he same location +in the registry. A Samba PDC stores these accounts in the same location as user LanMan and NT password hashes (currently <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >smbpasswd</TT >). -However, machine trust accounts only possess the NT password hash.</P +However, machine trust accounts only possess and use the NT password hash.</P +><P +>Because Samba requires machine accounts to possess a UNIX uid from +which an Windows NT SID can be generated, all of these accounts +must have an entry in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> and smbpasswd. +Future releases will alleviate the need to create +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> entries. </P ><P >There are two means of creating machine trust accounts.</P ><P @@ -3630,30 +5908,52 @@ However, machine trust accounts only possess the NT password hash.</P ><UL ><LI ><P ->Manual creation before joining the client - to the domain. In this case, the password is set to a known - value -- the lower case of the machine's netbios name.</P +> Manual creation before joining the client to the domain. In this case, + the password is set to a known value -- the lower case of the + machine's NetBIOS name. + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Creation of the account at the time of - joining the domain. In this case, the session key of the - administrative account used to join the client to the domain acts - as an encryption key for setting the password to a random value.</P +> Creation of the account at the time of joining the domain. In + this case, the session key of the administrative account used to join + the client to the domain acts as an encryption key for setting the + password to a random value (This is the recommended method). + </P ></LI ></UL +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN1200" +>8.4.1. Manually creating machine trust accounts</A +></H2 ><P ->Because Samba requires machine accounts to possess a UNIX uid from -which an Windows NT SID can be generated, all of these accounts -will have an entry in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> and smbpasswd. -Future releases will alleviate the need to create -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> entries.</P +>The first step in creating a machine trust account by hand is to +create an entry for the machine in /etc/passwd. This can be done +using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>vipw</B +> or any 'add userr' command which is normally +used to create new UNIX accounts. The following is an example for a Linux +based Samba server:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +>/usr/sbin/useradd -g 100 -d /dev/null -c <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_nickname</I +></TT +> -m -s /bin/false <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_name</I +></TT +>$</P ><P >The <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -3666,22 +5966,51 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/passwd</TT > entry like this :</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->doppy$:x:505:501:NTMachine:/dev/null:/bin/false</PRE +>doppy$:x:505:501:<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_nickname</I +></TT +>:/dev/null:/bin/false</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P ->If you are manually creating the machine accounts, it is necessary -to add the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> (or NIS passwd -map) entry prior to adding the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smbpasswd</TT -> -entry. The following command will create a new machine account -ready for use.</P +>Above, <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_nickname</I +></TT +> can be any descriptive name for the +pc i.e. BasementComputer. The <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_name</I +></TT +> absolutely must be +the NetBIOS name of the pc to be added to the domain. The "$" must append the NetBIOS +name of the pc or samba will not recognize this as a machine account</P +><P +>Now that the UNIX account has been created, the next step is to create +the smbpasswd entry for the machine containing the well known initial +trust account password. This can be done using the <A +HREF="smbpasswd.6.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd(8)</B +></A +> command +as shown here:</P ><P ><TT CLASS="PROMPT" @@ -3698,169 +6027,295 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ><I >machine_name</I ></TT -> is the machine's netbios -name.</P +> is the machine's NetBIOS +name. </P +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->If you manually create a machine account, immediately join -the client to the domain.</I -> An open account like this -can allow intruders to gain access to user account information -in your domain.</P -><P ->The second way of creating machine trust accounts is to add -them on the fly at the time the client is joined to the domain. -You will need to include a value for the -<A +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Join the client to the domain immediately</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +> Manually creating a machine trust account using this method is the + equivalent of creating a machine account on a Windows NT PDC using + the "Server Manager". From the time at which the account is created + to the time which th client joins the domain and changes the password, + your domain is vulnerable to an intruder joining your domain using a + a machine with the same NetBIOS name. A PDC inherently trusts + members of the domain and will serve out a large degree of user + information to such clients. You have been warned! + </P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN1228" +>8.4.2. Creating machine trust accounts "on the fly"</A +></H2 +><P +>The second, and most recommended way of creating machine trust accounts +is to create them as needed at the time the client is joined to +the domain. You will need to include a value for the <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT" TARGET="_top" >add user script</A > -parameter. Below is an example I use on a RedHat 6.2 Linux system.</P +parameter. Below is an example from a RedHat 6.2 Linux system.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >add user script = /usr/sbin/useradd -d /dev/null -g 100 -s /bin/false -M %u </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P ->In Samba 2.2.0, <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->only the root account</I +>In Samba 2.2.1, <EM +>only the root account</EM > can be used to create -machine accounts on the fly like this. Therefore, it is required -to create an entry in smbpasswd for <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->root</I ->. -The password <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->SHOULD</I -> be set to s different -password that the associated <TT +machine accounts like this. Therefore, it is required to create +an entry in smbpasswd for <EM +>root</EM +>. The password +<EM +>SHOULD</EM +> be set to s different password that the +associated <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/passwd</TT -> -entry for security reasons.</P +> entry for security reasons.</P +></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN827" ->Common Problems and Errors</A +NAME="AEN1239" +>8.5. Common Problems and Errors</A ></H1 ><P ></P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->I cannot include a '$' in a machine name.</I ></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> <EM +>I cannot include a '$' in a machine name.</EM +> + </P ><P ->A 'machine name' in (typically) <TT +> A 'machine name' in (typically) <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/passwd</TT > -of the machine name with a '$' appended. FreeBSD (and other BSD -systems ?) won't create a user with a '$' in their name.</P + of the machine name with a '$' appended. FreeBSD (and other BSD + systems ?) won't create a user with a '$' in their name. + </P ><P ->The problem is only in the program used to make the entry, once -made, it works perfectly. So create a user without the '$' and -use <B +> The problem is only in the program used to make the entry, once + made, it works perfectly. So create a user without the '$' and + use <B CLASS="COMMAND" >vipw</B > to edit the entry, adding the '$'. Or create -the whole entry with vipw if you like, make sure you use a -unique uid !</P + the whole entry with vipw if you like, make sure you use a + unique uid ! + </P +></LI +><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +> <EM >I get told "You already have a connection to the Domain...." -when creating a machine account.</I -></P -><P ->This happens if you try to create a machine account from the -machine itself and use a user name that does not work (for whatever -reason) and then try another (possibly valid) user name. -Exit out of the network applet to close the initial connection -and try again.</P + or "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied conflict with an + existing set.." when creating a machine account.</EM +> + </P ><P ->Further, if the machine is a already a 'member of a workgroup' that -is the same name as the domain you are joining (bad idea) you will -get this message. Change the workgroup name to something else, it -does not matter what, reboot, and try again.</P +> This happens if you try to create a machine account from the + machine itself and already have a connection (e.g. mapped drive) + to a share (or IPC$) on the Samba PDC. The following command + will remove all network drive connections: + </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->I get told "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied -conflict with an existing set.."</I -></P +> <TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>C:\WINNT\></TT +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net use * /d</B +> + </P ><P ->This is the same basic problem as mentioned above, "You already -have a connection..."</P +> Further, if the machine is a already a 'member of a workgroup' that + is the same name as the domain you are joining (bad idea) you will + get this message. Change the workgroup name to something else, it + does not matter what, reboot, and try again. + </P +></LI +><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->"The system can not log you on (C000019B)...."</I -></P +> <EM +>The system can not log you on (C000019B)....</EM +> + </P ><P >I joined the domain successfully but after upgrading -to a newer version of the Samba code I get the message, "The system -can not log you on (C000019B), Please try a gain or consult your -system administrator" when attempting to logon.</P + to a newer version of the Samba code I get the message, "The system + can not log you on (C000019B), Please try a gain or consult your + system administrator" when attempting to logon. + </P ><P ->This occurs when the domain SID stored in -<TT +> This occurs when the domain SID stored in + <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >private/WORKGROUP.SID</TT > is -changed. For example, you remove the file and <B + changed. For example, you remove the file and <B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbd</B > automatically -creates a new one. Or you are swapping back and forth between -versions 2.0.7, TNG and the HEAD branch code (not recommended). The -only way to correct the problem is to restore the original domain -SID or remove the domain client from the domain and rejoin.</P + creates a new one. Or you are swapping back and forth between + versions 2.0.7, TNG and the HEAD branch code (not recommended). The + only way to correct the problem is to restore the original domain + SID or remove the domain client from the domain and rejoin. + </P +></LI +><LI ><P +> <EM +>The machine account for this computer either does not + exist or is not accessible.</EM +> + </P +><P +> When I try to join the domain I get the message "The machine account + for this computer either does not exist or is not accessible". Whats + wrong? + </P +><P +> This problem is caused by the PDC not having a suitable machine account. + If you are using the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->"The machine account for this computer either does not -exist or is not accessible."</I -></P +>add user script</I +></TT +> method to create + accounts then this would indicate that it has not worked. Ensure the domain + admin user system is working. + </P +><P +> Alternatively if you are creating account entries manually then they + have not been created correctly. Make sure that you have the entry + correct for the machine account in smbpasswd file on the Samba PDC. + If you added the account using an editor rather than using the smbpasswd + utility, make sure that the account name is the machine NetBIOS name + with a '$' appended to it ( i.e. computer_name$ ). There must be an entry + in both /etc/passwd and the smbpasswd file. Some people have reported + that inconsistent subnet masks between the Samba server and the NT + client have caused this problem. Make sure that these are consistent + for both client and server. + </P +></LI +><LI ><P ->When I try to join the domain I get the message "The machine account -for this computer either does not exist or is not accessible". Whats -wrong ?</P +> <EM +>When I attempt to login to a Samba Domain from a NT4/W2K workstation, + I get a message about my account being disabled.</EM +> + </P +><P +> This problem is caused by a PAM related bug in Samba 2.2.0. This bug is + fixed in 2.2.1. Other symptoms could be unaccessible shares on + NT/W2K member servers in the domain or the following error in your smbd.log: + passdb/pampass.c:pam_account(268) PAM: UNKNOWN ERROR for User: %user% + </P ><P ->This problem is caused by the PDC not having a suitable machine account. -If you are using the <B +> At first be ensure to enable the useraccounts with <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->add user script =</B -> method to create -accounts then this would indicate that it has not worked. Ensure the domain -admin user system is working.</P +>smbpasswd -e + %user%</B +>, this is normally done, when you create an account. + </P +><P +> In order to work around this problem in 2.2.0, configure the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>account</I +></TT +> control flag in + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/pam.d/samba</TT +> file as follows: + </P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> account required pam_permit.so + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P ><P ->Alternatively if you are creating account entries manually then they -have not been created correctly. Make sure that you have the entry -correct for the machine account in smbpasswd file on the Samba PDC. -If you added the account using an editor rather than using the smbpasswd -utility, make sure that the account name is the machine netbios name -with a '$' appended to it ( ie. computer_name$ ). There must be an entry -in both /etc/passwd and the smbpasswd file. Some people have reported -that inconsistent subnet masks between the Samba server and the NT -client have caused this problem. Make sure that these are consistent -for both client and server.</P +> If you want to remain backward compatibility to samba 2.0.x use + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_permit.so</TT +>, it's also possible to use + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_pwdb.so</TT +>. There are some bugs if you try to + use <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_unix.so</TT +>, if you need this, be ensure to use + the most recent version of this file. + </P +></LI +></UL ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN855" ->System Policies and Profiles</A +NAME="AEN1287" +>8.6. System Policies and Profiles</A ></H1 ><P >Much of the information necessary to implement System Policies and @@ -3875,97 +6330,107 @@ Profiles and Policies in Windows NT 4.0</A ><P >Here are some additional details:</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->What about Windows NT Policy Editor ?</I ></P +><UL +><LI ><P ->To create or edit <TT +> <EM +>What about Windows NT Policy Editor ?</EM +> + </P +><P +> To create or edit <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >ntconfig.pol</TT > you must use -the NT Server Policy Editor, <B + the NT Server Policy Editor, <B CLASS="COMMAND" >poledit.exe</B > which -is included with NT Server but <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not NT Workstation</I + is included with NT Server but <EM +>not NT Workstation</EM >. -There is a Policy Editor on a NTws -but it is not suitable for creating <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Domain Policies</I + There is a Policy Editor on a NTws + but it is not suitable for creating <EM +>Domain Policies</EM >. -Further, although the Windows 95 -Policy Editor can be installed on an NT Workstation/Server, it will not -work with NT policies because the registry key that are set by the policy templates. -However, the files from the NT Server will run happily enough on an NTws. -You need <TT + Further, although the Windows 95 + Policy Editor can be installed on an NT Workstation/Server, it will not + work with NT policies because the registry key that are set by the policy templates. + However, the files from the NT Server will run happily enough on an NTws. + You need <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >poledit.exe, common.adm</TT > and <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >winnt.adm</TT >. It is convenient -to put the two *.adm files in <TT + to put the two *.adm files in <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >c:\winnt\inf</TT > which is where -the binary will look for them unless told otherwise. Note also that that -directory is 'hidden'.</P + the binary will look for them unless told otherwise. Note also that that + directory is 'hidden'. + </P ><P ->The Windows NT policy editor is also included with the -Service Pack 3 (and later) for Windows NT 4.0. Extract the files using -<B +> The Windows NT policy editor is also included with the Service Pack 3 (and + later) for Windows NT 4.0. Extract the files using <B CLASS="COMMAND" >servicepackname /x</B ->, ie thats <B +>, + i.e. that's <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->Nt4sp6ai.exe -/x</B -> for service pack 6a. The policy editor, <B +>Nt4sp6ai.exe /x</B +> for service pack 6a. The policy editor, + <B CLASS="COMMAND" >poledit.exe</B -> and the -associated template files (*.adm) should -be extracted as well. It is also possible to downloaded the policy template -files for Office97 and get a copy of the policy editor. Another possible -location is with the Zero Administration Kit available for download from Microsoft.</P +> and the associated template files (*.adm) should + be extracted as well. It is also possible to downloaded the policy template + files for Office97 and get a copy of the policy editor. Another possible + location is with the Zero Administration Kit available for download from Microsoft. + </P +></LI +><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Can Win95 do Policies ?</I -></P +> <EM +>Can Win95 do Policies ?</EM +> + </P ><P ->Install the group policy handler for Win9x to pick up group -policies. Look on the Win98 CD in <TT +> Install the group policy handler for Win9x to pick up group + policies. Look on the Win98 CD in <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >\tools\reskit\netadmin\poledit</TT >. -Install group policies on a Win9x client by double-clicking -<TT + Install group policies on a Win9x client by double-clicking + <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >grouppol.inf</TT >. Log off and on again a couple of -times and see if Win98 picks up group policies. Unfortunately this needs -to be done on every Win9x machine that uses group policies....</P + times and see if Win98 picks up group policies. Unfortunately this needs + to be done on every Win9x machine that uses group policies.... + </P ><P ->If group policies don't work one reports suggests getting the updated -(read: working) grouppol.dll for Windows 9x. The group list is grabbed -from /etc/group.</P +> If group policies don't work one reports suggests getting the updated + (read: working) grouppol.dll for Windows 9x. The group list is grabbed + from /etc/group. + </P +></LI +><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager'</I -></P +> <EM +>How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager'</EM +> + </P ><P ->Since I don't need to buy an NT Server CD now, how do I get -the 'User Manager for Domains', the 'Server Manager' ?</P +> Since I don't need to buy an NT Server CD now, how do I get + the 'User Manager for Domains', the 'Server Manager' ? + </P ><P ->Microsoft distributes a version of -these tools called nexus for installation on Windows 95 systems. The -tools set includes</P +> Microsoft distributes a version of these tools called nexus for + installation on Windows 95 systems. The tools set includes + </P ><P ></P ><UL @@ -3983,27 +6448,31 @@ tools set includes</P ></LI ></UL ><P ->Click here to download the archived file <A +> Click here to download the archived file <A HREF="ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/NEXUS.EXE" TARGET="_top" >ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/NEXUS.EXE</A -></P +> + </P ><P ->The Windows NT 4.0 version of the 'User Manager for -Domains' and 'Server Manager' are available from Microsoft via ftp -from <A +> The Windows NT 4.0 version of the 'User Manager for + Domains' and 'Server Manager' are available from Microsoft via ftp + from <A HREF="ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/SRVTOOLS.EXE" TARGET="_top" >ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/SRVTOOLS.EXE</A -></P +> + </P +></LI +></UL ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN895" ->What other help can I get ?</A +NAME="AEN1331" +>8.7. What other help can I get ?</A ></H1 ><P >There are many sources of information available in the form @@ -4011,14 +6480,18 @@ of mailing lists, RFC's and documentation. The docs that come with the samba distribution contain very good explanations of general SMB topics such as browsing.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->What are some diagnostics tools I can use to debug the domain logon -process and where can I find them?</I ></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> <EM +>What are some diagnostics tools I can use to debug the domain logon + process and where can I find them?</EM +> + </P ><P > One of the best diagnostic tools for debugging problems is Samba itself. - You can use the -d option for both smbd and nmbd to specifiy what + You can use the -d option for both smbd and nmbd to specify what 'debug level' at which to run. See the man pages on smbd, nmbd and smb.conf for more information on debugging options. The debug level can range from 1 (the default) to 10 (100 for debugging passwords). @@ -4057,7 +6530,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></UL ><P > An SMB enabled version of tcpdump is available from - <A + <A HREF="http://www.tcpdump.org/" TARGET="_top" >http://www.tcpdup.org/</A @@ -4074,18 +6547,20 @@ TARGET="_top" (aka. netmon) is available on the Microsoft Developer Network CD's, the Windows NT Server install CD and the SMS CD's. The version of netmon that ships with SMS allows for dumping packets between any two - computers (ie. placing the network interface in promiscuous mode). + computers (i.e. placing the network interface in promiscuous mode). The version on the NT Server install CD will only allow monitoring of network traffic directed to the local NT box and broadcasts on the local subnet. Be aware that Ethereal can read and write netmon formatted files. </P +></LI +><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +> <EM >How do I install 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation -or a Windows 9x box?</I -></P + or a Windows 9x box?</EM +> + </P ><P > Installing netmon on an NT workstation requires a couple of steps. The following are for installing Netmon V4.00.349, which comes @@ -4180,14 +6655,11 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" information on how to do this. Copy the files from a working Netmon installation. </P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN942" ->URLs and similar</A -></H2 +></LI +><LI +><P +> The following is a list if helpful URLs and other links: + </P ><P ></P ><UL @@ -4201,9 +6673,8 @@ TARGET="_top" ></LI ><LI ><P -> The <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Development</I +> The <EM +>Development</EM > document on the Samba mirrors might mention your problem. If so, it might mean that the developers are working on it.</P @@ -4253,44 +6724,43 @@ TARGET="_top" ></P ></LI ></UL -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN966" ->Mailing Lists</A -></H2 +></LI +></UL ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->How do I get help from the mailing lists ?</I ></P +><UL +><LI ><P ->There are a number of Samba related mailing lists. Go to <A +> <EM +>How do I get help from the mailing lists ?</EM +> + </P +><P +> There are a number of Samba related mailing lists. Go to <A HREF="http://samba.org" TARGET="_top" >http://samba.org</A >, click on your nearest mirror -and then click on <B + and then click on <B CLASS="COMMAND" >Support</B > and then click on <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->Samba related mailing lists</B ->.</P +> Samba related mailing lists</B +>. + </P ><P ->For questions relating to Samba TNG go to -<A +> For questions relating to Samba TNG go to + <A HREF="http://www.samba-tng.org/" TARGET="_top" >http://www.samba-tng.org/</A > -It has been requested that you don't post questions about Samba-TNG to the -main stream Samba lists.</P + It has been requested that you don't post questions about Samba-TNG to the + main stream Samba lists.</P ><P ->If you post a message to one of the lists please observe the following guide lines :</P +> If you post a message to one of the lists please observe the following guide lines : + </P ><P ></P ><UL @@ -4329,7 +6799,7 @@ main stream Samba lists.</P ><LI ><P > Don't cross post. Work out which is the best list to post to - and see what happens, ie don't post to both samba-ntdom and samba-technical. + and see what happens, i.e. don't post to both samba-ntdom and samba-technical. Many people active on the lists subscribe to more than one list and get annoyed to see the same message two or more times. Often someone will see a message and thinking it would be better dealt @@ -4337,9 +6807,8 @@ main stream Samba lists.</P ></LI ><LI ><P ->You might include <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->partial</I +>You might include <EM +>partial</EM > log files written at a debug level set to as much as 20. Please don't send the entire log but enough to give the context of the @@ -4358,35 +6827,850 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" smb.conf in their attach directory ?</P ></LI ></UL +></LI +><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->How do I get off the mailing lists ?</I -></P +> <EM +>How do I get off the mailing lists ?</EM +> + </P ><P >To have your name removed from a samba mailing list, go to the - same place you went to to get on it. Go to <A + same place you went to to get on it. Go to <A HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" TARGET="_top" >http://lists.samba.org</A ->, click - on your nearest mirror and then click on <B +>, + click on your nearest mirror and then click on <B CLASS="COMMAND" >Support</B > and - then click on <B + then click on <B CLASS="COMMAND" > Samba related mailing lists</B >. Or perhaps see - <A + <A HREF="http://lists.samba.org/mailman/roster/samba-ntdom" TARGET="_top" >here</A -></P +> + </P ><P > Please don't post messages to the list asking to be removed, you will just - be referred to the above address (unless that process failed in some way...) - </P + be referred to the above address (unless that process failed in some way...) + </P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1445" +>8.8. Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A +></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>The following section contains much of the original +DOMAIN.txt file previously included with Samba. Much of +the material is based on what went into the book Special +Edition, Using Samba. (Richard Sharpe)</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +><P +>A domain and a workgroup are exactly the same thing in terms of network +browsing. The difference is that a distributable authentication +database is associated with a domain, for secure login access to a +network. Also, different access rights can be granted to users if they +successfully authenticate against a domain logon server (NT server and +other systems based on NT server support this, as does at least Samba TNG now).</P +><P +>The SMB client logging on to a domain has an expectation that every other +server in the domain should accept the same authentication information. +Network browsing functionality of domains and workgroups is +identical and is explained in BROWSING.txt. It should be noted, that browsing +is total orthogonal to logon support.</P +><P +>Issues related to the single-logon network model are discussed in this +document. Samba supports domain logons, network logon scripts, and user +profiles for MS Windows for workgroups and MS Windows 9X clients.</P +><P +>When an SMB client in a domain wishes to logon it broadcast requests for a +logon server. The first one to reply gets the job, and validates its +password using whatever mechanism the Samba administrator has installed. +It is possible (but very stupid) to create a domain where the user +database is not shared between servers, i.e. they are effectively workgroup +servers advertising themselves as participating in a domain. This +demonstrates how authentication is quite different from but closely +involved with domains.</P +><P +>Another thing commonly associated with single-logon domains is remote +administration over the SMB protocol. Again, there is no reason why this +cannot be implemented with an underlying username database which is +different from the Windows NT SAM. Support for the Remote Administration +Protocol is planned for a future release of Samba.</P +><P +>Network logon support as discussed in this section is aimed at Window for +Workgroups, and Windows 9X clients. </P +><P +>Support for profiles is confirmed as working for Win95, NT 4.0 and NT 3.51. +It is possible to specify: the profile location; script file to be loaded +on login; the user's home directory; and for NT a kick-off time could also +now easily be supported. However, there are some differences between Win9X +profile support and WinNT profile support. These are discussed below.</P +><P +>With NT Workstations, all this does not require the use or intervention of +an NT 4.0 or NT 3.51 server: Samba can now replace the logon services +provided by an NT server, to a limited and experimental degree (for example, +running "User Manager for Domains" will not provide you with access to +a domain created by a Samba Server).</P +><P +>With Win95, the help of an NT server can be enlisted, both for profile storage +and for user authentication. For details on user authentication, see +security_level.txt. For details on profile storage, see below.</P +><P +>Using these features you can make your clients verify their logon via +the Samba server; make clients run a batch file when they logon to +the network and download their preferences, desktop and start menu.</P +><P +>Before launching into the configuration instructions, it is worthwhile looking +at how a Win9X client performs a logon:</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> The client broadcasts (to the IP broadcast address of the subnet it is in) + a NetLogon request. This is sent to the NetBIOS address DOMAIN<00> at the + NetBIOS layer. The client chooses the first response it receives, which + contains the NetBIOS name of the logon server to use in the format of + \\SERVER. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then connects to that server, logs on (does an SMBsessetupX) and + then connects to the IPC$ share (using an SMBtconX). + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then does a NetWkstaUserLogon request, which retrieves the name + of the user's logon script. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then connects to the NetLogon share and searches for this + and if it is found and can be read, is retrieved and executed by the client. + After this, the client disconnects from the NetLogon share. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then sends a NetUserGetInfo request to the server, to retrieve + the user's home share, which is used to search for profiles. Since the + response to the NetUserGetInfo request does not contain much more + the user's home share, profiles for Win9X clients MUST reside in the user + home directory. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then connects to the user's home share and searches for the + user's profile. As it turns out, you can specify the user's home share as + a sharename and path. For example, \\server\fred\.profile. + If the profiles are found, they are implemented. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then disconnects from the user's home share, and reconnects to + the NetLogon share and looks for CONFIG.POL, the policies file. If this is + found, it is read and implemented. + </P +></LI +></OL +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN1475" +>8.8.1. Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A +></H2 +><P +>To use domain logons and profiles you need to do the following:</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> Create a share called [netlogon] in your smb.conf. This share should + be readable by all users, and probably should not be writeable. This + share will hold your network logon scripts, and the CONFIG.POL file + (Note: for details on the CONFIG.POL file, how to use it, what it is, + refer to the Microsoft Windows NT Administration documentation. + The format of these files is not known, so you will need to use + Microsoft tools). + </P +><P +> For example I have used: + </P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>[netlogon] + path = /data/dos/netlogon + writeable = no + guest ok = no</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +> Note that it is important that this share is not writeable by ordinary + users, in a secure environment: ordinary users should not be allowed + to modify or add files that another user's computer would then download + when they log in. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> in the [global] section of smb.conf set the following: + </P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>domain logons = yes +logon script = %U.bat + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +> The choice of batch file is, of course, up to you. The above would + give each user a separate batch file as the %U will be changed to + their username automatically. The other standard % macros may also be + used. You can make the batch files come from a subdirectory by using + something like: + </P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon script = scripts\%U.bat + </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +> create the batch files to be run when the user logs in. If the batch + file doesn't exist then no batch file will be run. + </P +><P +> In the batch files you need to be careful to use DOS style cr/lf line + endings. If you don't then DOS may get confused. I suggest you use a + DOS editor to remotely edit the files if you don't know how to produce + DOS style files under unix. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Use smbclient with the -U option for some users to make sure that + the \\server\NETLOGON share is available, the batch files are + visible and they are readable by the users. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> you will probably find that your clients automatically mount the + \\SERVER\NETLOGON share as drive z: while logging in. You can put + some useful programs there to execute from the batch files. + </P +></LI +></OL +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>security mode and master browsers</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +>There are a few comments to make in order to tie up some +loose ends. There has been much debate over the issue of whether +or not it is ok to configure Samba as a Domain Controller in security +modes other than <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>USER</TT +>. The only security mode +which will not work due to technical reasons is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SHARE</TT +> +mode security. <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DOMAIN</TT +> and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SERVER</TT +> +mode security is really just a variation on SMB user level security.</P +><P +>Actually, this issue is also closer tied to the debate on whether +or not Samba must be the domain master browser for its workgroup +when operating as a DC. While it may technically be possible +to configure a server as such (after all, browsing and domain logons +are two distinctly different functions), it is not a good idea to +so. You should remember that the DC must register the DOMAIN#1b NetBIOS +name. This is the name used by Windows clients to locate the DC. +Windows clients do not distinguish between the DC and the DMB. +For this reason, it is very wise to configure the Samba DC as the DMB.</P +><P +>Now back to the issue of configuring a Samba DC to use a mode other +than "security = user". If a Samba host is configured to use +another SMB server or DC in order to validate user connection +requests, then it is a fact that some other machine on the network +(the "password server") knows more about user than the Samba host. +99% of the time, this other host is a domain controller. Now +in order to operate in domain mode security, the "workgroup" parameter +must be set to the name of the Windows NT domain (which already +has a domain controller, right?)</P +><P +>Therefore configuring a Samba box as a DC for a domain that +already by definition has a PDC is asking for trouble. +Therefore, you should always configure the Samba DC to be the DMB +for its domain.</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN1509" +>8.8.2. Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</A +></H2 +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Warning</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +><EM +>NOTE!</EM +> Roaming profiles support is different +for Win9X and WinNT.</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +>Before discussing how to configure roaming profiles, it is useful to see how +Win9X and WinNT clients implement these features.</P +><P +>Win9X clients send a NetUserGetInfo request to the server to get the user's +profiles location. However, the response does not have room for a separate +profiles location field, only the user's home share. This means that Win9X +profiles are restricted to being in the user's home directory.</P +><P +>WinNT clients send a NetSAMLogon RPC request, which contains many fields, +including a separate field for the location of the user's profiles. +This means that support for profiles is different for Win9X and WinNT.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN1517" +>8.8.2.1. Windows NT Configuration</A +></H3 +><P +>To support WinNT clients, inn the [global] section of smb.conf set the +following (for example):</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon path = \\profileserver\profileshare\profilepath\%U\moreprofilepath</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +>The default for this option is \\%N\%U\profile, namely +\\sambaserver\username\profile. The \\N%\%U service is created +automatically by the [homes] service. +If you are using a samba server for the profiles, you _must_ make the +share specified in the logon path browseable. </P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>[lkcl 26aug96 - we have discovered a problem where Windows clients can +maintain a connection to the [homes] share in between logins. The +[homes] share must NOT therefore be used in a profile path.]</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN1525" +>8.8.2.2. Windows 9X Configuration</A +></H3 +><P +>To support Win9X clients, you must use the "logon home" parameter. Samba has +now been fixed so that "net use/home" now works as well, and it, too, relies +on the "logon home" parameter.</P +><P +>By using the logon home parameter, you are restricted to putting Win9X +profiles in the user's home directory. But wait! There is a trick you +can use. If you set the following in the [global] section of your +smb.conf file:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon home = \\%L\%U\.profiles</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><P +>then your Win9X clients will dutifully put their clients in a subdirectory +of your home directory called .profiles (thus making them hidden).</P +><P +>Not only that, but 'net use/home' will also work, because of a feature in +Win9X. It removes any directory stuff off the end of the home directory area +and only uses the server and share portion. That is, it looks like you +specified \\%L\%U for "logon home".</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN1533" +>8.8.2.3. Win9X and WinNT Configuration</A +></H3 +><P +>You can support profiles for both Win9X and WinNT clients by setting both the +"logon home" and "logon path" parameters. For example:</P +><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon home = \\%L\%U\.profiles +logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U</PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>I have not checked what 'net use /home' does on NT when "logon home" is +set as above.</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN1540" +>8.8.2.4. Windows 9X Profile Setup</A +></H3 +><P +>When a user first logs in on Windows 9X, the file user.DAT is created, +as are folders "Start Menu", "Desktop", "Programs" and "Nethood". +These directories and their contents will be merged with the local +versions stored in c:\windows\profiles\username on subsequent logins, +taking the most recent from each. You will need to use the [global] +options "preserve case = yes", "short case preserve = yes" and +"case sensitive = no" in order to maintain capital letters in shortcuts +in any of the profile folders.</P +><P +>The user.DAT file contains all the user's preferences. If you wish to +enforce a set of preferences, rename their user.DAT file to user.MAN, +and deny them write access to this file.</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> On the Windows 95 machine, go to Control Panel | Passwords and + select the User Profiles tab. Select the required level of + roaming preferences. Press OK, but do _not_ allow the computer + to reboot. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> On the Windows 95 machine, go to Control Panel | Network | + Client for Microsoft Networks | Preferences. Select 'Log on to + NT Domain'. Then, ensure that the Primary Logon is 'Client for + Microsoft Networks'. Press OK, and this time allow the computer + to reboot. + </P +></LI +></OL +><P +>Under Windows 95, Profiles are downloaded from the Primary Logon. +If you have the Primary Logon as 'Client for Novell Networks', then +the profiles and logon script will be downloaded from your Novell +Server. If you have the Primary Logon as 'Windows Logon', then the +profiles will be loaded from the local machine - a bit against the +concept of roaming profiles, if you ask me.</P +><P +>You will now find that the Microsoft Networks Login box contains +[user, password, domain] instead of just [user, password]. Type in +the samba server's domain name (or any other domain known to exist, +but bear in mind that the user will be authenticated against this +domain and profiles downloaded from it, if that domain logon server +supports it), user name and user's password.</P +><P +>Once the user has been successfully validated, the Windows 95 machine +will inform you that 'The user has not logged on before' and asks you +if you wish to save the user's preferences? Select 'yes'.</P +><P +>Once the Windows 95 client comes up with the desktop, you should be able +to examine the contents of the directory specified in the "logon path" +on the samba server and verify that the "Desktop", "Start Menu", +"Programs" and "Nethood" folders have been created.</P +><P +>These folders will be cached locally on the client, and updated when +the user logs off (if you haven't made them read-only by then :-). +You will find that if the user creates further folders or short-cuts, +that the client will merge the profile contents downloaded with the +contents of the profile directory already on the local client, taking +the newest folders and short-cuts from each set.</P +><P +>If you have made the folders / files read-only on the samba server, +then you will get errors from the w95 machine on logon and logout, as +it attempts to merge the local and the remote profile. Basically, if +you have any errors reported by the w95 machine, check the unix file +permissions and ownership rights on the profile directory contents, +on the samba server.</P +><P +>If you have problems creating user profiles, you can reset the user's +local desktop cache, as shown below. When this user then next logs in, +they will be told that they are logging in "for the first time".</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> instead of logging in under the [user, password, domain] dialog, + press escape. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> run the regedit.exe program, and look in: + </P +><P +> HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Windows\CurrentVersion\ProfileList + </P +><P +> you will find an entry, for each user, of ProfilePath. Note the + contents of this key (likely to be c:\windows\profiles\username), + then delete the key ProfilePath for the required user. + </P +><P +> [Exit the registry editor]. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <EM +>WARNING</EM +> - before deleting the contents of the + directory listed in + the ProfilePath (this is likely to be c:\windows\profiles\username), + ask them if they have any important files stored on their desktop + or in their start menu. delete the contents of the directory + ProfilePath (making a backup if any of the files are needed). + </P +><P +> This will have the effect of removing the local (read-only hidden + system file) user.DAT in their profile directory, as well as the + local "desktop", "nethood", "start menu" and "programs" folders. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> search for the user's .PWL password-caching file in the c:\windows + directory, and delete it. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> log off the windows 95 client. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> check the contents of the profile path (see "logon path" described + above), and delete the user.DAT or user.MAN file for the user, + making a backup if required. + </P +></LI +></OL +><P +>If all else fails, increase samba's debug log levels to between 3 and 10, +and / or run a packet trace program such as tcpdump or netmon.exe, and +look for any error reports.</P +><P +>If you have access to an NT server, then first set up roaming profiles +and / or netlogons on the NT server. Make a packet trace, or examine +the example packet traces provided with NT server, and see what the +differences are with the equivalent samba trace.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN1576" +>8.8.2.5. Windows NT Workstation 4.0</A +></H3 +><P +>When a user first logs in to a Windows NT Workstation, the profile +NTuser.DAT is created. The profile location can be now specified +through the "logon path" parameter. </P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>[lkcl 10aug97 - i tried setting the path to +\\samba-server\homes\profile, and discovered that this fails because +a background process maintains the connection to the [homes] share +which does _not_ close down in between user logins. you have to +have \\samba-server\%L\profile, where user is the username created +from the [homes] share].</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +><P +>There is a parameter that is now available for use with NT Profiles: +"logon drive". This should be set to "h:" or any other drive, and +should be used in conjunction with the new "logon home" parameter.</P +><P +>The entry for the NT 4.0 profile is a _directory_ not a file. The NT +help on profiles mentions that a directory is also created with a .PDS +extension. The user, while logging in, must have write permission to +create the full profile path (and the folder with the .PDS extension) +[lkcl 10aug97 - i found that the creation of the .PDS directory failed, +and had to create these manually for each user, with a shell script. +also, i presume, but have not tested, that the full profile path must +be browseable just as it is for w95, due to the manner in which they +attempt to create the full profile path: test existence of each path +component; create path component].</P +><P +>In the profile directory, NT creates more folders than 95. It creates +"Application Data" and others, as well as "Desktop", "Nethood", +"Start Menu" and "Programs". The profile itself is stored in a file +NTuser.DAT. Nothing appears to be stored in the .PDS directory, and +its purpose is currently unknown.</P +><P +>You can use the System Control Panel to copy a local profile onto +a samba server (see NT Help on profiles: it is also capable of firing +up the correct location in the System Control Panel for you). The +NT Help file also mentions that renaming NTuser.DAT to NTuser.MAN +turns a profile into a mandatory one.</P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>[lkcl 10aug97 - i notice that NT Workstation tells me that it is +downloading a profile from a slow link. whether this is actually the +case, or whether there is some configuration issue, as yet unknown, +that makes NT Workstation _think_ that the link is a slow one is a +matter to be resolved].</P +><P +>[lkcl 20aug97 - after samba digest correspondence, one user found, and +another confirmed, that profiles cannot be loaded from a samba server +unless "security = user" and "encrypt passwords = yes" (see the file +ENCRYPTION.txt) or "security = server" and "password server = ip.address. +of.yourNTserver" are used. Either of these options will allow the NT +workstation to access the samba server using LAN manager encrypted +passwords, without the user intervention normally required by NT +workstation for clear-text passwords].</P +><P +>[lkcl 25aug97 - more comments received about NT profiles: the case of +the profile _matters_. the file _must_ be called NTuser.DAT or, for +a mandatory profile, NTuser.MAN].</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN1589" +>8.8.2.6. Windows NT Server</A +></H3 +><P +>There is nothing to stop you specifying any path that you like for the +location of users' profiles. Therefore, you could specify that the +profile be stored on a samba server, or any other SMB server, as long as +that SMB server supports encrypted passwords.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN1592" +>8.8.2.7. Sharing Profiles between W95 and NT Workstation 4.0</A +></H3 +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Potentially outdated or incorrect material follows</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +>I think this is all bogus, but have not deleted it. (Richard Sharpe)</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +>The default logon path is \\%N\U%. NT Workstation will attempt to create +a directory "\\samba-server\username.PDS" if you specify the logon path +as "\\samba-server\username" with the NT User Manager. Therefore, you +will need to specify (for example) "\\samba-server\username\profile". +NT 4.0 will attempt to create "\\samba-server\username\profile.PDS", which +is more likely to succeed.</P +><P +>If you then want to share the same Start Menu / Desktop with W95, you will +need to specify "logon path = \\samba-server\username\profile" [lkcl 10aug97 +this has its drawbacks: i created a shortcut to telnet.exe, which attempts +to run from the c:\winnt\system32 directory. this directory is obviously +unlikely to exist on a Win95-only host].</P +><P +> If you have this set up correctly, you will find separate user.DAT and +NTuser.DAT files in the same profile directory.</P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>[lkcl 25aug97 - there are some issues to resolve with downloading of +NT profiles, probably to do with time/date stamps. i have found that +NTuser.DAT is never updated on the workstation after the first time that +it is copied to the local workstation profile directory. this is in +contrast to w95, where it _does_ transfer / update profiles correctly].</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +></DIV ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV @@ -4394,16 +7678,38 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1005" ->DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</A +NAME="AEN1602" +>8.9. DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</A ></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Possibly Outdated Material</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" ><P ->This appendix was originally authored by John H Terpstra of the Samba Team -and is included here for posterity.</P +> This appendix was originally authored by John H Terpstra of + the Samba Team and is included here for posterity. + </P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE :</I +><EM +>NOTE :</EM > The term "Domain Controller" and those related to it refer to one specific method of authentication that can underly an SMB domain. Domain Controllers @@ -4416,12 +7722,9 @@ Windows NT SAM.</P ><P >Windows NT Server can be installed as either a plain file and print server (WORKGROUP workstation or server) or as a server that participates in Domain -Control (DOMAIN member, Primary Domain controller or Backup Domain controller).</P -><P ->The same is true for OS/2 Warp Server, Digital Pathworks and other similar -products, all of which can participate in Domain Control along with Windows NT. -However only those servers which have licensed Windows NT code in them can be -a primary Domain Controller (eg Windows NT Server, Advanced Server for Unix.)</P +Control (DOMAIN member, Primary Domain controller or Backup Domain controller). +The same is true for OS/2 Warp Server, Digital Pathworks and other similar +products, all of which can participate in Domain Control along with Windows NT.</P ><P >To many people these terms can be confusing, so let's try to clear the air.</P ><P @@ -4472,7 +7775,7 @@ plain Servers.</P ><P >The User database is called the SAM (Security Access Manager) database and is used for all user authentication as well as for authentication of inter- -process authentication (ie: to ensure that the service action a user has +process authentication (i.e. to ensure that the service action a user has requested is permitted within the limits of that user's privileges).</P ><P >The Samba team have produced a utility that can dump the Windows NT SAM into @@ -4483,7 +7786,7 @@ to Samba systems.</P ><P >Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95, and Windows NT Workstations and Servers can participate in a Domain security system that is controlled by Windows NT -servers that have been correctly configured. At most every domain will have +servers that have been correctly configured. Almost every domain will have ONE Primary Domain Controller (PDC). It is desirable that each domain will have at least one Backup Domain Controller (BDC).</P ><P @@ -4496,26 +7799,25 @@ within its registry.</P CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="AEN1029" ->Chapter 7. Unifed Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A +NAME="AEN1627" +>Chapter 9. Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A ></H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1047" ->Abstract</A +NAME="AEN1645" +>9.1. Abstract</A ></H1 ><P >Integration of UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT through a unified logon has been considered a "holy grail" in heterogeneous - computing environments for a long time. We present <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" + computing environments for a long time. We present <EM >winbind - </I + </EM >, a component of the Samba suite of programs as a - solution to the unied logon problem. Winbind uses a UNIX implementation + solution to the unified logon problem. Winbind uses a UNIX implementation of Microsoft RPC calls, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and the Name Service Switch to allow Windows NT domain users to appear and operate as UNIX users on a UNIX machine. This paper describes the winbind @@ -4527,8 +7829,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1051" ->Introduction</A +NAME="AEN1649" +>9.2. Introduction</A ></H1 ><P >It is well known that UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT have @@ -4546,7 +7848,7 @@ NAME="AEN1051" can lead to synchronization problems between the UNIX and Windows systems and confusion for users.</P ><P ->We divide the unifed logon problem for UNIX machines into +>We divide the unified logon problem for UNIX machines into three smaller problems:</P ><P ></P @@ -4573,7 +7875,7 @@ NAME="AEN1051" information on the UNIX machines and without creating additional tasks for the system administrator when maintaining users and groups on either system. The winbind system provides a simple - and elegant solution to all three components of the unifed logon + and elegant solution to all three components of the unified logon problem.</P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -4581,8 +7883,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1064" ->What Winbind Provides</A +NAME="AEN1662" +>9.3. What Winbind Provides</A ></H1 ><P >Winbind unifies UNIX and Windows NT account management by @@ -4623,8 +7925,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1071" ->Target Uses</A +NAME="AEN1669" +>9.3.1. Target Uses</A ></H2 ><P >Winbind is targeted at organizations that have an @@ -4647,8 +7949,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1075" ->How Winbind Works</A +NAME="AEN1673" +>9.4. How Winbind Works</A ></H1 ><P >The winbind system is designed around a client/server @@ -4667,8 +7969,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1080" ->Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A +NAME="AEN1678" +>9.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A ></H2 ><P >Over the last two years, efforts have been underway @@ -4693,14 +7995,14 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1084" ->Name Service Switch</A +NAME="AEN1682" +>9.4.2. Name Service Switch</A ></H2 ><P >The Name Service Switch, or NSS, is a feature that is present in many UNIX operating systems. It allows system information such as hostnames, mail aliases and user information - to be resolved from dierent sources. For example, a standalone + to be resolved from different sources. For example, a standalone UNIX workstation may resolve system information from a series of flat files stored on the local lesystem. A networked workstation may first attempt to resolve system information from local files, @@ -4729,7 +8031,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" for a line which matches the service type being requested, for example the "passwd" service type is used when user or group names are looked up. This config line species which implementations - of that service should be tried andin what order. If the passwd + of that service should be tried and in what order. If the passwd config line is:</P ><P ><B @@ -4772,14 +8074,14 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1100" ->Pluggable Authentication Modules</A +NAME="AEN1698" +>9.4.3. Pluggable Authentication Modules</A ></H2 ><P >Pluggable Authentication Modules, also known as PAM, is a system for abstracting authentication and authorization technologies. With a PAM module it is possible to specify different - authentication methods for dierent system applications without + authentication methods for different system applications without having to recompile these applications. PAM is also useful for implementing a particular policy for authorization. For example, a system administrator may only allow console logins from users @@ -4794,7 +8096,7 @@ NAME="AEN1100" this change take eect directly on the Primary Domain Controller. </P ><P ->PAM is congured by providing control files in the directory +>PAM is configured by providing control files in the directory <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/pam.d/</TT @@ -4821,16 +8123,16 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1108" ->User and Group ID Allocation</A +NAME="AEN1706" +>9.4.4. User and Group ID Allocation</A ></H2 ><P >When a user or group is created under Windows NT - is it allocated a numerical relative identier (RID). This is - slightly dierent to UNIX which has a range of numbers which are + is it allocated a numerical relative identifier (RID). This is + slightly different to UNIX which has a range of numbers which are used to identify users, and the same range in which to identify groups. It is winbind's job to convert RIDs to UNIX id numbers and - vice versa. When winbind is congured it is given part of the UNIX + vice versa. When winbind is configured it is given part of the UNIX user id space and a part of the UNIX group id space in which to store Windows NT users and groups. If a Windows NT user is resolved for the first time, it is allocated the next UNIX id from @@ -4847,8 +8149,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1112" ->Result Caching</A +NAME="AEN1710" +>9.4.5. Result Caching</A ></H2 ><P >An active system can generate a lot of user and group @@ -4857,7 +8159,7 @@ NAME="AEN1112" by NT domain controllers. User or group information returned by a PDC is cached by winbind along with a sequence number also returned by the PDC. This sequence number is incremented by - Windows NT whenever any user or group information is modied. If + Windows NT whenever any user or group information is modified. If a cached entry has expired, the sequence number is requested from the PDC and compared against the sequence number of the cached entry. If the sequence numbers do not match, then the cached information @@ -4870,8 +8172,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1115" ->Installation and Configuration</A +NAME="AEN1713" +>9.5. Installation and Configuration</A ></H1 ><P >The easiest way to install winbind is by using the packages @@ -4891,7 +8193,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" CLASS="COMMAND" >winbindd(8)</B > man page which will provide you - with conguration information and give you sample conguration files. + with configuration information and give you sample configuration files. You may also wish to update the main Samba daemons smbd and nmbd) with a more recent development release, such as the recently announced Samba 2.2 alpha release.</P @@ -4901,8 +8203,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1121" ->Limitations</A +NAME="AEN1719" +>9.6. Limitations</A ></H1 ><P >Winbind has a number of limitations in its current @@ -4949,8 +8251,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1133" ->Conclusion</A +NAME="AEN1731" +>9.7. Conclusion</A ></H1 ><P >The winbind system, through the use of the Name Service @@ -4965,786 +8267,24 @@ NAME="AEN1133" CLASS="CHAPTER" ><HR><H1 ><A -NAME="AEN1136" ->Chapter 8. UNIX Permission Bits and WIndows NT Access Control Lists</A -></H1 -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1147" ->Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT - security dialogs</A -></H1 -><P ->New in the Samba 2.0.4 release is the ability for Windows - NT clients to use their native security settings dialog box to - view and modify the underlying UNIX permissions.</P -><P ->Note that this ability is careful not to compromise - the security of the UNIX host Samba is running on, and - still obeys all the file permission rules that a Samba - administrator can set.</P -><P ->In Samba 2.0.4 and above the default value of the - parameter <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NTACLSUPPOR" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> nt acl support</I -></TT -></A -> has been changed from - <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->false</TT -> to <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->true</TT ->, so - manipulation of permissions is turned on by default.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1156" ->How to view file security on a Samba share</A -></H1 -><P ->From an NT 4.0 client, single-click with the right - mouse button on any file or directory in a Samba mounted - drive letter or UNC path. When the menu pops-up, click - on the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Properties</I -> entry at the bottom of - the menu. This brings up the normal file properties dialog - box, but with Samba 2.0.4 this will have a new tab along the top - marked <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Security</I ->. Click on this tab and you - will see three buttons, <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Permissions</I ->, - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Auditing</I ->, and <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Ownership</I ->. - The <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Auditing</I -> button will cause either - an error message <SPAN -CLASS="ERRORNAME" ->A requested privilege is not held - by the client</SPAN -> to appear if the user is not the - NT Administrator, or a dialog which is intended to allow an - Administrator to add auditing requirements to a file if the - user is logged on as the NT Administrator. This dialog is - non-functional with a Samba share at this time, as the only - useful button, the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->Add</B -> button will not currently - allow a list of users to be seen.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1167" ->Viewing file ownership</A -></H1 -><P ->Clicking on the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Ownership"</B -> button - brings up a dialog box telling you who owns the given file. The - owner name will be of the form :</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B -></P -><P ->Where <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->SERVER</I -></TT -> is the NetBIOS name of - the Samba server, <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->user</I -></TT -> is the user name of - the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->(Long name)</I -></TT -> - is the discriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the - GECOS field of the UNIX password database). Click on the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->Close - </B -> button to remove this dialog.</P -><P ->If the parameter <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->nt acl support</I -></TT -> - is set to <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->false</TT -> then the file owner will - be shown as the NT user <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Everyone"</B ->.</P -><P ->The <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->Take Ownership</B -> button will not allow - you to change the ownership of this file to yourself (clicking on - it will display a dialog box complaining that the user you are - currently logged onto the NT client cannot be found). The reason - for this is that changing the ownership of a file is a privilaged - operation in UNIX, available only to the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->root</I -> - user. As clicking on this button causes NT to attempt to change - the ownership of a file to the current user logged into the NT - client this will not work with Samba at this time.</P -><P ->There is an NT chown command that will work with Samba - and allow a user with Administrator privillage connected - to a Samba 2.0.4 server as root to change the ownership of - files on both a local NTFS filesystem or remote mounted NTFS - or Samba drive. This is available as part of the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Seclib - </I -> NT security library written by Jeremy Allison of - the Samba Team, available from the main Samba ftp site.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1187" ->Viewing file or directory permissions</A -></H1 -><P ->The third button is the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Permissions"</B -> - button. Clicking on this brings up a dialog box that shows both - the permissions and the UNIX owner of the file or directory. - The owner is displayed in the form :</P -><P -><B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B -></P -><P ->Where <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->SERVER</I -></TT -> is the NetBIOS name of - the Samba server, <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->user</I -></TT -> is the user name of - the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT -CLASS="REPLACEABLE" -><I ->(Long name)</I -></TT -> - is the discriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the - GECOS field of the UNIX password database).</P -><P ->If the parameter <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->nt acl support</I -></TT -> - is set to <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->false</TT -> then the file owner will - be shown as the NT user <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Everyone"</B -> and the - permissions will be shown as NT "Full Control".</P -><P ->The permissions field is displayed differently for files - and directories, so I'll describe the way file permissions - are displayed first.</P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN1202" ->File Permissions</A -></H2 -><P ->The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and - the correspinding "read", "write", "execute" permissions - triples are mapped by Samba into a three element NT ACL - with the 'r', 'w', and 'x' bits mapped into the corresponding - NT permissions. The UNIX world permissions are mapped into - the global NT group <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->Everyone</B ->, followed - by the list of permissions allowed for UNIX world. The UNIX - owner and group permissions are displayed as an NT - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->user</B -> icon and an NT <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->local - group</B -> icon respectively followed by the list - of permissions allowed for the UNIX user and group.</P -><P ->As many UNIX permission sets don't map into common - NT names such as <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"read"</B ->, <B -CLASS="COMMAND" -> "change"</B -> or <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"full control"</B -> then - usually the permissions will be prefixed by the words <B -CLASS="COMMAND" -> "Special Access"</B -> in the NT display list.</P -><P ->But what happens if the file has no permissions allowed - for a particular UNIX user group or world component ? In order - to allow "no permissions" to be seen and modified then Samba - overloads the NT <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Take Ownership"</B -> ACL attribute - (which has no meaning in UNIX) and reports a component with - no permissions as having the NT <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"O"</B -> bit set. - This was chosen of course to make it look like a zero, meaning - zero permissions. More details on the decision behind this will - be given below.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN1216" ->Directory Permissions</A -></H2 -><P ->Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two - different sets of permissions. The first set of permissions - is the ACL set on the directory itself, this is usually displayed - in the first set of parentheses in the normal <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"RW"</B -> - NT style. This first set of permissions is created by Samba in - exactly the same way as normal file permissions are, described - above, and is displayed in the same way.</P -><P ->The second set of directory permissions has no real meaning - in the UNIX permissions world and represents the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" -> "inherited"</B -> permissions that any file created within - this directory would inherit.</P -><P ->Samba synthesises these inherited permissions for NT by - returning as an NT ACL the UNIX permission mode that a new file - created by Samba on this share would receive.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1223" ->Modifying file or directory permissions</A -></H1 -><P ->Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple - as changing the displayed permissions in the dialog box, and - clicking the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->OK</B -> button. However, there are - limitations that a user needs to be aware of, and also interactions - with the standard Samba permission masks and mapping of DOS - attributes that need to also be taken into account.</P -><P ->If the parameter <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->nt acl support</I -></TT -> - is set to <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->false</TT -> then any attempt to set - security permissions will fail with an <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Access Denied" - </B -> message.</P -><P ->The first thing to note is that the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Add"</B -> - button will not return a list of users in Samba 2.0.4 (it will give - an error message of <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"The remote proceedure call failed - and did not execute"</B ->). This means that you can only - manipulate the current user/group/world permissions listed in - the dialog box. This actually works quite well as these are the - only permissions that UNIX actually has.</P -><P ->If a permission triple (either user, group, or world) - is removed from the list of permissions in the NT dialog box, - then when the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"OK"</B -> button is pressed it will - be applied as "no permissions" on the UNIX side. If you then - view the permissions again the "no permissions" entry will appear - as the NT <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"O"</B -> flag, as described above. This - allows you to add permissions back to a file or directory once - you have removed them from a triple component.</P -><P ->As UNIX supports only the "r", "w" and "x" bits of - an NT ACL then if other NT security attributes such as "Delete - access" are selected then they will be ignored when applied on - the Samba server.</P -><P ->When setting permissions on a directory the second - set of permissions (in the second set of parentheses) is - by default applied to all files within that directory. If this - is not what you want you must uncheck the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Replace - permissions on existing files"</B -> checkbox in the NT - dialog before clicking <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"OK"</B ->.</P -><P ->If you wish to remove all permissions from a - user/group/world component then you may either highlight the - component and click the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Remove"</B -> button, - or set the component to only have the special <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Take - Ownership"</B -> permission (dsplayed as <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"O" - </B ->) highlighted.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1245" ->Interaction with the standard Samba create mask - parameters</A -></H1 -><P ->Note that with Samba 2.0.5 there are four new parameters - to control this interaction. These are :</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->security mask</I -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force security mode</I -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->directory security mask</I -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force directory security mode</I -></TT -></P -><P ->Once a user clicks <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"OK"</B -> to apply the - permissions Samba maps the given permissions into a user/group/world - r/w/x triple set, and then will check the changed permissions for a - file against the bits set in the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK" -TARGET="_top" -> - <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->security mask</I -></TT -></A -> parameter. Any bits that - were changed that are not set to '1' in this parameter are left alone - in the file permissions.</P -><P ->Essentially, zero bits in the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->security mask</I -></TT -> - mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not</I -> - allowed to change, and one bits are those the user is allowed to change. - </P -><P ->If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value as - the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->create mask - </I -></TT -></A -> parameter to provide compatibility with Samba 2.0.4 - where this permission change facility was introduced. To allow a user to - modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, set this parameter - to 0777.</P -><P ->Next Samba checks the changed permissions for a file against - the bits set in the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCESECURITYMODE" -TARGET="_top" -> <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force security mode</I -></TT -></A -> parameter. Any bits - that were changed that correspond to bits set to '1' in this parameter - are forced to be set.</P -><P ->Essentially, bits set in the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force security mode - </I -></TT -> parameter may be treated as a set of bits that, when - modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P -><P ->If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value - as the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force - create mode</I -></TT -></A -> parameter to provide compatibility - with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility was introduced. - To allow a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, - with no restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P -><P ->The <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->security mask</I -></TT -> and <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force - security mode</I -></TT -> parameters are applied to the change - request in that order.</P -><P ->For a directory Samba will perform the same operations as - described above for a file except using the parameter <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> directory security mask</I -></TT -> instead of <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->security - mask</I -></TT ->, and <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force directory security mode - </I -></TT -> parameter instead of <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force security mode - </I -></TT ->.</P -><P ->The <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->directory security mask</I -></TT -> parameter - by default is set to the same value as the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->directory mask - </I -></TT -> parameter and the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force directory security - mode</I -></TT -> parameter by default is set to the same value as - the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force directory mode</I -></TT -> parameter to provide - compatibility with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility - was introduced.</P -><P ->In this way Samba enforces the permission restrictions that - an administrator can set on a Samba share, whilst still allowing users - to modify the permission bits within that restriction.</P -><P ->If you want to set up a share that allows users full control - in modifying the permission bits on their files and directories and - doesn't force any particular bits to be set 'on', then set the following - parameters in the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" -><TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf(5) - </TT -></A -> file in that share specific section :</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->security mask = 0777</I -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force security mode = 0</I -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->directory security mask = 0777</I -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force directory security mode = 0</I -></TT -></P -><P ->As described, in Samba 2.0.4 the parameters :</P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->create mask</I -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force create mode</I -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->directory mask</I -></TT -></P -><P -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force directory mode</I -></TT -></P -><P ->were used instead of the parameters discussed here.</P -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT1" -><HR><H1 -CLASS="SECT1" -><A -NAME="AEN1309" ->Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute - mapping</A -></H1 -><P ->Samba maps some of the DOS attribute bits (such as "read - only") into the UNIX permissions of a file. This means there can - be a conflict between the permission bits set via the security - dialog and the permission bits set by the file attribute mapping. - </P -><P ->One way this can show up is if a file has no UNIX read access - for the owner it will show up as "read only" in the standard - file attributes tabbed dialog. Unfortunately this dialog is - the same one that contains the security info in another tab.</P -><P ->What this can mean is that if the owner changes the permissions - to allow themselves read access using the security dialog, clicks - <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"OK"</B -> to get back to the standard attributes tab - dialog, and then clicks <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"OK"</B -> on that dialog, then - NT will set the file permissions back to read-only (as that is what - the attributes still say in the dialog). This means that after setting - permissions and clicking <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"OK"</B -> to get back to the - attributes dialog you should always hit <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"Cancel"</B -> - rather than <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->"OK"</B -> to ensure that your changes - are not overridden.</P -></DIV -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="CHAPTER" -><HR><H1 -><A -NAME="AEN1319" ->Chapter 9. OS2 Client HOWTO</A +NAME="AEN1734" +>Chapter 10. OS2 Client HOWTO</A ></H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1330" ->FAQs</A +NAME="AEN1745" +>10.1. FAQs</A ></H1 ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1332" ->How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or +NAME="AEN1747" +>10.1.1. How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A ></H2 ><P @@ -5802,8 +8342,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1347" ->How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), +NAME="AEN1762" +>10.1.2. How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A ></H2 ><P @@ -5823,12 +8363,21 @@ TARGET="_top" a nutshell, edit the file \OS2VER in the root directory of the OS/2 boot partition and add the lines:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > 20=setup.exe 20=netwksta.sys 20=netvdd.sys </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >before you install the client. Also, don't use the @@ -5846,8 +8395,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1356" ->Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) +NAME="AEN1771" +>10.1.3. Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version) is used as a client?</A ></H2 ><P @@ -5868,8 +8417,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN1360" ->How do I get printer driver download working +NAME="AEN1775" +>10.1.4. How do I get printer driver download working for OS/2 clients?</A ></H2 ><P @@ -5880,7 +8429,7 @@ NAME="AEN1360" driver from an OS/2 system.</P ><P >Install the NT driver first for that printer. Then, - add to your smb.conf a paramater, "os2 driver map = + add to your smb.conf a parameter, "os2 driver map = <TT CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ><I @@ -5896,8 +8445,8 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" name of the NT driver name to the OS/2 driver name as follows:</P ><P -><nt driver name> = <os2 driver - name>.<device name>, e.g.: +><nt driver name> = <os2 driver + name>.<device name>, e.g.: HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP LaserJet 5L</P ><P >You can have multiple drivers mapped in this file.</P @@ -5912,6 +8461,178 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ></DIV ></DIV ></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="CHAPTER" +><HR><H1 +><A +NAME="AEN1784" +>Chapter 11. HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</A +></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1791" +>11.1. Introduction</A +></H1 +><P +>Samba is developed in an open environment. Developers use CVS +(Concurrent Versioning System) to "checkin" (also known as +"commit") new source code. Samba's various CVS branches can +be accessed via anonymous CVS using the instructions +detailed in this chapter.</P +><P +>This document is a modified version of the instructions found at +<A +HREF="http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html" +TARGET="_top" +>http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html</A +></P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN1796" +>11.2. CVS Access to samba.org</A +></H1 +><P +>The machine samba.org runs a publicly accessible CVS +repository for access to the source code of several packages, +including samba, rsync and jitterbug. There are two main ways of +accessing the CVS server on this host.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN1799" +>11.2.1. Access via CVSweb</A +></H2 +><P +>You can access the source code via your +favourite WWW browser. This allows you to access the contents of +individual files in the repository and also to look at the revision +history and commit logs of individual files. You can also ask for a diff +listing between any two versions on the repository.</P +><P +>Use the URL : <A +HREF="http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb" +TARGET="_top" +>http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb</A +></P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN1804" +>11.2.2. Access via cvs</A +></H2 +><P +>You can also access the source code via a +normal cvs client. This gives you much more control over you can +do with the repository and allows you to checkout whole source trees +and keep them up to date via normal cvs commands. This is the +preferred method of access if you are a developer and not +just a casual browser.</P +><P +>To download the latest cvs source code, point your +browser at the URL : <A +HREF="http://www.cyclic.com/" +TARGET="_top" +>http://www.cyclic.com/</A +>. +and click on the 'How to get cvs' link. CVS is free software under +the GNU GPL (as is Samba). Note that there are several graphical CVS clients +which provide a graphical interface to the sometimes mundane CVS commands. +Links to theses clients are also available from http://www.cyclic.com.</P +><P +>To gain access via anonymous cvs use the following steps. +For this example it is assumed that you want a copy of the +samba source code. For the other source code repositories +on this system just substitute the correct package name</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> Install a recent copy of cvs. All you really need is a + copy of the cvs client binary. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Run the command + </P +><P +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot login</B +> + </P +><P +> When it asks you for a password type <TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>cvs</B +></TT +>. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Run the command + </P +><P +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co samba</B +> + </P +><P +> This will create a directory called samba containing the + latest samba source code (i.e. the HEAD tagged cvs branch). This + currently corresponds to the 3.0 development tree. + </P +><P +> CVS branches other HEAD can be obtained by using the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>-r</I +></TT +> + and defining a tag name. A list of branch tag names can be found on the + "Development" page of the samba web site. A common request is to obtain the + latest 2.2 release code. This could be done by using the following command. + </P +><P +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co -r SAMBA_2_2 samba</B +> + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Whenever you want to merge in the latest code changes use + the following command from within the samba directory: + </P +><P +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>cvs update -d -P</B +> + </P +></LI +></OL +></DIV +></DIV +></DIV ></DIV ></BODY ></HTML diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Samba-PDC-HOWTO.html b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-PDC-HOWTO.html index 668f7f9aff3..1c67649f4ca 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/Samba-PDC-HOWTO.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-PDC-HOWTO.html @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ <HTML ><HEAD ><TITLE ->How to Configure Samba 2.2.x as a Primary Domain Controller</TITLE +>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</TITLE ><META NAME="GENERATOR" CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ CLASS="TITLEPAGE" CLASS="TITLE" ><A NAME="AEN1" ->How to Configure Samba 2.2.x as a Primary Domain Controller</A +>How to Configure Samba 2.2 as a Primary Domain Controller</A ></H1 ><HR></DIV ><DIV @@ -29,44 +29,127 @@ CLASS="SECT1" CLASS="SECT1" ><A NAME="AEN3" +>Prerequisite Reading</A +></H1 +><P +>Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure +that you are comfortable with configuring basic files services +in smb.conf and how to enable and administer password +encryption in Samba. Theses two topics are covered in the +<A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf(5)</TT +></A +> +manpage and the <A +HREF="ENCRYPTION.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Encryption chapter</A +> +of this HOWTO Collection.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN9" >Background</A ></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" ><P +><B +>Note: </B ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Author's Note :</I -> This document -is a combination of David Bannon's Samba 2.2 PDC HOWTO -and the Samba NT Domain FAQ. Both documents are superceeded by this one.</P +> This document is a combination +of David Bannon's Samba 2.2 PDC HOWTO and the Samba NT Domain FAQ. +Both documents are superseded by this one.</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV ><P >Version of Samba prior to release 2.2 had marginal capabilities to -act as a Windows NT 4.0 Primary Domain Controller (PDC). The following -functionality should work in 2.2.0:</P +act as a Windows NT 4.0 Primary Domain Controller (PDC). Beginning with +Samba 2.2.0, we are proud to announce official support for Windows NT 4.0 +style domain logons from Windows NT 4.0 (through SP6) and Windows 2000 (through +SP1) clients. This article outlines the steps necessary for configuring Samba +as a PDC. It is necessary to have a working Samba server prior to implementing the +PDC functionality. If you have not followed the steps outlined in +<A +HREF="UNIX_INSTALL.html" +TARGET="_top" +> UNIX_INSTALL.html</A +>, please make sure +that your server is configured correctly before proceeding. Another good +resource in the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smb.conf(5) man +page</A +>. The following functionality should work in 2.2:</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P ->domain logons for Windows NT 4.0/2000 clients</P +> domain logons for Windows NT 4.0/2000 clients. + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->placing a Windows 9x client in user level security</P +> placing a Windows 9x client in user level security + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->retrieving a list of users and groups from a Samba PDC to - Windows 9x/NT/2000 clients </P +> retrieving a list of users and groups from a Samba PDC to + Windows 9x/NT/2000 clients + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->roving user profiles</P +> roving (roaming) user profiles + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Windows NT 4.0 style system policies</P +> Windows NT 4.0 style system policies + </P ></LI ></UL +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 Clients</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +> Samba 2.2.1 is required for PDC functionality when using Windows 2000 + SP2 clients. + </P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV ><P >The following pieces of functionality are not included in the 2.2 release:</P ><P @@ -74,21 +157,25 @@ functionality should work in 2.2.0:</P ><UL ><LI ><P ->Windows NT 4 domain trusts</P +> Windows NT 4 domain trusts + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Sam replication with Windows NT 4.0 Domain Controllers - (i.e. a Samba PDC and a Windows NT BDC or vice versa) </P +> SAM replication with Windows NT 4.0 Domain Controllers + (i.e. a Samba PDC and a Windows NT BDC or vice versa) + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Adding users via the User Manager for Domains</P +> Adding users via the User Manager for Domains + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Acting as a Windows 2000 Domain Controller (i.e. Kerberos - and Active Directory)</P +> Acting as a Windows 2000 Domain Controller (i.e. Kerberos and + Active Directory) + </P ></LI ></UL ><P @@ -98,25 +185,6 @@ support Windows 9x style domain logons is completely different from NT4 domain logons and has been officially supported for some time.</P ><P ->Beginning with Samba 2.2.0, we are proud to announce official -support for Windows NT 4.0 style domain logons from Windows NT -4.0 and Windows 2000 (including SP1) clients. This article -outlines the steps necessary for configuring Samba as a PDC. -Note that it is necessary to have a working Samba server -prior to implementing the PDC functionality. If you have not -followed the steps outlined in <A -HREF="UNIX_INSTALL.html" -TARGET="_top" ->UNIX_INSTALL.html</A ->, please make sure that your server -is configured correctly before proceeding. Another good -resource in the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" -TARGET="_top" ->smb.conf(5) man -page</A ->.</P -><P >Implementing a Samba PDC can basically be divided into 2 broad steps.</P ><P @@ -125,13 +193,14 @@ steps.</P TYPE="1" ><LI ><P ->Configuring the Samba Domain Controller +> Configuring the Samba PDC </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Creating machine trust accounts - and joining clients to the domain</P +> Creating machine trust accounts and joining clients + to the domain + </P ></LI ></OL ><P @@ -145,7 +214,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN40" +NAME="AEN49" >Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A ></H1 ><P @@ -251,7 +320,7 @@ TARGET="_top" > = \\homeserver\%u ; specify a generic logon script for all users - ; this is a relative path to the [netlogon] share + ; this is a relative **DOS** path to the [netlogon] share <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONSCRIPT" TARGET="_top" @@ -305,16 +374,14 @@ TARGET="_top" > = 0700</PRE ></P ><P ->There are a couple of points to emphasize in the above -configuration.</P +>There are a couple of points to emphasize in the above configuration.</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P ->encrypted passwords must be enabled. - For more details on how to do this, refer to - <A +> Encrypted passwords must be enabled. For more details on how + to do this, refer to <A HREF="ENCRYPTION.html" TARGET="_top" >ENCRYPTION.html</A @@ -323,23 +390,27 @@ TARGET="_top" ></LI ><LI ><P ->The server must support domain logons - and a <TT +> The server must support domain logons and a + <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >[netlogon]</TT -> share</P +> share + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->The server must be the domain master browser - in order for Windows client to locate the server as a DC.</P +> The server must be the domain master browser in order for Windows + client to locate the server as a DC. Please refer to the various + Network Browsing documentation included with this distribution for + details. + </P ></LI ></UL ><P >As Samba 2.2 does not offer a complete implementation of group mapping between Windows NT groups and UNIX groups (this is really quite complicated to explain in a short space), you should refer to the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINADMONUSERS" +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINADMINUSERS" TARGET="_top" >domain admin users</A @@ -356,28 +427,38 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN83" +NAME="AEN92" >Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the Domain</A ></H1 ><P ->First you must understand what a machine trust account is and what -it is used for.</P -><P ->A machine trust account is a user account owned by a computer. +>A machine trust account is a samba user account owned by a computer. The account password acts as the shared secret for secure -communication with the Domain Controller. Hence the reason that -a Windows 9x host is never a true member of a domain because -it does not posses a machine trust account and thus has no shared -secret with the DC.</P +communication with the Domain Controller. This is a security feature +to prevent an unauthorized machine with the same NetBIOS name from +joining the domain and gaining access to domain user/group accounts. +Hence a Windows 9x host is never a true member of a domain because it does +not posses a machine trust account, and thus has no shared secret with the DC.</P ><P >On a Windows NT PDC, these machine trust account passwords are stored -in the registry. A Samba PDC stores these accounts in he same location +in the registry. A Samba PDC stores these accounts in the same location as user LanMan and NT password hashes (currently <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >smbpasswd</TT >). -However, machine trust accounts only possess the NT password hash.</P +However, machine trust accounts only possess and use the NT password hash.</P +><P +>Because Samba requires machine accounts to possess a UNIX uid from +which an Windows NT SID can be generated, all of these accounts +must have an entry in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> and smbpasswd. +Future releases will alleviate the need to create +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/passwd</TT +> entries. </P ><P >There are two means of creating machine trust accounts.</P ><P @@ -385,30 +466,52 @@ However, machine trust accounts only possess the NT password hash.</P ><UL ><LI ><P ->Manual creation before joining the client - to the domain. In this case, the password is set to a known - value -- the lower case of the machine's netbios name.</P +> Manual creation before joining the client to the domain. In this case, + the password is set to a known value -- the lower case of the + machine's NetBIOS name. + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ->Creation of the account at the time of - joining the domain. In this case, the session key of the - administrative account used to join the client to the domain acts - as an encryption key for setting the password to a random value.</P +> Creation of the account at the time of joining the domain. In + this case, the session key of the administrative account used to join + the client to the domain acts as an encryption key for setting the + password to a random value (This is the recommended method). + </P ></LI ></UL +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN106" +>Manually creating machine trust accounts</A +></H2 ><P ->Because Samba requires machine accounts to possess a UNIX uid from -which an Windows NT SID can be generated, all of these accounts -will have an entry in <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> and smbpasswd. -Future releases will alleviate the need to create -<TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> entries.</P +>The first step in creating a machine trust account by hand is to +create an entry for the machine in /etc/passwd. This can be done +using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>vipw</B +> or any 'add userr' command which is normally +used to create new UNIX accounts. The following is an example for a Linux +based Samba server:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>root# </TT +>/usr/sbin/useradd -g 100 -d /dev/null -c <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_nickname</I +></TT +> -m -s /bin/false <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_name</I +></TT +>$</P ><P >The <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -423,20 +526,40 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->doppy$:x:505:501:NTMachine:/dev/null:/bin/false</PRE +>doppy$:x:505:501:<TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_nickname</I +></TT +>:/dev/null:/bin/false</PRE ></P ><P ->If you are manually creating the machine accounts, it is necessary -to add the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->/etc/passwd</TT -> (or NIS passwd -map) entry prior to adding the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smbpasswd</TT -> -entry. The following command will create a new machine account -ready for use.</P +>Above, <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_nickname</I +></TT +> can be any descriptive name for the +pc i.e. BasementComputer. The <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>machine_name</I +></TT +> absolutely must be +the NetBIOS name of the pc to be added to the domain. The "$" must append the NetBIOS +name of the pc or samba will not recognize this as a machine account</P +><P +>Now that the UNIX account has been created, the next step is to create +the smbpasswd entry for the machine containing the well known initial +trust account password. This can be done using the <A +HREF="smbpasswd.6.html" +TARGET="_top" +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbpasswd(8)</B +></A +> command +as shown here:</P ><P ><TT CLASS="PROMPT" @@ -453,168 +576,284 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ><I >machine_name</I ></TT -> is the machine's netbios -name.</P +> is the machine's NetBIOS +name. </P +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->If you manually create a machine account, immediately join -the client to the domain.</I -> An open account like this -can allow intruders to gain access to user account information -in your domain.</P -><P ->The second way of creating machine trust accounts is to add -them on the fly at the time the client is joined to the domain. -You will need to include a value for the -<A +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Join the client to the domain immediately</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +> Manually creating a machine trust account using this method is the + equivalent of creating a machine account on a Windows NT PDC using + the "Server Manager". From the time at which the account is created + to the time which th client joins the domain and changes the password, + your domain is vulnerable to an intruder joining your domain using a + a machine with the same NetBIOS name. A PDC inherently trusts + members of the domain and will serve out a large degree of user + information to such clients. You have been warned! + </P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN134" +>Creating machine trust accounts "on the fly"</A +></H2 +><P +>The second, and most recommended way of creating machine trust accounts +is to create them as needed at the time the client is joined to +the domain. You will need to include a value for the <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT" TARGET="_top" >add user script</A > -parameter. Below is an example I use on a RedHat 6.2 Linux system.</P +parameter. Below is an example from a RedHat 6.2 Linux system.</P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >add user script = /usr/sbin/useradd -d /dev/null -g 100 -s /bin/false -M %u </PRE ></P ><P ->In Samba 2.2.0, <I +>In Samba 2.2.1, <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >only the root account</I > can be used to create -machine accounts on the fly like this. Therefore, it is required -to create an entry in smbpasswd for <I +machine accounts like this. Therefore, it is required to create +an entry in smbpasswd for <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >root</I ->. -The password <I +>. The password +<I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >SHOULD</I -> be set to s different -password that the associated <TT +> be set to s different password that the +associated <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/passwd</TT -> -entry for security reasons.</P +> entry for security reasons.</P +></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN122" +NAME="AEN145" >Common Problems and Errors</A ></H1 ><P ></P ><P -><I +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >I cannot include a '$' in a machine name.</I -></P +> + </P ><P ->A 'machine name' in (typically) <TT +> A 'machine name' in (typically) <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/passwd</TT > -of the machine name with a '$' appended. FreeBSD (and other BSD -systems ?) won't create a user with a '$' in their name.</P + of the machine name with a '$' appended. FreeBSD (and other BSD + systems ?) won't create a user with a '$' in their name. + </P ><P ->The problem is only in the program used to make the entry, once -made, it works perfectly. So create a user without the '$' and -use <B +> The problem is only in the program used to make the entry, once + made, it works perfectly. So create a user without the '$' and + use <B CLASS="COMMAND" >vipw</B > to edit the entry, adding the '$'. Or create -the whole entry with vipw if you like, make sure you use a -unique uid !</P + the whole entry with vipw if you like, make sure you use a + unique uid ! + </P +></LI +><LI ><P -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >I get told "You already have a connection to the Domain...." -when creating a machine account.</I -></P -><P ->This happens if you try to create a machine account from the -machine itself and use a user name that does not work (for whatever -reason) and then try another (possibly valid) user name. -Exit out of the network applet to close the initial connection -and try again.</P + or "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied conflict with an + existing set.." when creating a machine account.</I +> + </P ><P ->Further, if the machine is a already a 'member of a workgroup' that -is the same name as the domain you are joining (bad idea) you will -get this message. Change the workgroup name to something else, it -does not matter what, reboot, and try again.</P +> This happens if you try to create a machine account from the + machine itself and already have a connection (e.g. mapped drive) + to a share (or IPC$) on the Samba PDC. The following command + will remove all network drive connections: + </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->I get told "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied -conflict with an existing set.."</I -></P +> <TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>C:\WINNT\></TT +> <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>net use * /d</B +> + </P ><P ->This is the same basic problem as mentioned above, "You already -have a connection..."</P +> Further, if the machine is a already a 'member of a workgroup' that + is the same name as the domain you are joining (bad idea) you will + get this message. Change the workgroup name to something else, it + does not matter what, reboot, and try again. + </P +></LI +><LI ><P -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->"The system can not log you on (C000019B)...."</I -></P +>The system can not log you on (C000019B)....</I +> + </P ><P >I joined the domain successfully but after upgrading -to a newer version of the Samba code I get the message, "The system -can not log you on (C000019B), Please try a gain or consult your -system administrator" when attempting to logon.</P + to a newer version of the Samba code I get the message, "The system + can not log you on (C000019B), Please try a gain or consult your + system administrator" when attempting to logon. + </P ><P ->This occurs when the domain SID stored in -<TT +> This occurs when the domain SID stored in + <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >private/WORKGROUP.SID</TT > is -changed. For example, you remove the file and <B + changed. For example, you remove the file and <B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbd</B > automatically -creates a new one. Or you are swapping back and forth between -versions 2.0.7, TNG and the HEAD branch code (not recommended). The -only way to correct the problem is to restore the original domain -SID or remove the domain client from the domain and rejoin.</P + creates a new one. Or you are swapping back and forth between + versions 2.0.7, TNG and the HEAD branch code (not recommended). The + only way to correct the problem is to restore the original domain + SID or remove the domain client from the domain and rejoin. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>The machine account for this computer either does not + exist or is not accessible.</I +> + </P ><P +> When I try to join the domain I get the message "The machine account + for this computer either does not exist or is not accessible". Whats + wrong? + </P +><P +> This problem is caused by the PDC not having a suitable machine account. + If you are using the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I +>add user script</I +></TT +> method to create + accounts then this would indicate that it has not worked. Ensure the domain + admin user system is working. + </P +><P +> Alternatively if you are creating account entries manually then they + have not been created correctly. Make sure that you have the entry + correct for the machine account in smbpasswd file on the Samba PDC. + If you added the account using an editor rather than using the smbpasswd + utility, make sure that the account name is the machine NetBIOS name + with a '$' appended to it ( i.e. computer_name$ ). There must be an entry + in both /etc/passwd and the smbpasswd file. Some people have reported + that inconsistent subnet masks between the Samba server and the NT + client have caused this problem. Make sure that these are consistent + for both client and server. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->"The machine account for this computer either does not -exist or is not accessible."</I -></P +>When I attempt to login to a Samba Domain from a NT4/W2K workstation, + I get a message about my account being disabled.</I +> + </P ><P ->When I try to join the domain I get the message "The machine account -for this computer either does not exist or is not accessible". Whats -wrong ?</P +> This problem is caused by a PAM related bug in Samba 2.2.0. This bug is + fixed in 2.2.1. Other symptoms could be unaccessible shares on + NT/W2K member servers in the domain or the following error in your smbd.log: + passdb/pampass.c:pam_account(268) PAM: UNKNOWN ERROR for User: %user% + </P ><P ->This problem is caused by the PDC not having a suitable machine account. -If you are using the <B +> At first be ensure to enable the useraccounts with <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->add user script =</B -> method to create -accounts then this would indicate that it has not worked. Ensure the domain -admin user system is working.</P -><P ->Alternatively if you are creating account entries manually then they -have not been created correctly. Make sure that you have the entry -correct for the machine account in smbpasswd file on the Samba PDC. -If you added the account using an editor rather than using the smbpasswd -utility, make sure that the account name is the machine netbios name -with a '$' appended to it ( ie. computer_name$ ). There must be an entry -in both /etc/passwd and the smbpasswd file. Some people have reported -that inconsistent subnet masks between the Samba server and the NT -client have caused this problem. Make sure that these are consistent -for both client and server.</P +>smbpasswd -e + %user%</B +>, this is normally done, when you create an account. + </P +><P +> In order to work around this problem in 2.2.0, configure the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>account</I +></TT +> control flag in + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/pam.d/samba</TT +> file as follows: + </P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +> account required pam_permit.so + </PRE +></P +><P +> If you want to remain backward compatibility to samba 2.0.x use + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_permit.so</TT +>, it's also possible to use + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_pwdb.so</TT +>. There are some bugs if you try to + use <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>pam_unix.so</TT +>, if you need this, be ensure to use + the most recent version of this file. + </P +></LI +></UL ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN150" +NAME="AEN193" >System Policies and Profiles</A ></H1 ><P @@ -630,97 +869,112 @@ Profiles and Policies in Windows NT 4.0</A ><P >Here are some additional details:</P ><P -><I +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >What about Windows NT Policy Editor ?</I -></P +> + </P ><P ->To create or edit <TT +> To create or edit <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >ntconfig.pol</TT > you must use -the NT Server Policy Editor, <B + the NT Server Policy Editor, <B CLASS="COMMAND" >poledit.exe</B > which -is included with NT Server but <I + is included with NT Server but <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >not NT Workstation</I >. -There is a Policy Editor on a NTws -but it is not suitable for creating <I + There is a Policy Editor on a NTws + but it is not suitable for creating <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Domain Policies</I >. -Further, although the Windows 95 -Policy Editor can be installed on an NT Workstation/Server, it will not -work with NT policies because the registry key that are set by the policy templates. -However, the files from the NT Server will run happily enough on an NTws. -You need <TT + Further, although the Windows 95 + Policy Editor can be installed on an NT Workstation/Server, it will not + work with NT policies because the registry key that are set by the policy templates. + However, the files from the NT Server will run happily enough on an NTws. + You need <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >poledit.exe, common.adm</TT > and <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >winnt.adm</TT >. It is convenient -to put the two *.adm files in <TT + to put the two *.adm files in <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >c:\winnt\inf</TT > which is where -the binary will look for them unless told otherwise. Note also that that -directory is 'hidden'.</P + the binary will look for them unless told otherwise. Note also that that + directory is 'hidden'. + </P ><P ->The Windows NT policy editor is also included with the -Service Pack 3 (and later) for Windows NT 4.0. Extract the files using -<B +> The Windows NT policy editor is also included with the Service Pack 3 (and + later) for Windows NT 4.0. Extract the files using <B CLASS="COMMAND" >servicepackname /x</B ->, ie thats <B +>, + i.e. that's <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->Nt4sp6ai.exe -/x</B -> for service pack 6a. The policy editor, <B +>Nt4sp6ai.exe /x</B +> for service pack 6a. The policy editor, + <B CLASS="COMMAND" >poledit.exe</B -> and the -associated template files (*.adm) should -be extracted as well. It is also possible to downloaded the policy template -files for Office97 and get a copy of the policy editor. Another possible -location is with the Zero Administration Kit available for download from Microsoft.</P +> and the associated template files (*.adm) should + be extracted as well. It is also possible to downloaded the policy template + files for Office97 and get a copy of the policy editor. Another possible + location is with the Zero Administration Kit available for download from Microsoft. + </P +></LI +><LI ><P -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >Can Win95 do Policies ?</I -></P +> + </P ><P ->Install the group policy handler for Win9x to pick up group -policies. Look on the Win98 CD in <TT +> Install the group policy handler for Win9x to pick up group + policies. Look on the Win98 CD in <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >\tools\reskit\netadmin\poledit</TT >. -Install group policies on a Win9x client by double-clicking -<TT + Install group policies on a Win9x client by double-clicking + <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >grouppol.inf</TT >. Log off and on again a couple of -times and see if Win98 picks up group policies. Unfortunately this needs -to be done on every Win9x machine that uses group policies....</P + times and see if Win98 picks up group policies. Unfortunately this needs + to be done on every Win9x machine that uses group policies.... + </P ><P ->If group policies don't work one reports suggests getting the updated -(read: working) grouppol.dll for Windows 9x. The group list is grabbed -from /etc/group.</P +> If group policies don't work one reports suggests getting the updated + (read: working) grouppol.dll for Windows 9x. The group list is grabbed + from /etc/group. + </P +></LI +><LI ><P -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager'</I -></P +> + </P ><P ->Since I don't need to buy an NT Server CD now, how do I get -the 'User Manager for Domains', the 'Server Manager' ?</P +> Since I don't need to buy an NT Server CD now, how do I get + the 'User Manager for Domains', the 'Server Manager' ? + </P ><P ->Microsoft distributes a version of -these tools called nexus for installation on Windows 95 systems. The -tools set includes</P +> Microsoft distributes a version of these tools called nexus for + installation on Windows 95 systems. The tools set includes + </P ><P ></P ><UL @@ -738,26 +992,30 @@ tools set includes</P ></LI ></UL ><P ->Click here to download the archived file <A +> Click here to download the archived file <A HREF="ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/NEXUS.EXE" TARGET="_top" >ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/NEXUS.EXE</A -></P +> + </P ><P ->The Windows NT 4.0 version of the 'User Manager for -Domains' and 'Server Manager' are available from Microsoft via ftp -from <A +> The Windows NT 4.0 version of the 'User Manager for + Domains' and 'Server Manager' are available from Microsoft via ftp + from <A HREF="ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/SRVTOOLS.EXE" TARGET="_top" >ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/SRVTOOLS.EXE</A -></P +> + </P +></LI +></UL ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN190" +NAME="AEN237" >What other help can I get ?</A ></H1 ><P @@ -766,14 +1024,19 @@ of mailing lists, RFC's and documentation. The docs that come with the samba distribution contain very good explanations of general SMB topics such as browsing.</P ><P -><I +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >What are some diagnostics tools I can use to debug the domain logon -process and where can I find them?</I -></P + process and where can I find them?</I +> + </P ><P > One of the best diagnostic tools for debugging problems is Samba itself. - You can use the -d option for both smbd and nmbd to specifiy what + You can use the -d option for both smbd and nmbd to specify what 'debug level' at which to run. See the man pages on smbd, nmbd and smb.conf for more information on debugging options. The debug level can range from 1 (the default) to 10 (100 for debugging passwords). @@ -812,7 +1075,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></UL ><P > An SMB enabled version of tcpdump is available from - <A + <A HREF="http://www.tcpdump.org/" TARGET="_top" >http://www.tcpdup.org/</A @@ -829,18 +1092,21 @@ TARGET="_top" (aka. netmon) is available on the Microsoft Developer Network CD's, the Windows NT Server install CD and the SMS CD's. The version of netmon that ships with SMS allows for dumping packets between any two - computers (ie. placing the network interface in promiscuous mode). + computers (i.e. placing the network interface in promiscuous mode). The version on the NT Server install CD will only allow monitoring of network traffic directed to the local NT box and broadcasts on the local subnet. Be aware that Ethereal can read and write netmon formatted files. </P +></LI +><LI ><P -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >How do I install 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation -or a Windows 9x box?</I -></P + or a Windows 9x box?</I +> + </P ><P > Installing netmon on an NT workstation requires a couple of steps. The following are for installing Netmon V4.00.349, which comes @@ -935,14 +1201,11 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" information on how to do this. Copy the files from a working Netmon installation. </P -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN237" ->URLs and similar</A -></H2 +></LI +><LI +><P +> The following is a list if helpful URLs and other links: + </P ><P ></P ><UL @@ -1008,44 +1271,44 @@ TARGET="_top" ></P ></LI ></UL -></DIV -><DIV -CLASS="SECT2" -><HR><H2 -CLASS="SECT2" -><A -NAME="AEN261" ->Mailing Lists</A -></H2 +></LI +></UL ><P -><I +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >How do I get help from the mailing lists ?</I -></P +> + </P ><P ->There are a number of Samba related mailing lists. Go to <A +> There are a number of Samba related mailing lists. Go to <A HREF="http://samba.org" TARGET="_top" >http://samba.org</A >, click on your nearest mirror -and then click on <B + and then click on <B CLASS="COMMAND" >Support</B > and then click on <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->Samba related mailing lists</B ->.</P +> Samba related mailing lists</B +>. + </P ><P ->For questions relating to Samba TNG go to -<A +> For questions relating to Samba TNG go to + <A HREF="http://www.samba-tng.org/" TARGET="_top" >http://www.samba-tng.org/</A > -It has been requested that you don't post questions about Samba-TNG to the -main stream Samba lists.</P + It has been requested that you don't post questions about Samba-TNG to the + main stream Samba lists.</P ><P ->If you post a message to one of the lists please observe the following guide lines :</P +> If you post a message to one of the lists please observe the following guide lines : + </P ><P ></P ><UL @@ -1084,7 +1347,7 @@ main stream Samba lists.</P ><LI ><P > Don't cross post. Work out which is the best list to post to - and see what happens, ie don't post to both samba-ntdom and samba-technical. + and see what happens, i.e. don't post to both samba-ntdom and samba-technical. Many people active on the lists subscribe to more than one list and get annoyed to see the same message two or more times. Often someone will see a message and thinking it would be better dealt @@ -1113,35 +1376,799 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" smb.conf in their attach directory ?</P ></LI ></UL +></LI +><LI ><P -><I +> <I CLASS="EMPHASIS" >How do I get off the mailing lists ?</I -></P +> + </P ><P >To have your name removed from a samba mailing list, go to the - same place you went to to get on it. Go to <A + same place you went to to get on it. Go to <A HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" TARGET="_top" >http://lists.samba.org</A ->, click - on your nearest mirror and then click on <B +>, + click on your nearest mirror and then click on <B CLASS="COMMAND" >Support</B > and - then click on <B + then click on <B CLASS="COMMAND" > Samba related mailing lists</B >. Or perhaps see - <A + <A HREF="http://lists.samba.org/mailman/roster/samba-ntdom" TARGET="_top" >here</A -></P +> + </P ><P > Please don't post messages to the list asking to be removed, you will just - be referred to the above address (unless that process failed in some way...) - </P + be referred to the above address (unless that process failed in some way...) + </P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT1" +><HR><H1 +CLASS="SECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN351" +>Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A +></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>The following section contains much of the original +DOMAIN.txt file previously included with Samba. Much of +the material is based on what went into the book Special +Edition, Using Samba. (Richard Sharpe)</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +><P +>A domain and a workgroup are exactly the same thing in terms of network +browsing. The difference is that a distributable authentication +database is associated with a domain, for secure login access to a +network. Also, different access rights can be granted to users if they +successfully authenticate against a domain logon server (NT server and +other systems based on NT server support this, as does at least Samba TNG now).</P +><P +>The SMB client logging on to a domain has an expectation that every other +server in the domain should accept the same authentication information. +Network browsing functionality of domains and workgroups is +identical and is explained in BROWSING.txt. It should be noted, that browsing +is total orthogonal to logon support.</P +><P +>Issues related to the single-logon network model are discussed in this +document. Samba supports domain logons, network logon scripts, and user +profiles for MS Windows for workgroups and MS Windows 9X clients.</P +><P +>When an SMB client in a domain wishes to logon it broadcast requests for a +logon server. The first one to reply gets the job, and validates its +password using whatever mechanism the Samba administrator has installed. +It is possible (but very stupid) to create a domain where the user +database is not shared between servers, i.e. they are effectively workgroup +servers advertising themselves as participating in a domain. This +demonstrates how authentication is quite different from but closely +involved with domains.</P +><P +>Another thing commonly associated with single-logon domains is remote +administration over the SMB protocol. Again, there is no reason why this +cannot be implemented with an underlying username database which is +different from the Windows NT SAM. Support for the Remote Administration +Protocol is planned for a future release of Samba.</P +><P +>Network logon support as discussed in this section is aimed at Window for +Workgroups, and Windows 9X clients. </P +><P +>Support for profiles is confirmed as working for Win95, NT 4.0 and NT 3.51. +It is possible to specify: the profile location; script file to be loaded +on login; the user's home directory; and for NT a kick-off time could also +now easily be supported. However, there are some differences between Win9X +profile support and WinNT profile support. These are discussed below.</P +><P +>With NT Workstations, all this does not require the use or intervention of +an NT 4.0 or NT 3.51 server: Samba can now replace the logon services +provided by an NT server, to a limited and experimental degree (for example, +running "User Manager for Domains" will not provide you with access to +a domain created by a Samba Server).</P +><P +>With Win95, the help of an NT server can be enlisted, both for profile storage +and for user authentication. For details on user authentication, see +security_level.txt. For details on profile storage, see below.</P +><P +>Using these features you can make your clients verify their logon via +the Samba server; make clients run a batch file when they logon to +the network and download their preferences, desktop and start menu.</P +><P +>Before launching into the configuration instructions, it is worthwhile looking +at how a Win9X client performs a logon:</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> The client broadcasts (to the IP broadcast address of the subnet it is in) + a NetLogon request. This is sent to the NetBIOS address DOMAIN<00> at the + NetBIOS layer. The client chooses the first response it receives, which + contains the NetBIOS name of the logon server to use in the format of + \\SERVER. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then connects to that server, logs on (does an SMBsessetupX) and + then connects to the IPC$ share (using an SMBtconX). + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then does a NetWkstaUserLogon request, which retrieves the name + of the user's logon script. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then connects to the NetLogon share and searches for this + and if it is found and can be read, is retrieved and executed by the client. + After this, the client disconnects from the NetLogon share. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then sends a NetUserGetInfo request to the server, to retrieve + the user's home share, which is used to search for profiles. Since the + response to the NetUserGetInfo request does not contain much more + the user's home share, profiles for Win9X clients MUST reside in the user + home directory. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then connects to the user's home share and searches for the + user's profile. As it turns out, you can specify the user's home share as + a sharename and path. For example, \\server\fred\.profile. + If the profiles are found, they are implemented. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> The client then disconnects from the user's home share, and reconnects to + the NetLogon share and looks for CONFIG.POL, the policies file. If this is + found, it is read and implemented. + </P +></LI +></OL +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN381" +>Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A +></H2 +><P +>To use domain logons and profiles you need to do the following:</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> Create a share called [netlogon] in your smb.conf. This share should + be readable by all users, and probably should not be writeable. This + share will hold your network logon scripts, and the CONFIG.POL file + (Note: for details on the CONFIG.POL file, how to use it, what it is, + refer to the Microsoft Windows NT Administration documentation. + The format of these files is not known, so you will need to use + Microsoft tools). + </P +><P +> For example I have used: + </P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>[netlogon] + path = /data/dos/netlogon + writeable = no + guest ok = no</PRE +></P +><P +> Note that it is important that this share is not writeable by ordinary + users, in a secure environment: ordinary users should not be allowed + to modify or add files that another user's computer would then download + when they log in. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> in the [global] section of smb.conf set the following: + </P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>domain logons = yes +logon script = %U.bat + </PRE +></P +><P +> The choice of batch file is, of course, up to you. The above would + give each user a separate batch file as the %U will be changed to + their username automatically. The other standard % macros may also be + used. You can make the batch files come from a subdirectory by using + something like: + </P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon script = scripts\%U.bat + </PRE +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +> create the batch files to be run when the user logs in. If the batch + file doesn't exist then no batch file will be run. + </P +><P +> In the batch files you need to be careful to use DOS style cr/lf line + endings. If you don't then DOS may get confused. I suggest you use a + DOS editor to remotely edit the files if you don't know how to produce + DOS style files under unix. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> Use smbclient with the -U option for some users to make sure that + the \\server\NETLOGON share is available, the batch files are + visible and they are readable by the users. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> you will probably find that your clients automatically mount the + \\SERVER\NETLOGON share as drive z: while logging in. You can put + some useful programs there to execute from the batch files. + </P +></LI +></OL +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>security mode and master browsers</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +>There are a few comments to make in order to tie up some +loose ends. There has been much debate over the issue of whether +or not it is ok to configure Samba as a Domain Controller in security +modes other than <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>USER</TT +>. The only security mode +which will not work due to technical reasons is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SHARE</TT +> +mode security. <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>DOMAIN</TT +> and <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>SERVER</TT +> +mode security is really just a variation on SMB user level security.</P +><P +>Actually, this issue is also closer tied to the debate on whether +or not Samba must be the domain master browser for its workgroup +when operating as a DC. While it may technically be possible +to configure a server as such (after all, browsing and domain logons +are two distinctly different functions), it is not a good idea to +so. You should remember that the DC must register the DOMAIN#1b NetBIOS +name. This is the name used by Windows clients to locate the DC. +Windows clients do not distinguish between the DC and the DMB. +For this reason, it is very wise to configure the Samba DC as the DMB.</P +><P +>Now back to the issue of configuring a Samba DC to use a mode other +than "security = user". If a Samba host is configured to use +another SMB server or DC in order to validate user connection +requests, then it is a fact that some other machine on the network +(the "password server") knows more about user than the Samba host. +99% of the time, this other host is a domain controller. Now +in order to operate in domain mode security, the "workgroup" parameter +must be set to the name of the Windows NT domain (which already +has a domain controller, right?)</P +><P +>Therefore configuring a Samba box as a DC for a domain that +already by definition has a PDC is asking for trouble. +Therefore, you should always configure the Samba DC to be the DMB +for its domain.</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN415" +>Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</A +></H2 +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Warning</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NOTE!</I +> Roaming profiles support is different +for Win9X and WinNT.</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +>Before discussing how to configure roaming profiles, it is useful to see how +Win9X and WinNT clients implement these features.</P +><P +>Win9X clients send a NetUserGetInfo request to the server to get the user's +profiles location. However, the response does not have room for a separate +profiles location field, only the user's home share. This means that Win9X +profiles are restricted to being in the user's home directory.</P +><P +>WinNT clients send a NetSAMLogon RPC request, which contains many fields, +including a separate field for the location of the user's profiles. +This means that support for profiles is different for Win9X and WinNT.</P +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN423" +>Windows NT Configuration</A +></H3 +><P +>To support WinNT clients, inn the [global] section of smb.conf set the +following (for example):</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon path = \\profileserver\profileshare\profilepath\%U\moreprofilepath</PRE +></P +><P +>The default for this option is \\%N\%U\profile, namely +\\sambaserver\username\profile. The \\N%\%U service is created +automatically by the [homes] service. +If you are using a samba server for the profiles, you _must_ make the +share specified in the logon path browseable. </P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>[lkcl 26aug96 - we have discovered a problem where Windows clients can +maintain a connection to the [homes] share in between logins. The +[homes] share must NOT therefore be used in a profile path.]</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN431" +>Windows 9X Configuration</A +></H3 +><P +>To support Win9X clients, you must use the "logon home" parameter. Samba has +now been fixed so that "net use/home" now works as well, and it, too, relies +on the "logon home" parameter.</P +><P +>By using the logon home parameter, you are restricted to putting Win9X +profiles in the user's home directory. But wait! There is a trick you +can use. If you set the following in the [global] section of your +smb.conf file:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon home = \\%L\%U\.profiles</PRE +></P +><P +>then your Win9X clients will dutifully put their clients in a subdirectory +of your home directory called .profiles (thus making them hidden).</P +><P +>Not only that, but 'net use/home' will also work, because of a feature in +Win9X. It removes any directory stuff off the end of the home directory area +and only uses the server and share portion. That is, it looks like you +specified \\%L\%U for "logon home".</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN439" +>Win9X and WinNT Configuration</A +></H3 +><P +>You can support profiles for both Win9X and WinNT clients by setting both the +"logon home" and "logon path" parameters. For example:</P +><P +><PRE +CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" +>logon home = \\%L\%U\.profiles +logon path = \\%L\profiles\%U</PRE +></P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>I have not checked what 'net use /home' does on NT when "logon home" is +set as above.</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN446" +>Windows 9X Profile Setup</A +></H3 +><P +>When a user first logs in on Windows 9X, the file user.DAT is created, +as are folders "Start Menu", "Desktop", "Programs" and "Nethood". +These directories and their contents will be merged with the local +versions stored in c:\windows\profiles\username on subsequent logins, +taking the most recent from each. You will need to use the [global] +options "preserve case = yes", "short case preserve = yes" and +"case sensitive = no" in order to maintain capital letters in shortcuts +in any of the profile folders.</P +><P +>The user.DAT file contains all the user's preferences. If you wish to +enforce a set of preferences, rename their user.DAT file to user.MAN, +and deny them write access to this file.</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> On the Windows 95 machine, go to Control Panel | Passwords and + select the User Profiles tab. Select the required level of + roaming preferences. Press OK, but do _not_ allow the computer + to reboot. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> On the Windows 95 machine, go to Control Panel | Network | + Client for Microsoft Networks | Preferences. Select 'Log on to + NT Domain'. Then, ensure that the Primary Logon is 'Client for + Microsoft Networks'. Press OK, and this time allow the computer + to reboot. + </P +></LI +></OL +><P +>Under Windows 95, Profiles are downloaded from the Primary Logon. +If you have the Primary Logon as 'Client for Novell Networks', then +the profiles and logon script will be downloaded from your Novell +Server. If you have the Primary Logon as 'Windows Logon', then the +profiles will be loaded from the local machine - a bit against the +concept of roaming profiles, if you ask me.</P +><P +>You will now find that the Microsoft Networks Login box contains +[user, password, domain] instead of just [user, password]. Type in +the samba server's domain name (or any other domain known to exist, +but bear in mind that the user will be authenticated against this +domain and profiles downloaded from it, if that domain logon server +supports it), user name and user's password.</P +><P +>Once the user has been successfully validated, the Windows 95 machine +will inform you that 'The user has not logged on before' and asks you +if you wish to save the user's preferences? Select 'yes'.</P +><P +>Once the Windows 95 client comes up with the desktop, you should be able +to examine the contents of the directory specified in the "logon path" +on the samba server and verify that the "Desktop", "Start Menu", +"Programs" and "Nethood" folders have been created.</P +><P +>These folders will be cached locally on the client, and updated when +the user logs off (if you haven't made them read-only by then :-). +You will find that if the user creates further folders or short-cuts, +that the client will merge the profile contents downloaded with the +contents of the profile directory already on the local client, taking +the newest folders and short-cuts from each set.</P +><P +>If you have made the folders / files read-only on the samba server, +then you will get errors from the w95 machine on logon and logout, as +it attempts to merge the local and the remote profile. Basically, if +you have any errors reported by the w95 machine, check the unix file +permissions and ownership rights on the profile directory contents, +on the samba server.</P +><P +>If you have problems creating user profiles, you can reset the user's +local desktop cache, as shown below. When this user then next logs in, +they will be told that they are logging in "for the first time".</P +><P +></P +><OL +TYPE="1" +><LI +><P +> instead of logging in under the [user, password, domain] dialog, + press escape. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> run the regedit.exe program, and look in: + </P +><P +> HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Windows\CurrentVersion\ProfileList + </P +><P +> you will find an entry, for each user, of ProfilePath. Note the + contents of this key (likely to be c:\windows\profiles\username), + then delete the key ProfilePath for the required user. + </P +><P +> [Exit the registry editor]. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>WARNING</I +> - before deleting the contents of the + directory listed in + the ProfilePath (this is likely to be c:\windows\profiles\username), + ask them if they have any important files stored on their desktop + or in their start menu. delete the contents of the directory + ProfilePath (making a backup if any of the files are needed). + </P +><P +> This will have the effect of removing the local (read-only hidden + system file) user.DAT in their profile directory, as well as the + local "desktop", "nethood", "start menu" and "programs" folders. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> search for the user's .PWL password-caching file in the c:\windows + directory, and delete it. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> log off the windows 95 client. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +> check the contents of the profile path (see "logon path" described + above), and delete the user.DAT or user.MAN file for the user, + making a backup if required. + </P +></LI +></OL +><P +>If all else fails, increase samba's debug log levels to between 3 and 10, +and / or run a packet trace program such as tcpdump or netmon.exe, and +look for any error reports.</P +><P +>If you have access to an NT server, then first set up roaming profiles +and / or netlogons on the NT server. Make a packet trace, or examine +the example packet traces provided with NT server, and see what the +differences are with the equivalent samba trace.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN482" +>Windows NT Workstation 4.0</A +></H3 +><P +>When a user first logs in to a Windows NT Workstation, the profile +NTuser.DAT is created. The profile location can be now specified +through the "logon path" parameter. </P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>[lkcl 10aug97 - i tried setting the path to +\\samba-server\homes\profile, and discovered that this fails because +a background process maintains the connection to the [homes] share +which does _not_ close down in between user logins. you have to +have \\samba-server\%L\profile, where user is the username created +from the [homes] share].</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +><P +>There is a parameter that is now available for use with NT Profiles: +"logon drive". This should be set to "h:" or any other drive, and +should be used in conjunction with the new "logon home" parameter.</P +><P +>The entry for the NT 4.0 profile is a _directory_ not a file. The NT +help on profiles mentions that a directory is also created with a .PDS +extension. The user, while logging in, must have write permission to +create the full profile path (and the folder with the .PDS extension) +[lkcl 10aug97 - i found that the creation of the .PDS directory failed, +and had to create these manually for each user, with a shell script. +also, i presume, but have not tested, that the full profile path must +be browseable just as it is for w95, due to the manner in which they +attempt to create the full profile path: test existence of each path +component; create path component].</P +><P +>In the profile directory, NT creates more folders than 95. It creates +"Application Data" and others, as well as "Desktop", "Nethood", +"Start Menu" and "Programs". The profile itself is stored in a file +NTuser.DAT. Nothing appears to be stored in the .PDS directory, and +its purpose is currently unknown.</P +><P +>You can use the System Control Panel to copy a local profile onto +a samba server (see NT Help on profiles: it is also capable of firing +up the correct location in the System Control Panel for you). The +NT Help file also mentions that renaming NTuser.DAT to NTuser.MAN +turns a profile into a mandatory one.</P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>[lkcl 10aug97 - i notice that NT Workstation tells me that it is +downloading a profile from a slow link. whether this is actually the +case, or whether there is some configuration issue, as yet unknown, +that makes NT Workstation _think_ that the link is a slow one is a +matter to be resolved].</P +><P +>[lkcl 20aug97 - after samba digest correspondence, one user found, and +another confirmed, that profiles cannot be loaded from a samba server +unless "security = user" and "encrypt passwords = yes" (see the file +ENCRYPTION.txt) or "security = server" and "password server = ip.address. +of.yourNTserver" are used. Either of these options will allow the NT +workstation to access the samba server using LAN manager encrypted +passwords, without the user intervention normally required by NT +workstation for clear-text passwords].</P +><P +>[lkcl 25aug97 - more comments received about NT profiles: the case of +the profile _matters_. the file _must_ be called NTuser.DAT or, for +a mandatory profile, NTuser.MAN].</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN495" +>Windows NT Server</A +></H3 +><P +>There is nothing to stop you specifying any path that you like for the +location of users' profiles. Therefore, you could specify that the +profile be stored on a samba server, or any other SMB server, as long as +that SMB server supports encrypted passwords.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT3" +><HR><H3 +CLASS="SECT3" +><A +NAME="AEN498" +>Sharing Profiles between W95 and NT Workstation 4.0</A +></H3 +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" +><P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Potentially outdated or incorrect material follows</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +>I think this is all bogus, but have not deleted it. (Richard Sharpe)</P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV +><P +>The default logon path is \\%N\U%. NT Workstation will attempt to create +a directory "\\samba-server\username.PDS" if you specify the logon path +as "\\samba-server\username" with the NT User Manager. Therefore, you +will need to specify (for example) "\\samba-server\username\profile". +NT 4.0 will attempt to create "\\samba-server\username\profile.PDS", which +is more likely to succeed.</P +><P +>If you then want to share the same Start Menu / Desktop with W95, you will +need to specify "logon path = \\samba-server\username\profile" [lkcl 10aug97 +this has its drawbacks: i created a shortcut to telnet.exe, which attempts +to run from the c:\winnt\system32 directory. this directory is obviously +unlikely to exist on a Win95-only host].</P +><P +> If you have this set up correctly, you will find separate user.DAT and +NTuser.DAT files in the same profile directory.</P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" +><P +><B +>Note: </B +>[lkcl 25aug97 - there are some issues to resolve with downloading of +NT profiles, probably to do with time/date stamps. i have found that +NTuser.DAT is never updated on the workstation after the first time that +it is copied to the local workstation profile directory. this is in +contrast to w95, where it _does_ transfer / update profiles correctly].</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV +></DIV ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV @@ -1149,12 +2176,35 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN300" +NAME="AEN508" >DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control & Samba</A ></H1 +><DIV +CLASS="WARNING" ><P ->This appendix was originally authored by John H Terpstra of the Samba Team -and is included here for posterity.</P +></P +><TABLE +CLASS="WARNING" +BORDER="1" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="CENTER" +><B +>Possibly Outdated Material</B +></TD +></TR +><TR +><TD +ALIGN="LEFT" +><P +> This appendix was originally authored by John H Terpstra of + the Samba Team and is included here for posterity. + </P +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></DIV ><P ><I CLASS="EMPHASIS" @@ -1171,12 +2221,9 @@ Windows NT SAM.</P ><P >Windows NT Server can be installed as either a plain file and print server (WORKGROUP workstation or server) or as a server that participates in Domain -Control (DOMAIN member, Primary Domain controller or Backup Domain controller).</P -><P ->The same is true for OS/2 Warp Server, Digital Pathworks and other similar -products, all of which can participate in Domain Control along with Windows NT. -However only those servers which have licensed Windows NT code in them can be -a primary Domain Controller (eg Windows NT Server, Advanced Server for Unix.)</P +Control (DOMAIN member, Primary Domain controller or Backup Domain controller). +The same is true for OS/2 Warp Server, Digital Pathworks and other similar +products, all of which can participate in Domain Control along with Windows NT.</P ><P >To many people these terms can be confusing, so let's try to clear the air.</P ><P @@ -1227,7 +2274,7 @@ plain Servers.</P ><P >The User database is called the SAM (Security Access Manager) database and is used for all user authentication as well as for authentication of inter- -process authentication (ie: to ensure that the service action a user has +process authentication (i.e. to ensure that the service action a user has requested is permitted within the limits of that user's privileges).</P ><P >The Samba team have produced a utility that can dump the Windows NT SAM into @@ -1238,7 +2285,7 @@ to Samba systems.</P ><P >Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95, and Windows NT Workstations and Servers can participate in a Domain security system that is controlled by Windows NT -servers that have been correctly configured. At most every domain will have +servers that have been correctly configured. Almost every domain will have ONE Primary Domain Controller (PDC). It is desirable that each domain will have at least one Backup Domain Controller (BDC).</P ><P diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/UNIX_INSTALL.html b/docs/htmldocs/UNIX_INSTALL.html index 34f4ed9283a..32c4b7be593 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/UNIX_INSTALL.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/UNIX_INSTALL.html @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ CLASS="USERINPUT" ></P ><P >first to see what special options you can enable. - Then exectuting</P + Then executing</P ><P ><TT CLASS="PROMPT" @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >which would allow connections by anyone with an account on the server, using either their login name or "homes" as the service name. (Note that I also set the - workgroup that Samba is part of. See BROWSING.txt for defails)</P + workgroup that Samba is part of. See BROWSING.txt for details)</P ><P >Note that <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" not it will give an error message.</P ><P >Make sure it runs OK and that the services look - resonable before proceeding. </P + reasonable before proceeding. </P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/inetd.conf</TT -> to make them consistant.</P +> to make them consistent.</P ><P >NOTE: On many systems you may need to use the "interfaces" option in smb.conf to specify the IP address @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > tries to determine it at run - time, but fails on somunixes. See the section on "testing nmbd" + time, but fails on some unixes. See the section on "testing nmbd" for a method of finding if you need to do this.</P ><P >!!!WARNING!!! Many unixes only accept around 5 @@ -637,7 +637,7 @@ NAME="AEN162" >Diagnosing Problems</A ></H2 ><P ->If you have instalation problems then go to +>If you have installation problems then go to <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >DIAGNOSIS.txt</TT @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ NAME="AEN182" are set by an application when it opens a file to determine what types of access should be allowed simultaneously with its open. A client may ask for DENY_NONE, DENY_READ, DENY_WRITE - or DENY_ALL. There are also special compatability modes called + or DENY_ALL. There are also special compatibility modes called DENY_FCB and DENY_DOS.</P ><P >You can disable share modes using "share modes = no". @@ -804,7 +804,7 @@ NAME="AEN195" ><P >If you have problems using filenames with accented characters in them (like the German, French or Scandinavian - character sets) then I recommmend you look at the "valid chars" + character sets) then I recommend you look at the "valid chars" option in smb.conf and also take a look at the validchars package in the examples directory.</P ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/findsmb.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/findsmb.1.html index 0f7ed2265ea..2f246d666d8 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/findsmb.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/findsmb.1.html @@ -165,6 +165,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > running would yield output similar to the following</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="SCREEN" ><TT @@ -183,6 +189,9 @@ CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" 192.168.35.97 HERBNT1 *[HERB-NT] [Windows NT 4.0] [NT LAN Manager 4.0] </TT ></PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html index 671278c19e0..13b162ce44f 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ NAME="AEN12" ><H2 >DESCRIPTION</H2 ><P ->This file is part of the <<A +>This file is part of the <A HREF="samba.7.html" TARGET="_top" > Samba</A @@ -59,10 +59,9 @@ TARGET="_top" ><TT CLASS="FILENAME" >lmhosts</TT -> is the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +> is the <EM >Samba - </I + </EM > NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file. It is very similar to the <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -105,6 +104,12 @@ NAME="AEN20" ><P >An example follows :</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ># @@ -114,6 +119,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" 192.9.200.20 NTSERVER#20 192.9.200.21 SAMBASERVER </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Contains three IP to NetBIOS name mappings. The first diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/make_smbcodepage.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/make_smbcodepage.1.html index 456ea98b20c..8e792e31221 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/make_smbcodepage.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/make_smbcodepage.1.html @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ VLINK="#840084" ALINK="#0000FF" ><H1 ><A -NAME="FINDSMB" +NAME="MAKE-SMBCODEPAGE" >make_smbcodepage</A ></H1 ><DIV @@ -104,24 +104,24 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >inputfile</DT ><DD ><P ->This is the input file to process. In t - he '<TT +>This is the input file to process. In + the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >c</I ></TT ->' case this will be a text +> case this will be a text codepage definition file such as the ones found in the Samba <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >source/codepages</TT > directory. In - the '<TT + the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >d</I ></TT ->' case this will be the +> case this will be the binary format codepage definition file normally found in the <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ NAME="AEN58" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->codepage_def.<codepage></B +>codepage_def.<codepage></B ></P ><P >These are the input (text) codepage files provided in the @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->codepage.<codepage></B +>codepage.<codepage></B > - These are the output (binary) codepage files produced and placed in the Samba destination <TT diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html index 4f7f71fe700..29bd8180407 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbd</B -> [-D] [-a] [-o] [-P] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log file>] [-n <primary netbios name>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>]</P +> [-D] [-a] [-o] [-P] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log file>] [-n <primary netbios name>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > is a server that understands and can reply to NetBIOS over IP name service requests, like - those produced by SMBD/CIFS clients such as Windows 95/98/ME, + those produced by SMB/CIFS clients such as Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, and LanManager clients. It also participates in the browsing protocols which make up the Windows "Network Neighborhood" view.</P @@ -71,9 +71,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" specified it will respond with the IP number of the host it is running on. Its "own NetBIOS name" is by default the primary DNS name of the host it is running on, - but this can be overridden with the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->-n</I + but this can be overridden with the <EM +>-n</EM > option (see OPTIONS below). Thus <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -175,7 +174,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >.</P ></DD ><DT ->-H <filename></DT +>-H <filename></DT ><DD ><P >NetBIOS lmhosts file. The lmhosts @@ -194,18 +193,16 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ></A > to resolve any NetBIOS name queries needed by the server. Note - that the contents of this file are <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + that the contents of this file are <EM +>NOT</EM > used by <B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > to answer any name queries. Adding a line to this file affects name NetBIOS resolution - from this host <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->ONLY</I + from this host <EM +>ONLY</EM >.</P ><P >The default path to this file is compiled into @@ -242,7 +239,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >.</P ></DD ><DT ->-d <debug level></DT +>-d <debug level></DT ><DD ><P >debuglevel is an integer @@ -278,7 +275,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > file.</P ></DD ><DT ->-l <log file></DT +>-l <log file></DT ><DD ><P >The -l parameter specifies a path @@ -306,7 +303,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >.</P ></DD ><DT ->-n <primary NetBIOS name></DT +>-n <primary NetBIOS name></DT ><DD ><P >This option allows you to override @@ -331,7 +328,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >.</P ></DD ><DT ->-p <UDP port number></DT +>-p <UDP port number></DT ><DD ><P >UDP port number is a positive integer value. @@ -344,7 +341,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" won't need help!</P ></DD ><DT ->-s <configuration file></DT +>-s <configuration file></DT ><DD ><P >The default configuration file name @@ -484,9 +481,8 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >If <B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B -> is acting as a <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" -> browse master</I +> is acting as a <EM +> browse master</EM > (see the <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#localmaster" TARGET="_top" @@ -529,9 +525,8 @@ NAME="AEN171" CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > process it is recommended - that SIGKILL (-9) <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + that SIGKILL (-9) <EM +>NOT</EM > be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the name database in an inconsistent state. The correct way to terminate <B @@ -544,7 +539,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > will accept SIGHUP, which will cause - it to dump out it's namelists into the file <TT + it to dump out its namelists into the file <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >namelist.debug </TT @@ -560,7 +555,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" cause <B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B -> to dump out it's server database in +> to dump out its server database in the <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >log.nmb</TT @@ -568,11 +563,11 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" of nmbd may be raised by sending it a SIGUSR1 (<B CLASS="COMMAND" >kill -USR1 - <nmbd-pid></B + <nmbd-pid></B >) and lowered by sending it a SIGUSR2 (<B CLASS="COMMAND" ->kill -USR2 <nmbd-pid></B +>kill -USR2 <nmbd-pid></B >). This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level.</P diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html index 71503708752..c87d7d35db9 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmblookup</B -> [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] {name}</P +> [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] {name}</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" datagrams. The reason for this option is a bug in Windows 95 where it ignores the source port of the requesting packet and only replies to UDP port 137. Unfortunately, on most UNIX - systems root privilage is needed to bind to this port, and + systems root privilege is needed to bind to this port, and in addition, if the <A HREF="nmbd.8.html" TARGET="_top" @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" >Print a help (usage) message.</P ></DD ><DT ->-B <broadcast address></DT +>-B <broadcast address></DT ><DD ><P >Send the query to the given broadcast address. Without @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" </P ></DD ><DT ->-U <unicast address></DT +>-U <unicast address></DT ><DD ><P >Do a unicast query to the specified address or @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" query a WINS server.</P ></DD ><DT ->-d <debuglevel></DT +>-d <debuglevel></DT ><DD ><P >debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10.</P @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > file.</P ></DD ><DT ->-s <smb.conf></DT +>-s <smb.conf></DT ><DD ><P >This parameter specifies the pathname to @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ TARGET="_top" the Samba setup on the machine.</P ></DD ><DT ->-i <scope></DT +>-i <scope></DT ><DD ><P >This specifies a NetBIOS scope that @@ -256,9 +256,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes are - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->very</I + <EM +>very</EM > rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you communicate with.</P @@ -271,9 +270,8 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" lookup to be looked up via a reverse DNS lookup into a DNS name, and printed out before each</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->IP address .... NetBIOS name</I +><EM +>IP address .... NetBIOS name</EM ></P ><P > pair that is the normal output.</P @@ -285,7 +283,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" >This is the NetBIOS name being queried. Depending upon the previous options this may be a NetBIOS name or IP address. If a NetBIOS name then the different name types may be specified - by appending '#<type>' to the name. This name may also be + by appending '#<type>' to the name. This name may also be '*', which will return all registered names within a broadcast area.</P ></DD @@ -323,7 +321,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->nmblookup -U samba.org -R IRIX#1B'</B +>nmblookup -U samba.org -R 'IRIX#1B'</B ></P ><P >would query the WINS server samba.org for the domain diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/printer_driver2.html b/docs/htmldocs/printer_driver2.html index 34208f8feea..36a6ba6c9c6 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/printer_driver2.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/printer_driver2.html @@ -33,71 +33,89 @@ NAME="AEN3" ></H1 ><P >Beginning with the 2.2.0 release, Samba supports - the native Windows NT printing mechanisms implemented via - MS-RPC (i.e. the SPOOLSS named pipe). Previous versions of - Samba only supported LanMan printing calls.</P +the native Windows NT printing mechanisms implemented via +MS-RPC (i.e. the SPOOLSS named pipe). Previous versions of +Samba only supported LanMan printing calls.</P ><P >The additional functionality provided by the new - SPOOLSS support includes:</P +SPOOLSS support includes:</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P >Support for downloading printer driver - files to Windows 95/98/NT/2000 clients upon demand. - </P + files to Windows 95/98/NT/2000 clients upon demand. + </P ></LI ><LI ><P >Uploading of printer drivers via the - Windows NT Add Printer Wizard (APW) or the <A + Windows NT Add Printer Wizard (APW) or the + Imprints tool set (refer to <A HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net" TARGET="_top" ->Imprints tool set - </A -></P +>http://imprints.sourceforge.net</A +>). + </P ></LI ><LI ><P >Support for the native MS-RPC printing - calls such as StartDocPrinter, EnumJobs(), etc... (See - the <A + calls such as StartDocPrinter, EnumJobs(), etc... (See + the MSDN documentation at <A HREF="http://msdn.microsoft.com/" TARGET="_top" ->MSDN documentation - </A -> for more information on the Win32 printing API) - </P +>http://msdn.microsoft.com/</A +> + for more information on the Win32 printing API) + </P ></LI ><LI ><P >Support for NT Access Control Lists (ACL) - on printer objects</P + on printer objects</P ></LI ><LI ><P >Improved support for printer queue manipulation - through the use of an internal databases for spooled job - information</P + through the use of an internal databases for spooled job + information</P ></LI ></UL +><P +>There has been some initial confusion about what all this means +and whether or not it is a requirement for printer drivers to be +installed on a Samba host in order to support printing from Windows +clients. A bug existed in Samba 2.2.0 which made Windows NT/2000 clients +require that the Samba server possess a valid driver for the printer. +This is fixed in Samba 2.2.1 and once again, Windows NT/2000 clients +can use the local APW for installing drivers to be used with a Samba +served printer. This is the same behavior exhibited by Windows 9x clients. +As a side note, Samba does not use these drivers in any way to process +spooled files. They are utilized entirely by the clients.</P +><P +>The following MS KB article, may be of some help if you are dealing with +Windows 2000 clients: <I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>How to Add Printers with No User +Interaction in Windows 2000</I +></P +><P +><A +HREF="http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q189/1/05.ASP" +TARGET="_top" +>http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q189/1/05.ASP</A +></P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN20" +NAME="AEN25" >Configuration</A ></H1 -><P ->In order to support the uploading of printer driver - files, you must first configure a file share named [print$]. - The name of this share is hard coded in Samba's internals so - the name is very important (print$ is the service used by - Windows NT print servers to provide support for printer driver - download).</P ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" ><P @@ -110,70 +128,95 @@ WIDTH="100%" ><TD ALIGN="CENTER" ><B ->Warning</B +>[print$] vs. [printer$]</B ></TD ></TR ><TR ><TD ALIGN="LEFT" ><P ->Previous versions of Samba recommended using - a share named [printer$]. This name was taken from the - printer$ service created by Windows 9x clients when a - printer was shared. Windows 9x printer servers always have - a printer$ service which provides read-only access via no - password in order to support printer driver downloads.</P +>Previous versions of Samba recommended using a share named [printer$]. +This name was taken from the printer$ service created by Windows 9x +clients when a printer was shared. Windows 9x printer servers always have +a printer$ service which provides read-only access via no +password in order to support printer driver downloads.</P ><P >However, the initial implementation allowed for a - parameter named <TT +parameter named <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >printer driver location</I ></TT > - to be used on a per share basis to specify the location of - the driver files associated with that printer. Another - parameter named <TT +to be used on a per share basis to specify the location of +the driver files associated with that printer. Another +parameter named <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >printer driver</I ></TT > provided - a means of defining the printer driver name to be sent to - the client.</P +a means of defining the printer driver name to be sent to +the client.</P ><P >These parameters, including <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->printer driver - file</I +>printer driver +file</I ></TT > parameter, are being depreciated and should not - be used in new installations. For more information on this change, - you should refer to the <A +be used in new installations. For more information on this change, +you should refer to the <A HREF="#MIGRATION" ->Migration section - </A ->of this document.</P +>Migration section</A +> +of this document.</P ></TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN36" +>Creating [print$]</A +></H2 ><P ->You should modify the server's smb.conf file to create the - following file share (of course, some of the parameter values, - such as 'path' are arbitrary and should be replaced with - appropriate values for your site):</P +>In order to support the uploading of printer driver +files, you must first configure a file share named [print$]. +The name of this share is hard coded in Samba's internals so +the name is very important (print$ is the service used by +Windows NT print servers to provide support for printer driver +download).</P +><P +>You should modify the server's smb.conf file to add the global +parameters and to create the +following file share (of course, some of the parameter values, +such as 'path' are arbitrary and should be replaced with +appropriate values for your site):</P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->[print$] - path = /usr/local/samba/printers - guest ok = yes - browseable = yes - read only = yes - write list = ntadmin - </PRE +>[global] + ; members of the ntadmin group should be able + ; to add drivers and set printer properties + ; root is implicitly a 'printer admin' + printer admin = @ntadmin + +[print$] + path = /usr/local/samba/printers + guest ok = yes + browseable = yes + read only = yes + ; since this share is configured as read only, then we need + ; a 'write list'. Check the file system permissions to make + ; sure this account can copy files to the share. If this + ; is setup to a non-root account, then it should also exist + ; as a 'printer admin' + write list = @ntadmin,root</PRE ></P ><P >The <A @@ -182,70 +225,73 @@ TARGET="_top" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I -> write list</I +>write list</I ></TT ></A > is used to allow administrative - level user accounts to have write access in order to update files - on the share. See the <A +level user accounts to have write access in order to update files +on the share. See the <A HREF="smb./conf.5.html" TARGET="_top" -> smb.conf(5) man page</A -> for more information on - configuring file shares.</P +>smb.conf(5) +man page</A +> for more information on configuring file shares.</P ><P >The requirement for <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" TARGET="_top" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" -> guest ok = yes</B +>guest +ok = yes</B ></A > depends upon how your - site is configured. If users will be guaranteed to have - an account on the Samba host, then this is a non-issue.</P +site is configured. If users will be guaranteed to have +an account on the Samba host, then this is a non-issue.</P +><DIV +CLASS="NOTE" +><BLOCKQUOTE +CLASS="NOTE" ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->author's note: </I ->The non-issue is that - if all your Windows NT users are guarenteed to be authenticated - by the Samba server (such as a domain member server and the NT - user has already been validated by the Domain Controller in - order to logon to the Windows NT console), then guest access - is not necessary. Of course, in a workgroup environment where - you just want to be able to print without worrying about - silly accounts and security, then configure the share for - guest access. You'll probably want to add <A +><B +>Author's Note: </B +>The non-issue is that if all your Windows NT users are guaranteed to be +authenticated by the Samba server (such as a domain member server and the NT +user has already been validated by the Domain Controller in +order to logon to the Windows NT console), then guest access +is not necessary. Of course, in a workgroup environment where +you just want to be able to print without worrying about +silly accounts and security, then configure the share for +guest access. You'll probably want to add <A HREF="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST" TARGET="_top" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->map to guest = Bad User - </B +>map to guest = Bad User</B ></A > in the [global] section as well. Make sure - you understand what this parameter does before using it - though. --jerry]</P +you understand what this parameter does before using it +though. --jerry</P +></BLOCKQUOTE +></DIV ><P >In order for a Windows NT print server to support - the downloading of driver files by multiple client architectures, - it must create subdirectories within the [print$] service - which correspond to each of the supported client architectures. - Samba follows this model as well.</P +the downloading of driver files by multiple client architectures, +it must create subdirectories within the [print$] service +which correspond to each of the supported client architectures. +Samba follows this model as well.</P ><P >Next create the directory tree below the [print$] share - for each architecture you wish to support.</P +for each architecture you wish to support.</P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> [print$]----- - |-W32X86 ; "Windows NT x86" - |-WIN40 ; "Windows 95/98" - |-W32ALPHA ; "Windows NT Alpha_AXP" - |-W32MIPS ; "Windows NT R4000" - |-W32PPC ; "Windows NT PowerPC" - </PRE +>[print$]----- + |-W32X86 ; "Windows NT x86" + |-WIN40 ; "Windows 95/98" + |-W32ALPHA ; "Windows NT Alpha_AXP" + |-W32MIPS ; "Windows NT R4000" + |-W32PPC ; "Windows NT PowerPC"</PRE ></P ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" @@ -259,38 +305,34 @@ WIDTH="100%" ><TD ALIGN="CENTER" ><B ->Warning</B +>ATTENTION! REQUIRED PERMISSIONS</B ></TD ></TR ><TR ><TD ALIGN="LEFT" ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->ATTENTION! REQUIRED PERMISSIONS</I -></P -><P >In order to currently add a new driver to you Samba host, - one of two conditions must hold true:</P +one of two conditions must hold true:</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P >The account used to connect to the Samba host - must have a uid of 0 (i.e. a root account)</P + must have a uid of 0 (i.e. a root account)</P ></LI ><LI ><P >The account used to connect to the Samba host - must be a member of the <A -HREF="smb.conf.5.html" + must be a member of the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERADMIN" TARGET="_top" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I -> printer admin</I +>printer + admin</I ></TT ></A > list.</P @@ -298,97 +340,128 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></UL ><P >Of course, the connected account must still possess access - to add files to the subdirectories beneath [print$].</P +to add files to the subdirectories beneath [print$]. Remember +that all file shares are set to 'read only' by default.</P ></TD ></TR ></TABLE ></DIV ><P >Once you have created the required [print$] service and - associated subdirectories, simply log onto the Samba server using - a root (or <TT +associated subdirectories, simply log onto the Samba server using +a root (or <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >printer admin</I ></TT >) account - from a Windows NT 4.0 client. Navigate to the "Printers" folder - on the Samba server. You should see an initial listing of printers - that matches the printer shares defined on your Samba host.</P +from a Windows NT 4.0 client. Navigate to the "Printers" folder +on the Samba server. You should see an initial listing of printers +that matches the printer shares defined on your Samba host.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN71" +>Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A +></H2 ><P >The initial listing of printers in the Samba host's - Printers folder will have no printer driver assigned to them. - The way assign a driver to a printer is to view the Properties - of the printer and either</P +Printers folder will have no real printer driver assigned +to them. By default, in Samba 2.2.0 this driver name was set to +<I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>NO PRINTER DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER</I +>. +Later versions changed this to a NULL string to allow the use +tof the local Add Printer Wizard on NT/2000 clients. +Attempting to view the printer properties for a printer +which has this default driver assigned will result in +the error message:</P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Device settings cannot be displayed. The driver +for the specified printer is not installed, only spooler +properties will be displayed. Do you want to install the +driver now?</I +></P +><P +>Click "No" in the error dialog and you will be presented with +the printer properties window. The way assign a driver to a +printer is to either</P ><P ></P ><UL ><LI ><P >Use the "New Driver..." button to install - a new printer driver, or</P + a new printer driver, or</P ></LI ><LI ><P >Select a driver from the popup list of - installed drivers. Initially this list will be empty.</P + installed drivers. Initially this list will be empty.</P ></LI ></UL ><P >If you wish to install printer drivers for client - operating systems other than "Windows NT x86", you will need - to use the "Sharing" tab of the printer properties dialog.</P +operating systems other than "Windows NT x86", you will need +to use the "Sharing" tab of the printer properties dialog.</P ><P >Assuming you have connected with a root account, you - will also be able modify other printer properties such as - ACLs and device settings using this dialog box.</P +will also be able modify other printer properties such as +ACLs and device settings using this dialog box.</P ><P >A few closing comments for this section, it is possible - on a Windows NT print server to have printers - listed in the Printers folder which are not shared. Samba does - not make this distinction. By definition, the only printers of - which Samba is aware are those which are specified as shares in - <TT +on a Windows NT print server to have printers +listed in the Printers folder which are not shared. Samba does +not make this distinction. By definition, the only printers of +which Samba is aware are those which are specified as shares in +<TT CLASS="FILENAME" >smb.conf</TT >.</P ><P >Another interesting side note is that Windows NT clients do - not use the SMB printer share, but rather can print directly - to any printer on another Windows NT host using MS-RPC. This - of course assumes that the printing client has the necessary - privileges on the remote host serving the printer. The default - permissions assigned by Windows NT to a printer gives the "Print" - permissions to the "Everyone" well-known group.</P +not use the SMB printer share, but rather can print directly +to any printer on another Windows NT host using MS-RPC. This +of course assumes that the printing client has the necessary +privileges on the remote host serving the printer. The default +permissions assigned by Windows NT to a printer gives the "Print" +permissions to the "Everyone" well-known group.</P +></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN74" +NAME="AEN88" >Support a large number of printers</A ></H2 ><P >One issue that has arisen during the development - phase of Samba 2.2 is the need to support driver downloads for - 100's of printers. Using the Windows NT APW is somewhat - awkward to say the list. If more than one printer are using the - same driver, the <A +phase of Samba 2.2 is the need to support driver downloads for +100's of printers. Using the Windows NT APW is somewhat +awkward to say the list. If more than one printer are using the +same driver, the <A HREF="rpcclient.1.html" TARGET="_top" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >rpcclient's - setdriver command</B +setdriver command</B ></A > can be used to set the driver - associated with an installed driver. The following is example - of how this could be accomplished:</P +associated with an installed driver. The following is example +of how this could be accomplished:</P ><P ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > - <TT +<TT CLASS="PROMPT" >$ </TT >rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "enumdrivers" @@ -396,44 +469,185 @@ Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3] [Windows NT x86] Printer Driver Info 1: - Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS] + Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS] Printer Driver Info 1: - Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 2100 Series PS] + Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 2100 Series PS] Printer Driver Info 1: - Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4Si/4SiMX PS] + Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4Si/4SiMX PS] - <TT +<TT CLASS="PROMPT" >$ </TT >rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "enumprinters" Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3] - flags:[0x800000] - name:[\\POGO\hp-print] - description:[POGO\\POGO\hp-print,NO DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER,] - comment:[] + flags:[0x800000] + name:[\\POGO\hp-print] + description:[POGO\\POGO\hp-print,NO DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER,] + comment:[] - <TT +<TT CLASS="PROMPT" >$ </TT ->rpcclient pogo -U root%bleaK.er \ - <TT +>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret \ +<TT CLASS="PROMPT" >> </TT > -c "setdriver hp-print \"HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS\"" Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3] -Succesfully set hp-print to driver HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS. - </PRE +Successfully set hp-print to driver HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS.</PRE ></P ></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN99" +>Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A +></H2 +><P +>By default, Samba offers all printer shares defined in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> +in the "Printers..." folder. Also existing in this folder is the Windows NT +Add Printer Wizard icon. The APW will be show only if</P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +>The connected user is able to successfully + execute an OpenPrinterEx(\\server) with administrative + privileges (i.e. root or <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printer admin</I +></TT +>). + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>show + add printer wizard = yes</I +></TT +></A +> (the default). + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +>In order to be able to use the APW to successfully add a printer to a Samba +server, the <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add +printer command</I +></TT +></A +> must have a defined value. The program +hook must successfully add the printer to the system (i.e. +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/printcap</TT +> or appropriate files) and +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> if necessary.</P +><P +>When using the APW from a client, if the named printer share does +not exist, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will execute the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add printer +command</I +></TT +> and reparse to the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> +to attempt to locate the new printer share. If the share is still not defined, +an error of "Access Denied" is returned to the client. Note that the +<TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add printer program</I +></TT +> is executed under the context +of the connected user, not necessarily a root account.</P +><P +>There is a complementing <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete +printer command</I +></TT +></A +> for removing entries from the "Printers..." +folder.</P +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="SECT2" +><HR><H2 +CLASS="SECT2" +><A +NAME="AEN124" +>Samba and Printer Ports</A +></H2 +><P +>Windows NT/2000 print servers associate a port with each printer. These normally +take the form of LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:, etc... Samba must also support the +concept of ports associated with a printer. By default, only one printer port, +named "Samba Printer Port", exists on a system. Samba does not really a port in +order to print, rather it is a requirement of Windows clients. </P +><P +>Note that Samba does not support the concept of "Printer Pooling" internally +either. This is when a logical printer is assigned to multiple ports as +a form of load balancing or fail over.</P +><P +>If you require that multiple ports be defined for some reason, +<TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> possesses a <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENUMPORTSCOMMAND" +TARGET="_top" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>enumports +command</I +></TT +></A +> which can be used to define an external program +that generates a listing of ports on a system.</P +></DIV ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN85" +NAME="AEN132" >The Imprints Toolset</A ></H1 ><P @@ -451,7 +665,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN89" +NAME="AEN136" >What is Imprints?</A ></H2 ><P @@ -483,7 +697,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN99" +NAME="AEN146" >Creating Printer Driver Packages</A ></H2 ><P @@ -499,7 +713,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN102" +NAME="AEN149" >The Imprints server</A ></H2 ><P @@ -520,7 +734,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><HR><H2 CLASS="SECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN106" +NAME="AEN153" >The Installation Client</A ></H2 ><P @@ -565,24 +779,23 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > - foreach (supported architecture for a given driver) - { - 1. rpcclient: Get the appropriate upload directory - on the remote server - 2. smbclient: Upload the driver files - 3. rpcclient: Issues an AddPrinterDriver() MS-RPC - } +foreach (supported architecture for a given driver) +{ + 1. rpcclient: Get the appropriate upload directory + on the remote server + 2. smbclient: Upload the driver files + 3. rpcclient: Issues an AddPrinterDriver() MS-RPC +} - 4. rpcclient: Issue an AddPrinterEx() MS-RPC to actually - create the printer - </PRE +4. rpcclient: Issue an AddPrinterEx() MS-RPC to actually + create the printer</PRE ></P ><P >One of the problems encountered when implementing the Imprints tool set was the name space issues between various supported client architectures. For example, Windows NT includes a driver named "Apple LaserWriter II NTX v51.8" - and Windows 95 callsits version of this driver "Apple + and Windows 95 calls its version of this driver "Apple LaserWriter II NTX"</P ><P >The problem is how to know what client drivers have @@ -598,7 +811,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ></P ><P >will reveal that Windows NT always uses the NT driver - name. The is ok as Windows NT always requires that at least + name. This is ok as Windows NT always requires that at least the Windows NT version of the printer driver is present. However, Samba does not have the requirement internally. Therefore, how can you use the NT driver name if is has not @@ -615,18 +828,61 @@ CLASS="SECT1" ><HR><H1 CLASS="SECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN128" +NAME="AEN175" ><A NAME="MIGRATION" ></A ->Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to - 2.2.x</A +>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to 2.2.x</A ></H1 ><P ->Given that printer driver management has changed - (we hope improved :) ) in 2.2.0 over prior releases, - migration from an existing setup to 2.2.0 can follow - several paths.</P +>Given that printer driver management has changed (we hope improved) in +2.2 over prior releases, migration from an existing setup to 2.2 can +follow several paths.</P +><P +>Windows clients have a tendency to remember things for quite a while. +For example, if a Windows NT client has attached to a Samba 2.0 server, +it will remember the server as a LanMan printer server. Upgrading +the Samba host to 2.2 makes support for MSRPC printing possible, but +the NT client will still remember the previous setting.</P +><P +>In order to give an NT client printing "amnesia" (only necessary if you +want to use the newer MSRPC printing functionality in Samba), delete +the registry keys associated with the print server contained in +<TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>[HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print]</TT +>. The +spooler service on the client should be stopped prior to doing this:</P +><P +><TT +CLASS="PROMPT" +>C:\WINNT\ ></TT +> <TT +CLASS="USERINPUT" +><B +>net stop spooler</B +></TT +></P +><P +><I +CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>All the normal disclaimers about editing the registry go +here.</I +> Be careful, and know what you are doing.</P +><P +>The spooler service should be restarted after you have finished +removing the appropriate registry entries by replacing the +<B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>stop</B +> command above with <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>start</B +>.</P +><P +>Windows 9x clients will continue to use LanMan printing calls +with a 2.2 Samba server so there is no need to perform any of these +modifications on non-NT clients.</P ><DIV CLASS="WARNING" ><P @@ -639,16 +895,15 @@ WIDTH="100%" ><TD ALIGN="CENTER" ><B ->Warning</B +>Achtung!</B ></TD ></TR ><TR ><TD ALIGN="LEFT" ><P ->The following smb.conf parameters are considered to be - depreciated and will be removed soon. Do not use them - in new installations</P +>The following smb.conf parameters are considered to be depreciated and will +be removed soon. Do not use them in new installations</P ><P ></P ><UL @@ -660,7 +915,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >printer driver file (G)</I ></TT > - </P + </P ></LI ><LI ><P @@ -670,7 +925,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >printer driver (S)</I ></TT > - </P + </P ></LI ><LI ><P @@ -680,7 +935,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >printer driver location (S)</I ></TT > - </P + </P ></LI ></UL ></TD @@ -695,46 +950,54 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P >If you do not desire the new Windows NT - print driver support, nothing needs to be done. - All existing parameters work the same.</P + print driver support, nothing needs to be done. + All existing parameters work the same.</P ></LI ><LI ><P >If you want to take advantage of NT printer - driver support but do not want to migrate the - 9x drivers to the new setup, the leave the existing - printers.def file. When smbd attempts to locate a - 9x driver for the printer in the TDB and fails it - will drop down to using the printers.def (and all - associated parameters). The <B + driver support but do not want to migrate the + 9x drivers to the new setup, the leave the existing + printers.def file. When smbd attempts to locate a + 9x driver for the printer in the TDB and fails it + will drop down to using the printers.def (and all + associated parameters). The <B CLASS="COMMAND" >make_printerdef</B > - tool will also remain for backwards compatibility but will - be moved to the "this tool is the old way of doing it" - pile.</P + tool will also remain for backwards compatibility but will + be moved to the "this tool is the old way of doing it" + pile.</P ></LI ><LI ><P >If you install a Windows 9x driver for a printer - on your Samba host (in the printing TDB), this information will - take precedence and the three old printing parameters - will be ignored (including print driver location).</P + on your Samba host (in the printing TDB), this information will + take precedence and the three old printing parameters + will be ignored (including print driver location).</P ></LI ><LI ><P >If you want to migrate an existing <TT CLASS="FILENAME" -> printers.def</TT -> file into the new setup, the current only - solution is to use the Windows NT APW to install the NT drivers - and the 9x drivers. This can be scripted using smbclient and - rpcclient. See the <A +>printers.def</TT +> + file into the new setup, the current only solution is to use the Windows + NT APW to install the NT drivers and the 9x drivers. This can be scripted + using <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient</B +> and <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>rpcclient</B +>. See the + Imprints installation client at <A HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net/" TARGET="_top" -> Imprints insrallation client</A -> for an example. - </P +>http://imprints.sourceforge.net/</A +> + for an example. + </P ></LI ></UL ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html index 0242f7b8270..53a0ea98dd2 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >rpcclient</B -> {server} [-A authfile] [-c <command string>] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logfile] [-N] [-s <smb config file>] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N]</P +> {server} [-A authfile] [-c <command string>] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logfile] [-N] [-s <smb config file>] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -104,12 +104,21 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" password used in the connection. The format of the file is </P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> username = <value> - password = <value> - domain = <value> +> username = <value> + password = <value> + domain = <value> </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict @@ -128,7 +137,10 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ><P >set the debuglevel. Debug level 0 is the lowest and 100 being the highest. This should be set to 100 if you are - planning on submitting a bug report to the Samba team (see BUGS.txt). + planning on submitting a bug report to the Samba team (see <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>BUGS.txt</TT +>). </P ></DD ><DT @@ -142,8 +154,12 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >-l logbasename</DT ><DD ><P ->File name for log/debug files. .client will be - appended. The log file is never removed by the client. +>File name for log/debug files. The extension + <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>'.client'</TT +> will be appended. The log file is never removed + by the client. </P ></DD ><DT @@ -189,7 +205,7 @@ CLASS="ENVAR" <TT CLASS="ENVAR" >LOGNAME</TT -> variable and if either exist, the +> variable and if either exists, the string is uppercased. If these environmental variables are not found, the username <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" @@ -226,14 +242,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DD ><P >Set the SMB domain of the username. This - overrides the default domain which is the domain of the - server specified with the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->-S</I -></TT -> option. - If the domain specified is the same as the server's NetBIOS name, + overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in + smb.conf. If the domain specified is the same as the server's NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the server's local SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM). </P ></DD @@ -243,14 +253,13 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN91" +NAME="AEN92" ></A ><H2 >COMMANDS</H2 ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->LSARPC</I +><EM +>LSARPC</EM ></P ><P ></P @@ -267,14 +276,18 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >lookupsids</B -></P +> - Resolve a list + of SIDs to usernames. + </P ></LI ><LI ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >lookupnames</B -></P +> - Resolve s list + of usernames to SIDs. + </P ></LI ><LI ><P @@ -287,9 +300,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P > </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->SAMR</I +><EM +>SAMR</EM ></P ><P ></P @@ -322,13 +334,40 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >querygroupmem</B ></P ></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>queryaliasmem</B +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>querydispinfo</B +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>querydominfo</B +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>enumdomgroups</B +></P +></LI ></UL ><P > </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->SPOOLSS</I +><EM +>SPOOLSS</EM ></P ><P ></P @@ -337,7 +376,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->adddriver <arch> <config></B +>adddriver <arch> <config></B > - Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver information on the server. Note that the driver files should @@ -364,6 +403,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > parameter is defined as follows: </P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > Long Printer Name:\ @@ -375,6 +420,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" Default Data Type:\ Comma Separated list of Files </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Any empty fields should be enter as the string "NULL". </P @@ -390,8 +438,8 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->addprinter <printername> - <sharename> <drivername> <port></B +>addprinter <printername> + <sharename> <drivername> <port></B > - Add a printer on the remote server. This printer will be automatically shared. Be aware that the printer driver @@ -414,6 +462,17 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" +>deldriver</B +> - Delete the + specified printer driver for all architectures. This + does not delete the actual driver files from the server, + only the entry from the server's list of drivers. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" >enumdata</B > - Enumerate all printer setting data stored on the server. On Windows NT clients, @@ -426,7 +485,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->enumjobs <printer></B +>enumjobs <printer></B > - List the jobs and status of a given printer. This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK EnumJobs() @@ -468,7 +527,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->getdata <printername></B +>getdata <printername></B > - Retrieve the data for a given printer setting. See the <B @@ -482,7 +541,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->getdriver <printername></B +>getdriver <printername></B > - Retrieve the printer driver information (such as driver file, config file, dependent files, etc...) for @@ -494,7 +553,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->getdriverdir <arch></B +>getdriverdir <arch></B > - Execute a GetPrinterDriverDirectory() RPC to retreive the SMB share name and subdirectory for @@ -512,7 +571,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->getprinter <printername></B +>getprinter <printername></B > - Retrieve the current printer information. This command corresponds to the GetPrinter() MS Platform SDK function. @@ -522,7 +581,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->openprinter <printername></B +>openprinter <printername></B > - Execute an OpenPrinterEx() and ClosePrinter() RPC against a given printer. </P @@ -531,7 +590,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->setdriver <printername> <drivername></B +>setdriver <printername> <drivername></B > - Execute a SetPrinter() command to update the printer driver associated with an installed printer. The printer driver must already be correctly @@ -549,9 +608,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></LI ></UL ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->GENERAL OPTIONS</I +><EM +>GENERAL OPTIONS</EM ></P ><P ></P @@ -589,7 +647,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN196" +NAME="AEN212" ></A ><H2 >BUGS</H2 @@ -604,15 +662,14 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P >From Luke Leighton's original rpcclient man page:</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->"WARNING!</I +><EM +>"WARNING!</EM > The MSRPC over SMB code has been developed from examining Network traces. No documentation is available from the original creators (Microsoft) on how MSRPC over SMB works, or how the individual MSRPC services work. Microsoft's implementation of these services has been demonstrated (and reported) - to be... a bit flakey in places. </P + to be... a bit flaky in places. </P ><P >The development of Samba's implementation is also a bit rough, and as more of the services are understood, it can even result in @@ -631,7 +688,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN206" +NAME="AEN222" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 @@ -642,7 +699,7 @@ NAME="AEN206" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN209" +NAME="AEN225" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 @@ -653,7 +710,7 @@ NAME="AEN209" to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</P ><P >The original rpcclient man page was written by Matthew - Geddes, Luke Kenneth Casson, and rewriten by Gerald Carter. + Geddes, Luke Kenneth Casson Leighton, and rewritten by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter.</P ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc-faq.html b/docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc-faq.html index 058a5d5f518..d9c204bf1b5 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc-faq.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc-faq.html @@ -45,9 +45,9 @@ NAME="AEN12" ></H1 ><P > This is the FAQ for Samba 2.2 as an NTDomain controller. - This document is derived from the origional FAQ that was built and + This document is derived from the original FAQ that was built and maintained by Gerald Carter from the early days of Samba NTDomain development - up until recently. It is now being updated as significent changes are + up until recently. It is now being updated as significant changes are made to 2.2.0. </P ><P @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ HREF="#AEN103" ><A HREF="#AEN110" >"The machine account for this computer either does not -exist or is not accessable."</A +exist or is not accessible."</A ></DT ><DT ><A @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ HREF="#AEN180" ><DT ><A HREF="#AEN182" ->What are 'Policies' ?.</A +>What are 'Policies' ?</A ></DT ><DT ><A @@ -314,12 +314,12 @@ HREF="#AEN248" ><A HREF="#AEN250" >What editor can I use in DOS/Windows that won't -mess with my unix EOF</A +mess with my unix EOF ?</A ></DT ><DT ><A HREF="#AEN263" ->How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager'</A +>How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager' ?</A ></DT ><DT ><A @@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ HREF="#AEN282" ><DT ><A HREF="#AEN286" ->How do I get my samba server to become a member ( not PDC ) of an NT domain?</A +>How do I get my samba server to become a member ( not PDC ) of an NT domain ?</A ></DT ></DL ></DD @@ -358,13 +358,13 @@ HREF="#AEN292" ><A HREF="#AEN294" >What are some diagnostics tools I can use to debug the domain logon process and where can I - find them?</A + find them ?</A ></DT ><DT ><A HREF="#AEN309" >How do I install 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation -or a Windows 9x box?</A +or a Windows 9x box ?</A ></DT ></DL ></DD @@ -419,13 +419,13 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > dialog will let you reset the smbpasswd. That is you don't need to do it from the unix box. However, at the present, you do need to have root as an - administrator and use the root user name and password.</P + administrator and use the root username and password.</P ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >Policies</B > do work on a W2K machine. MS says that recent - builds of W2K dont observe an NT policy but it appears it does in 'legacy' + builds of W2K don't observe an NT policy but it appears it does in 'legacy' mode.</P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ NAME="AEN27" >Introduction</A ></H1 ><P -> This FAQ was origionally compiled by Jerry Carter (gc) chiefly dealing +> This FAQ was originally compiled by Jerry Carter (gc) chiefly dealing with the 'old HEAD' version of Samba and its NTDomain facilities. It is being rewritten by David Bannon (drb) so that it addresses more accurately the Samba 2.2.x release. @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ TARGET="_top" </P ><P >Hopefully, as we all become familiar with the Samba 2.2 as a - PDC this document will become much more usefull.</P + PDC this document will become much more useful.</P ></DIV ></DIV ><DIV @@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ NAME="AEN37" ></LI ></UL ><P -> These things are note expected to work in the forseeable future: +> These things are not expected to work in the foreseeable future: </P ><P ></P @@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ controlled domain?</A ></H2 ><P > The 2.2 release branch of Samba supports Windows 2000 domain - clients in legacy mode, ie as if the PDC is a NTServer, not a + clients in legacy mode, i.e. as if the PDC is a NTServer, not a W2K server. </P ></DIV @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ NAME="AEN65" >CVS</A ></H1 ><P -> CVS is a programme (publically available) that the Samba developers +> CVS is a program (publicly available) that the Samba developers use to maintain the central source code. Non developers can get access to the source in a read only capacity. Many flavours of unix now arrive with cvs installed.</P @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ><P >Samba 3.0 ? This code boasts all the main development work in Samba. Due to its developmental - nature, its not really suitable for production work. + nature, it's not really suitable for production work. </P ></DD ><DT @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ controlled Domain?</A HREF="samba-pdc-howto.html" TARGET="_top" >HOWTO</A -> accessable from the samba web +> accessible from the samba web site under 'Documentation'. Read it. </P ></DIV @@ -734,11 +734,11 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><A NAME="AEN110" >"The machine account for this computer either does not -exist or is not accessable."</A +exist or is not accessible."</A ></H2 ><P > When I try to join the domain I get the message "The machine account - for this computer either does not exist or is not accessable". Whats + for this computer either does not exist or is not accessible". Whats wrong ? </P ><P @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" path to the <B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbpasswd</B -> programme, do this : +> program, do this : </P ><P > <B @@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" </P ><P > The entry will be created with a well known password, so any machine that - says its doppy could join the domain as long as it gets in first. So + says it's doppy could join the domain as long as it gets in first. So don't create the accounts any earlier than you need them. </P ></DIV @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ when creating a machine account.</A ><P > This happens if you try to create a machine account from the machine itself and use a user name that does not work (for whatever - reason) and then try another (possibly valid) user name. + reason) and then try another (possibly valid) username. Exit out of the network applet to close the initial connection and try again. </P @@ -891,7 +891,7 @@ NAME="AEN143" ><P >I joined the domain successfully but after upgrading to a newer version of the Samba code I get the message, "The system - can not log you on (C000019B), Please try a gain or consult your + can not log you on (C000019B), Please try again or consult your system administrator" when attempting to logon. </P ><P @@ -1029,14 +1029,14 @@ HREF="#AEN278" > </P ><P -> Make sure that the "logon path" is writeable by the user and make sure +> Make sure that the "logon path" is writable by the user and make sure that the connection to the logon path location is by the current user. - Sometimes Windows client do not drop the connection immediately upon + Sometimes Windows clients do not drop the connection immediately upon logoff. </P ><P > Some people have reported that the logon path location should - also be browseable. I (GC) have yet to emperically verify this, + also be browseable. I (GC) have yet to empirically verify this, but you can try.</P ></DIV ></DIV @@ -1054,13 +1054,13 @@ CLASS="SECT2" CLASS="SECT2" ><A NAME="AEN182" ->What are 'Policies' ?.</A +>What are 'Policies' ?</A ></H2 ><P > When a user logs onto the domain via a client machine, the PDC sends the client machine a list of things contained in the 'policy' (if it exists). This list may do things like suppress - a splach screen, format the dates the way you like them or perhaps + a splash screen, format the dates the way you like them or perhaps remove locally stored profiles. </P ><P @@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >ntconfig.pol</TT > and located in the [netlogon] share. The file is created with a policy editor and must be readable - by anyone and writeable by only root. See <A + by anyone and writable by only root. See <A HREF="#AEN203" > below</A > for how to get a suitable editor. @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ></P ><P > A policy file must be in the [netlogon] share and must be - readable by everyone and writeable by only root. The file + readable by everyone and writable by only root. The file must be created by an NTServer <A HREF="#AEN203" >Policy @@ -1170,7 +1170,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" >. Further, although the Windows 95 Policy Editor can be installed on an NT Workstation/Server, it will not - work with NT policies because the registry key that are set by the policy templates. + work with NT policies because of the registry keys that are set by the policy templates. However, the files from the NT Server will run happily enough on an NTws. You need <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -1192,7 +1192,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" <B CLASS="COMMAND" >servicepackname /x</B ->, ie thats <B +>, i.e. that's <B CLASS="COMMAND" >Nt4sp6ai.exe /x</B @@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >poledt.exe</B > and the associated template files (*.adm) should - be extracted as well. It is also possible to downloaded the policy template + be extracted as well. It is also possible to download the policy template files for Office97 and get a copy of the policy editor. Another possible location is with the Zero Administration Kit available for download from Microsoft. </P @@ -1261,7 +1261,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/shadow</TT >). - In lots of situations thats OK, for example : + In lots of situations that's OK, for example : </P ><P ></P @@ -1278,10 +1278,10 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ></LI ></UL ><P -> But sometimes you really do need to maintain two seperate password +> But sometimes you really do need to maintain two separate password databases and there are good reasons to keep then in sync. Trying to explain to users that they need to change their passwords in two - seperate places or use two seperate passwords is not fun. + separate places or use two separate passwords is not fun. </P ><P > However do understand that setting up password sync is not without @@ -1358,11 +1358,11 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><A NAME="AEN250" >What editor can I use in DOS/Windows that won't -mess with my unix EOF</A +mess with my unix EOF ?</A ></H2 ><P >There are a number of Windows or DOS based editors that will - understand, and leave intact, the unix eof (as opposed to a DOS CL/LF). + understand, and leave intact, the unix eof (as opposed to a DOS CR/LF). List members suggested : </P ><P @@ -1390,7 +1390,7 @@ TARGET="_top" HREF="http://www.lancs.ac.uk/people/cpaap/pfe/" TARGET="_top" > www.lancs.ac.uk/people/cpaap/pfe/</A -> but its no longer being developed...</P +> but it's no longer being developed...</P ></LI ></UL ></DIV @@ -1400,7 +1400,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" CLASS="SECT2" ><A NAME="AEN263" ->How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager'</A +>How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager' ?</A ></H2 ><P > Since I don't need to buy an NT Server CD now, how do I get @@ -1409,7 +1409,7 @@ NAME="AEN263" ><P > Microsoft distributes a version of these tools called nexus for installation on Windows 95 systems. The - tools set includes + tool set includes </P ><P ></P @@ -1482,7 +1482,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" CLASS="SECT2" ><A NAME="AEN286" ->How do I get my samba server to become a member ( not PDC ) of an NT domain?</A +>How do I get my samba server to become a member ( not PDC ) of an NT domain ?</A ></H2 ><P > Please refer to the <A @@ -1517,11 +1517,11 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><A NAME="AEN294" >What are some diagnostics tools I can use to debug the domain logon process and where can I - find them?</A + find them ?</A ></H2 ><P > One of the best diagnostic tools for debugging problems is Samba itself. - You can use the -d option for both smbd and nmbd to specifiy what + You can use the -d option for both smbd and nmbd to specify what 'debug level' at which to run. See the man pages on smbd, nmbd and smb.conf for more information on debugging options. The debug level can range from 1 (the default) to 10 (100 for debugging passwords). @@ -1532,19 +1532,19 @@ NAME="AEN294" CLASS="COMMAND" >gcc -g </B > flag. This will include debug - information in the binaries and allow you to attch gdb to the + information in the binaries and allow you to attach gdb to the running smbd / nmbd process. In order to attach gdb to an smbd process for an NT workstation, first get the workstation to make the - connection. Pressing ctrl-alt-delete and going down to the domain box + connection. Pressing Ctrl-Alt-Del and going down to the domain box is sufficient (at least, on the first time you join the domain) to generate a 'LsaEnumTrustedDomains'. Thereafter, the workstation maintains an open connection, and therefore there will be an smbd process running (assuming that you haven't set a really short smbd - idle timeout) So, in between pressing ctrl alt delete, and actually + idle timeout) So, in between pressing Ctrl-Alt-Del, and actually typing in your password, you can gdb attach and continue. </P ><P -> Some usefull samba commands worth investigating: +> Some useful samba commands worth investigating: </P ><P ></P @@ -1563,7 +1563,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" <A HREF="http://www.tcpdump.org/" TARGET="_top" ->http://www.tcpdup.org/</A +>http://www.tcpdump.org/</A >. Ethereal, another good packet sniffer for UNIX and Win32 hosts, can be downloaded from <A @@ -1573,11 +1573,11 @@ TARGET="_top" >. </P ><P -> For tracing things on the Microsoft Windows NT, Network Monitor +> For tracing things on Microsoft Windows NT, Network Monitor (aka. netmon) is available on the Microsoft Developer Network CD's, the Windows NT Server install CD and the SMS CD's. The version of netmon that ships with SMS allows for dumping packets between any two - computers (ie. placing the network interface in promiscuous mode). + computers (i.e. placing the network interface in promiscuous mode). The version on the NT Server install CD will only allow monitoring of network traffic directed to the local NT box and broadcasts on the local subnet. Be aware that Ethereal can read and write netmon @@ -1591,7 +1591,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2" ><A NAME="AEN309" >How do I install 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation -or a Windows 9x box?</A +or a Windows 9x box ?</A ></H2 ><P > Installing netmon on an NT workstation requires a couple @@ -1732,13 +1732,13 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ></LI ><LI ><P -> Ignacio Coupeau has a very comprehesive look at LDAP with Samba at +> Ignacio Coupeau has a very comprehensive look at LDAP with Samba at <A HREF="http://www.unav.es/cti/ldap-smb-howto.html" TARGET="_top" > http://www.unav.es/cti/ldap-smb-howto.html</A > - Be a little carefull however, I suspect that it does not specificly + Be a little careful however, I suspect that it does not specifically address samba 2.2.x. The HEAD pre-2.1 may possibly be the best stream to look at.</P ></LI @@ -1754,7 +1754,7 @@ HREF="http://www.kneschke.de/projekte/samba_tng" TARGET="_top" > http://www.kneschke.de/projekte/samba_tng</A >, but again, a - lot of it does not apply to the main stream Samba.</P + lot of it does not apply to the mainstream Samba.</P ></LI ><LI ><P @@ -1839,7 +1839,7 @@ TARGET="_top" >http://www.samba-tng.org/</A > It has been requested that you don't post questions about Samba-TNG to the - main stream Samba lists.</P + mainstream Samba lists.</P ><P ></P ><P @@ -1872,18 +1872,18 @@ TARGET="_top" > Try and make your question clear and brief, lots of long, convoluted questions get deleted before they are completely read ! Don't post html encoded messages (if you can select colour or font - size its html).</P + size it's html).</P ></LI ><LI ><P -> If you run one of those niffy 'I'm on holidays' things when +> If you run one of those nifty 'I'm on holidays' things when you are away, make sure its configured to not answer mailing lists. </P ></LI ><LI ><P > Don't cross post. Work out which is the best list to post to - and see what happens, ie don't post to both samba-ntdom and samba-technical. + and see what happens, i.e. don't post to both samba-ntdom and samba-technical. Many people active on the lists subscribe to more than one list and get annoyed to see the same message two or more times. Often someone will see a message and thinking it would be better dealt @@ -1943,7 +1943,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ></P ><P > Please don't post messages to the list asking to be removed, you will just - be refered to the above address (unless that process failed in some way...) + be referred to the above address (unless that process failed in some way...) </P ></DIV ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html index 7c4ff0b3658..963935a3c88 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html @@ -123,9 +123,8 @@ NAME="AEN28" ><P >There are three special sections, [global], [homes] and [printers], which are - described under <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->special sections</I + described under <EM +>special sections</EM >. The following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions.</P ><P @@ -139,14 +138,12 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" printable services (used by the client to access print services on the host running the server).</P ><P ->Sections may be designated <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->guest</I +>Sections may be designated <EM +>guest</EM > services, in which case no password is required to access them. A specified - UNIX <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->guest account</I + UNIX <EM +>guest account</EM > is used to define access privileges in this case.</P ><P @@ -168,6 +165,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >/home/bar</TT >. The share is accessed via the share name "foo":</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="SCREEN" > <TT @@ -178,16 +181,24 @@ CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" </TT > </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ><P >The following sample section defines a printable share. The share is readonly, but printable. That is, the only write access permitted is via calls to open, write to and close a - spool file. The <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->guest ok</I + spool file. The <EM +>guest ok</EM > parameter means access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified elsewhere):</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="SCREEN" > <TT @@ -200,6 +211,9 @@ CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" </TT > </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -257,9 +271,8 @@ NAME="AEN53" ></LI ></UL ><P ->If you decide to use a <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->path=</I +>If you decide to use a <EM +>path=</EM > line in your [homes] section then you may find it useful to use the %S macro. For example :</P @@ -288,6 +301,12 @@ CLASS="USERINPUT" a normal service section can specify, though some make more sense than others. The following is a typical and suitable [homes] section:</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="SCREEN" > <TT @@ -297,23 +316,23 @@ CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" </TT > </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ><P >An important point is that if guest access is specified in the [homes] section, all home directories will be - visible to all clients <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->without a password</I + visible to all clients <EM +>without a password</EM >. In the very unlikely event that this is actually desirable, it - would be wise to also specify <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" + would be wise to also specify <EM >read only - access</I + access</EM >.</P ><P ->Note that the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->browseable</I +>Note that the <EM +>browseable</EM > flag for auto home directories will be inherited from the global browseable flag, not the [homes] browseable flag. This is useful as @@ -376,6 +395,12 @@ NAME="AEN78" world-writeable spool directory with the sticky bit set on it. A typical [printers] entry would look like this:</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="SCREEN" ><TT @@ -386,12 +411,21 @@ CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" printable = yes </TT ></PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ><P >All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned. If your printing subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have to set up a pseudo-printcap. This is a file consisting of one or more lines like this:</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="SCREEN" > <TT @@ -400,6 +434,9 @@ CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" </TT > </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ><P >Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for your printing subsystem. In the [global] section, specify @@ -431,29 +468,24 @@ NAME="AEN101" >parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</P ><P >Some parameters are specific to the [global] section - (e.g., <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->security</I + (e.g., <EM +>security</EM >). Some parameters are usable - in all sections (e.g., <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->create mode</I + in all sections (e.g., <EM +>create mode</EM >). All others are permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the following descriptions the [homes] and [printers] - sections will be considered normal. The letter <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->G</I + sections will be considered normal. The letter <EM +>G</EM > in parentheses indicates that a parameter is specific to the - [global] section. The letter <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->S</I + [global] section. The letter <EM +>S</EM > indicates that a parameter can be specified in a service specific - section. Note that all <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->S</I + section. Note that all <EM +>S</EM > parameters can also be specified in the [global] section - in which case they will define the default behavior for all services.</P @@ -570,9 +602,8 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ><P >the name of your NIS home directory server. This is obtained from your NIS auto.map entry. If you have - not compiled Samba with the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->--with-automount</I + not compiled Samba with the <EM +>--with-automount</EM > option then this value will be the same as %.</P ></DD @@ -682,9 +713,8 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" > controls if names that have characters that aren't of the "default" case are mangled. For example, if this is yes then a name like "Mail" would be mangled. - Default <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no</I + Default <EM +>no</EM >.</P ></DD ><DT @@ -693,9 +723,8 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><P >controls whether filenames are case sensitive. If they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and match on passed - names. Default <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no</I + names. Default <EM +>no</EM >.</P ></DD ><DT @@ -703,9 +732,8 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><DD ><P >controls what the default case is for new - filenames. Default <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->lower</I + filenames. Default <EM +>lower</EM >.</P ></DD ><DT @@ -714,9 +742,8 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><P >controls if new files are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the - "default" case. Default <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->yes</I + "default" case. Default <EM +>yes</EM >. </P ></DD @@ -729,9 +756,8 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" upper case, or if they are forced to be the "default" case. This option can be use with "preserve case = yes" to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names - are lowered. Default <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->yes</I + are lowercased. Default <EM +>yes</EM >.</P ></DD ></DL @@ -782,7 +808,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ></LI ><LI ><P ->The client's netbios name and any previously +>The client's NetBIOS name and any previously used user names are checked against the supplied password, if they match then the connection is allowed as the corresponding user.</P @@ -833,11 +859,11 @@ NAME="AEN253" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#ADDUSERSCRIPT" +HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->add user script</I +>add printer command</I ></TT ></A ></P @@ -845,11 +871,23 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" +HREF="#ADDSHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A +HREF="#ADDUSERSCRIPT" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->addprinter command</I +>add user script</I ></TT ></A ></P @@ -941,6 +979,18 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A +HREF="#CHANGESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change share command</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A HREF="#CHARACTERSET" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -1097,23 +1147,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#DELETEUSERSCRIPT" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->delete user script</I -></TT -></A -></P -></LI -><LI -><P -><A HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->deleteprinter command</I +>delete printer command</I ></TT ></A ></P @@ -1121,11 +1159,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#DFREECOMMAND" +HREF="#DELETESHARECOMMAND" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->dfree command</I +>delete share command</I ></TT ></A ></P @@ -1133,11 +1171,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#DNSPROXY" +HREF="#DELETEUSERSCRIPT" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->dns proxy</I +>delete user script</I ></TT ></A ></P @@ -1145,11 +1183,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#DOMAINADMINGROUP" +HREF="#DFREECOMMAND" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->domain admin group</I +>dfree command</I ></TT ></A ></P @@ -1157,11 +1195,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#DOMAINADMINUSERS" +HREF="#DNSPROXY" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->domain admin users</I +>dns proxy</I ></TT ></A ></P @@ -1169,11 +1207,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#DOMAINGROUPS" +HREF="#DOMAINADMINGROUP" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->domain groups</I +>domain admin group</I ></TT ></A ></P @@ -1193,18 +1231,6 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#DOMAINGUESTUSERS" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->domain guest users</I -></TT -></A -></P -></LI -><LI -><P -><A HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -1841,6 +1867,18 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A +HREF="#OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>obey pam restrictions</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A HREF="#OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -1877,6 +1915,18 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A +HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pam password change</I +></TT +></A +></P +></LI +><LI +><P +><A HREF="#PANICACTION" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -2537,18 +2587,6 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><LI ><P ><A -HREF="#UNIXREALNAME" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->unix realname</I -></TT -></A -></P -></LI -><LI -><P -><A HREF="#UPDATEENCRYPTED" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -2743,7 +2781,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN893" +NAME="AEN897" ></A ><H2 >COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS</H2 @@ -4162,7 +4200,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN1365" +NAME="AEN1369" ></A ><H2 >EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</H2 @@ -4173,157 +4211,9 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ><DL ><DT ><A -NAME="ADDUSERSCRIPT" -></A ->add user script (G)</DT -><DD -><P ->This is the full pathname to a script that will - be run <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->AS ROOT</I -> by <A -HREF="smbd.8.html" -TARGET="_top" ->smbd(8) - </A -> under special circumstances described below.</P -><P ->Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are - created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites - that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database - creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the - Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <A -HREF="smbd.8.html" -TARGET="_top" ->smbd</A -> to create the required UNIX users - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->ON DEMAND</I -> when a user accesses the Samba server.</P -><P ->In order to use this option, <A -HREF="smbd.8.html" -TARGET="_top" ->smbd</A -> - must be set to <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->security=server</I -></TT -> or <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> security=domain</I -></TT -> and <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->add user script</I -></TT -> - must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX - user given one argument of <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->%u</I -></TT ->, which expands into - the UNIX user name to create.</P -><P ->When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, - at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, <A -HREF="smbd.8.html" -TARGET="_top" -> smbd</A -> contacts the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->password server</I -></TT -> and - attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the - authentication succeeds then <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbd</B -> - attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the - Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->add user script - </I -></TT -> is set then <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbd</B -> will - call the specified script <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->AS ROOT</I ->, expanding - any <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->%u</I -></TT -> argument to be the user name to create.</P -><P ->If this script successfully creates the user then <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbd - </B -> will continue on as though the UNIX user - already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to - match existing Windows NT accounts.</P -><P ->See also <A -HREF="#SECURITY" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> security</I -></TT -></A ->, <A -HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" -> <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->password server</I -></TT -></A ->, - <A -HREF="#DELETEUSERSCRIPT" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->delete user - script</I -></TT -></A ->.</P -><P ->Default: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->add user script = <empty string> - </B -></P -><P ->Example: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->add user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user - %u</B -></P -></DD -><DT -><A NAME="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" ></A ->addprinter command (G)</DT +>add printer command (G)</DT ><DD ><P >With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing @@ -4334,10 +4224,11 @@ NAME="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" NT/2000 print server.</P ><P >For a Samba host this means that the printer must be - physically added to underlying printing system. The <TT + physically added to the underlying printing system. The <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I -> addprinter command</I +>add + printer command</I ></TT > defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer @@ -4359,7 +4250,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >The <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->addprinter command</I +>add printer command</I ></TT > is automatically invoked with the following parameter (in @@ -4433,7 +4324,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >Once the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->addprinter command</I +>add printer command</I ></TT > has been executed, <B @@ -4454,7 +4345,7 @@ HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I -> deleteprinter command</I +> delete printer command</I ></TT ></A >, <A @@ -4477,9 +4368,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A ></P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->none</I +>Default: <EM +>none</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -4490,6 +4380,290 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></DD ><DT ><A +NAME="ADDSHARECOMMAND" +></A +>add share command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically + add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share command</I +></TT +> is used to define an + external program or script which will add a new service definition + to <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>. In order to successfully + execute the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share command</I +></TT +>, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> + requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. + uid == 0). + </P +><P +> When executed, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will automatically invoke the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share command</I +></TT +> with four parameters. + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>configFile</I +></TT +> - the location + of the global <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>shareName</I +></TT +> - the name of the new + share. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pathName</I +></TT +> - path to an **existing** + directory on disk. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>comment</I +></TT +> - comment string to associate + with the new share. + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +> This parameter is only used for add file shares. To add printer shares, + see the <A +HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add printer + command</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +> See also <A +HREF="#CHANGESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change share + command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DELETESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete share + command</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>add share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="ADDUSERSCRIPT" +></A +>add user script (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is the full pathname to a script that will + be run <EM +>AS ROOT</EM +> by <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd(8) + </A +> under special circumstances described below.</P +><P +>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are + created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites + that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database + creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the + Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> to create the required UNIX users + <EM +>ON DEMAND</EM +> when a user accesses the Samba server.</P +><P +>In order to use this option, <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> + must be set to <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security=server</I +></TT +> or <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security=domain</I +></TT +> and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script</I +></TT +> + must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX + user given one argument of <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +>, which expands into + the UNIX user name to create.</P +><P +>When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, + at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +> smbd</A +> contacts the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +> and + attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the + authentication succeeds then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> + attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the + Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add user script + </I +></TT +> is set then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will + call the specified script <EM +>AS ROOT</EM +>, expanding + any <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>%u</I +></TT +> argument to be the user name to create.</P +><P +>If this script successfully creates the user then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd + </B +> will continue on as though the UNIX user + already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to + match existing Windows NT accounts.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#SECURITY" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> security</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>password server</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#DELETEUSERSCRIPT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete user + script</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>add user script = <empty string> + </B +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>add user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user + %u</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A NAME="ADMINUSERS" ></A >admin users (S)</DT @@ -4503,9 +4677,8 @@ NAME="ADMINUSERS" this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, irrespective of file permissions.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no admin users</I +>Default: <EM +>no admin users</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -4554,7 +4727,11 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" >domain</TT >. If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from - a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbd is running + a domain or workgroup other than the one which <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> is running in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the remote server doing the authentication.</P ><P @@ -4612,7 +4789,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><A NAME="ANNOUNCEVERSION" ></A ->annouce version (G)</DT +>announce version (G)</DT ><DD ><P >This specifies the major and minor version numbers @@ -4660,9 +4837,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >available = no</I ></TT ->, then <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->ALL</I +>, then <EM +>ALL</EM > attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are logged.</P @@ -4680,7 +4856,7 @@ NAME="BINDINTERFACESONLY" ><DD ><P >This global parameter allows the Samba admin - to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve smb requests. If + to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests. If affects file service <A HREF="smbd.8.html" TARGET="_top" @@ -4769,9 +4945,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >bind interfaces only</I ></TT > is set then - unless the network address <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->127.0.0.1</I + unless the network address <EM +>127.0.0.1</EM > is added to the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -4800,9 +4975,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" >smbpasswd</B > - by default connects to the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->localhost - 127.0.0.1</I + by default connects to the <EM +>localhost - 127.0.0.1</EM > address as an SMB client to issue the password change request. If <TT @@ -4811,9 +4985,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >bind interfaces only</I ></TT > is set then unless the - network address <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->127.0.0.1</I + network address <EM +>127.0.0.1</EM > is added to the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -4862,13 +5035,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > at the address - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->127.0.0.1</I + <EM +>127.0.0.1</EM > to determine if they are running. - Not adding <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->127.0.0.1</I + Not adding <EM +>127.0.0.1</EM > will cause <B CLASS="COMMAND" > smbd</B @@ -4915,7 +5086,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><P >If this parameter is set to <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" ->False</TT +>false</TT >, then Samba 2.2 will behave as previous versions of Samba would and will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range @@ -5058,12 +5229,146 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></DD ><DT ><A +NAME="CHANGESHARECOMMAND" +></A +>change share command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically + add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change share command</I +></TT +> is used to define an + external program or script which will modify an existing service definition + in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>. In order to successfully + execute the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change share command</I +></TT +>, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> + requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. + uid == 0). + </P +><P +> When executed, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will automatically invoke the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change share command</I +></TT +> with four parameters. + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>configFile</I +></TT +> - the location + of the global <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>shareName</I +></TT +> - the name of the new + share. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pathName</I +></TT +> - path to an **existing** + directory on disk. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>comment</I +></TT +> - comment string to associate + with the new share. + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +> This parameter is only used modify existing file shares definitions. To modify + printer shares, use the "Printers..." folder as seen when browsing the Samba host. + </P +><P +> See also <A +HREF="#ADDSHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>add share + command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#DELETESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete + share command</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>change share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A NAME="CHARACTERSET" ></A >character set (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->This allows a smbd to map incoming filenames +>This allows <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> to map incoming filenames from a DOS Code page (see the <A HREF="#CLIENTCODEPAGE" >client @@ -5085,9 +5390,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >client code page</I ></TT > - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MUST</I + <EM +>MUST</EM > be set to code page 850 if the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -5113,9 +5417,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >client code page </I ></TT -> <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MUST</I +> <EM +>MUST</EM > be set to code page 852 if the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -5141,9 +5444,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >client code page </I ></TT -> <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MUST</I +> <EM +>MUST</EM > be set to code page 866 if the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -5169,9 +5471,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >client code page </I ></TT -> <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MUST</I +> <EM +>MUST</EM > be set to code page 737 if the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -5197,9 +5498,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >client code page</I ></TT -> <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MUST</I +> <EM +>MUST</EM > be set to code page 866 if the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -5215,9 +5515,8 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" ></LI ></UL ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->BUG</I +><EM +>BUG</EM >. These MSDOS code page to UNIX character set mappings should be dynamic, like the loading of MS DOS code pages, not static.</P @@ -5227,7 +5526,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->character set = <empty string></B +>character set = <empty string></B ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -5356,9 +5655,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >client code page</I ></TT > parameter - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MUST</I + <EM +>MUST</EM > be set before the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I @@ -5553,7 +5851,7 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->coding system = <empty value></B +>coding system = <empty value></B > </P ></DD @@ -5583,9 +5881,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A > parameter.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->No comment string</I +>Default: <EM +>No comment string</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -5642,9 +5939,8 @@ NAME="COPY" copied must occur earlier in the configuration file than the service doing the copying.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no value</I +>Default: <EM +>no value</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -5675,9 +5971,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise - MASK for the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not</I + MASK for the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit <EM +>not</EM > set here will be removed from the modes set on a file when it is created.</P @@ -5738,6 +6033,18 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A > parameter.</P ><P +>Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions + set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce + a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <A +HREF="#SECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>security mask</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" >create mask = 0744</B @@ -5836,7 +6143,11 @@ NAME="DEBUGPID" ><DD ><P >When using only one log file for more then one - forked smbd-process there may be hard to follow which process + forked <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +>-process there may be hard to follow which process outputs which message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on.</P ><P @@ -5916,21 +6227,15 @@ NAME="DEBUGLEVEL" >debuglevel (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->The value of the parameter (an integer) allows - the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT -> file. This is to give greater - flexibility in the configuration of the system.</P -><P ->The default will be the debug level specified on - the command line or level zero if none was specified.</P -><P ->Example: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->debug level = 3</B -></P +>Synonym for <A +HREF="#LOGLEVEL" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> log level</I +></TT +></A +>.</P ></DD ><DT ><A @@ -5983,9 +6288,8 @@ NAME="DEFAULTSERVICE" ><P >This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot - be found. Note that the square brackets are <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + be found. Note that the square brackets are <EM +>NOT</EM > given in the parameter value (see example below).</P ><P @@ -6027,6 +6331,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Example:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >[global] @@ -6035,6 +6345,105 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" [pub] path = /%S </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE +></P +></DD +><DT +><A +NAME="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" +></A +>delete printer command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer + support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now + possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the + DeletePrinter() RPC call.</P +><P +>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be + physically deleted from underlying printing system. The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> deleteprinter command</I +></TT +> defines a script to be run which + will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer + from the print system and from <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>. + </P +><P +>The <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete printer command</I +></TT +> is + automatically called with only one parameter: <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> "printer name"</I +></TT +>.</P +><P +>Once the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete printer command</I +></TT +> has + been executed, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will reparse the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +> smb.conf</TT +> to associated printer no longer exists. + If the sharename is still valid, then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd + </B +> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +> add printer command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#PRINTING" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>printing</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>show add + printer wizard</I +></TT +></A +></P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>deleteprinter command = /usr/bin/removeprinter + </B ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -6058,15 +6467,131 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></DD ><DT ><A +NAME="DELETESHARECOMMAND" +></A +>delete share command (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically + add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete share command</I +></TT +> is used to define an + external program or script which will remove an existing service + definition from <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +>. In order to successfully + execute the <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete share command</I +></TT +>, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> + requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. + uid == 0). + </P +><P +> When executed, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> will automatically invoke the + <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete share command</I +></TT +> with two parameters. + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>configFile</I +></TT +> - the location + of the global <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>shareName</I +></TT +> - the name of + the existing service. + </P +></LI +></UL +><P +> This parameter is only used to remove file shares. To delete printer shares, + see the <A +HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete printer + command</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +> See also <A +HREF="#ADDSHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>delete share + command</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#CHANGESHARECOMMAND" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>change + share</I +></TT +></A +>. + </P +><P +>Default: <EM +>none</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>delete share command = /usr/local/bin/delshare</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A NAME="DELETEUSERSCRIPT" ></A >delete user script (G)</DT ><DD ><P >This is the full pathname to a script that will - be run <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->AS ROOT</I + be run <EM +>AS ROOT</EM > by <A HREF="smbd.8.html" TARGET="_top" @@ -6084,10 +6609,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" Windows NT PDC is an onerous task. This option allows <B CLASS="COMMAND" > smbd</B -> to delete the required UNIX users <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +> to delete the required UNIX users <EM >ON - DEMAND</I + DEMAND</EM > when a user accesses the Samba server and the Windows NT user no longer exists.</P ><P @@ -6114,9 +6638,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" </I ></TT >, which expands into the UNIX user name to delete. - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE</I + <EM +>NOTE</EM > that this is different to the <A HREF="#ADDUSERSCRIPT" ><TT @@ -6150,9 +6673,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" the user in this circumstance would not be a good idea.</P ><P >When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, - at <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->login</I + at <EM +>login</EM > (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -6183,9 +6705,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" CLASS="COMMAND" >smbd</B > will all the specified script - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->AS ROOT</I + <EM +>AS ROOT</EM >, expanding any <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I @@ -6224,7 +6745,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->delete user script = <empty string> +>delete user script = <empty string> </B ></P ><P @@ -6236,103 +6757,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></DD ><DT ><A -NAME="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" -></A ->deleteprinter command (G)</DT -><DD -><P ->With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer - support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now - possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the - DeletePrinter() RPC call.</P -><P ->For a Samba host this means that the printer must be - physically deleted from underlying printing system. The <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> deleteprinter command</I -></TT -> defines a script to be run which - will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer - from the print system and from <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->smb.conf</TT ->. - </P -><P ->The <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->deleteprinter command</I -></TT -> is - automatically called with only one parameter: <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> "printer name"</I -></TT ->.</P -><P ->Once the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->deleteprinter command</I -></TT -> has - been executed, <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbd</B -> will reparse the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" -> smb.conf</TT -> to associated printer no longer exists. - If the sharename is still valid, then <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbd - </B -> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</P -><P ->See also <A -HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> addprinter command</I -></TT -></A ->, <A -HREF="#PRINTING" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->printing</I -></TT -></A ->, - <A -HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->show add - printer wizard</I -></TT -></A -></P -><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->none</I -></P -><P ->Example: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->deleteprinter command = /usr/bin/removeprinter - </B -></P -></DD -><DT -><A NAME="DELETEVETOFILES" ></A >delete veto files (S)</DT @@ -6349,13 +6773,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></TT ></A > - option). If this option is set to False (the default) then if a vetoed + option). If this option is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> (the default) then if a vetoed directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the directory delete will fail. This is usually what you want.</P ><P >If this option is set to <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" ->True</TT +>true</TT >, then Samba will attempt to recursively delete any files and directories within the vetoed directory. This can be useful for integration with file @@ -6442,17 +6869,15 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" third return value can give the block size in bytes. The default blocksize is 1024 bytes.</P ><P ->Note: Your script should <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I +>Note: Your script should <EM +>NOT</EM > be setuid or setgid and should be owned by (and writeable only by) root!</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >By default internal routines for determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used. - </I + </EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -6463,22 +6888,40 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P >Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > #!/bin/sh df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > #!/bin/sh /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}' </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Note that you may have to replace the command names @@ -6517,9 +6960,8 @@ NAME="DIRECTORYMASK" calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for - the UNIX modes of a directory. Any bit <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not</I + the UNIX modes of a directory. Any bit <EM +>not</EM > set here will be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is created.</P @@ -6541,6 +6983,18 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > parameter. This parameter is set to 000 by default (i.e. no extra mode bits are added).</P ><P +>Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions + set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce + a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory security mask</I +></TT +></A +>.</P +><P >See the <A HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" ><TT @@ -6629,28 +7083,20 @@ NAME="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change.</P ><P ->If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same - value as the <A -HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->directory - mask</I -></TT -></A -> parameter. To allow a user to - modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory, set - this parameter to 0777.</P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0777 + meaning a user is allowed to modify all the user/group/world + permissions on a directory.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. - Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to set - it to 0777.</P + Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave + it as the default of <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>0777</TT +>.</P ><P >See also the <A HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" @@ -6682,13 +7128,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->directory security mask = <same as - directory mask></B +>directory security mask = 0777</B ></P ><P >Example: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->directory security mask = 0777</B +>directory security mask = 0700</B ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -6741,73 +7186,47 @@ NAME="DOMAINADMINGROUP" >domain admin group (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->This is an <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->EXPERIMENTAL</I -> parameter - that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may - be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds - that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality - please subscribe to the mailing list <A -HREF="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org" -TARGET="_top" ->samba-ntdom</A -> available by - visiting the web page at <A -HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" -TARGET="_top" -> http://lists.samba.org/</A ->.</P -></DD -><DT -><A -NAME="DOMAINADMINUSERS" -></A ->domain admin users (G)</DT -><DD +>This parameter is intended as a temporary solution + to enable users to be a member of the "Domain Admins" group when + a Samba host is acting as a PDC. A complete solution will be provided + by a system for mapping Windows NT/2000 groups onto UNIX groups. + Please note that this parameter has a somewhat confusing name. It + accepts a list of usernames and of group names in standard + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> notation. + </P ><P ->This is an <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->EXPERIMENTAL</I -> parameter - that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may - be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds - that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality - please subscribe to the mailing list <A -HREF="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org" -TARGET="_top" ->samba-ntdom</A -> available by - visiting the web page at <A -HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" -TARGET="_top" -> http://lists.samba.org/</A ->.</P -></DD -><DT -><A -NAME="DOMAINGROUPS" +>See also <A +HREF="#DOMAINGUESTGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain + guest group</I +></TT ></A ->domain groups (G)</DT -><DD +>, <A +HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain + logons</I +></TT +></A +> + </P ><P ->This is an <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->EXPERIMENTAL</I -> parameter - that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may - be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds - that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality - please subscribe to the mailing list <A -HREF="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org" -TARGET="_top" ->samba-ntdom</A -> available by - visiting the web page at <A -HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" -TARGET="_top" -> http://lists.samba.org/</A ->.</P +>Default: <EM +>no domain administrators</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain admin group = root @wheel</B +></P ></DD ><DT ><A @@ -6816,48 +7235,47 @@ NAME="DOMAINGUESTGROUP" >domain guest group (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->This is an <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->EXPERIMENTAL</I -> parameter - that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may - be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds - that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality - please subscribe to the mailing list <A -HREF="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org" -TARGET="_top" ->samba-ntdom</A -> available by - visiting the web page at <A -HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" -TARGET="_top" -> http://lists.samba.org/</A ->.</P -></DD -><DT -><A -NAME="DOMAINGUESTUSERS" +>This parameter is intended as a temporary solution + to enable users to be a member of the "Domain Guests" group when + a Samba host is acting as a PDC. A complete solution will be provided + by a system for mapping Windows NT/2000 groups onto UNIX groups. + Please note that this parameter has a somewhat confusing name. It + accepts a list of usernames and of group names in standard + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> notation. + </P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#DOMAINADMINGROUP" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain + admin group</I +></TT ></A ->domain guest users (G)</DT -><DD +>, <A +HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>domain + logons</I +></TT +></A +> + </P ><P ->This is an <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->EXPERIMENTAL</I -> parameter - that is part of the unfinished Samba NT Domain Controller Code. It may - be removed in a later release. To work with the latest code builds - that may have more support for Samba NT Domain Controller functionality - please subscribe to the mailing list <A -HREF="mailto:samba-ntdom@samba.org" -TARGET="_top" ->samba-ntdom</A -> available by - visiting the web page at <A -HREF="http://lists.samba.org/" -TARGET="_top" -> http://lists.samba.org/</A ->.</P +>Default: <EM +>no domain guests</EM +></P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>domain guest group = nobody @guest</B +></P ></DD ><DT ><A @@ -6866,7 +7284,10 @@ NAME="DOMAINLOGONS" >domain logons (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->If set to true, the Samba server will serve +>If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, the Samba server will serve Windows 95/98 Domain logons for the <A HREF="#WORKGROUP" > <TT @@ -7027,10 +7448,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >. Experimentation is the best policy :-) </P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >none (i.e., all directories are OK - to descend)</I + to descend)</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -7046,7 +7466,7 @@ NAME="DOSFILEMODE" ><DD ><P > The default behavior in Samba is to provide - UNIX-like behavor where only the owner of a file/directory is + UNIX-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is able to change the permissions on it. However, this behavior is often confusing to DOS/Windows users. Enabling this parameter allows a user who has write access to the file (by whatever @@ -7115,8 +7535,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > is acting on behalf of is not the file owner. Setting this option to <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" -> True</TT -> allows DOS semantics and smbd will change the file +> true</TT +> allows DOS semantics and <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> will change the file timestamp as DOS requires.</P ><P >Default: <B @@ -7168,7 +7592,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > program for information on how to set up and maintain this file), or set the <A HREF="#SECURITY" ->security=[serve|domain]</A +>security=[server|domain]</A > parameter which causes <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -7189,19 +7613,18 @@ NAME="ENHANCEDBROWSING" ><DD ><P >This option enables a couple of enhancements to - cross-subnet browse propogation that have been added in Samba + cross-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations. - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" + <EM >These enhancements are currently only available in - the HEAD Samba CVS tree (not Samba 2.2.x).</I + the HEAD Samba CVS tree (not Samba 2.2.x).</EM ></P ><P ->The first enhancement to browse propogation consists of a regular +>The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular wildcard query to a Samba WINS server for all Domain Master Browsers, - followed by a browse synchronisation with each of the returned + followed by a browse synchronization with each of the returned DMBs. The second enhancement consists of a regular randomised browse - synchronisation with all currently known DMBs.</P + synchronization with all currently known DMBs.</P ><P >You may wish to disable this option if you have a problem with empty workgroups not disappearing from browse lists. Due to the restrictions @@ -7209,7 +7632,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" to stay around forever which can be annoying.</P ><P >In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes - cross-subnet browse propogation much more reliable.</P + cross-subnet browse propagation much more reliable.</P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -7252,9 +7675,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" to standard output. This listing will then be used in response to the level 1 and 2 EnumPorts() RPC.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no enumports command</I +>Default: <EM +>no enumports command</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -7307,7 +7729,7 @@ NAME="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES" reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or or deleted in the directory. NMAKE finds all object files in the object directory. The timestamp of the last one built is then - compared to the timestamp of the object dircetory. If the + compared to the timestamp of the object directory. If the directory's timestamp if newer, then all object files will be rebuilt. Enabling this option ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build @@ -7420,9 +7842,8 @@ NAME="FORCECREATEMODE" ><DD ><P >This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit - permissions that will <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->always</I + permissions that will <EM +>always</EM > be set on a file created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a file that is being created or having its @@ -7436,6 +7857,22 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > parameter is applied.</P ><P +>Note that by default this parameter does not apply to permissions + set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce + this mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <A +HREF="#RESTRICTACLWITHMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>restrict acl with + mask</I +></TT +></A +> to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>.</P +><P >See also the parameter <A HREF="#CREATEMASK" ><TT @@ -7480,9 +7917,8 @@ NAME="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" ><DD ><P >This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit - permissions that will <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->always</I + permissions that will <EM +>always</EM > be set on a directory created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a directory that is being created. The default for this @@ -7496,6 +7932,22 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > is applied.</P ><P +>Note that by default this parameter does not apply to permissions + set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce + this mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <A +HREF="#RESTRICTACLWITHMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>restrict acl with + mask</I +></TT +></A +> to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>.</P +><P >See also the parameter <A HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" ><TT @@ -7549,28 +8001,17 @@ NAME="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a directory, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P ><P ->If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same - value as the <A -HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force - directory mode</I -></TT -></A -> parameter. To allow - a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a - directory without restrictions, set this parameter to 000.</P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is 000, which + allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a + directory without restrictions.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. - Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to set - it to 0000.</P + Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave + it set as 0000.</P ><P >See also the <A HREF="#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" @@ -7602,13 +8043,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->force directory security mode = <same as - force directory mode></B +>force directory security mode = 0</B ></P ><P >Example: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->force directory security mode = 0</B +>force directory security mode = 700</B ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -7676,9 +8116,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no forced group</I +>Default: <EM +>no forced group</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -7704,28 +8143,17 @@ NAME="FORCESECURITYMODE" mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P ><P ->If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same - value as the <A -HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->force - create mode</I -></TT -></A -> parameter. To allow a user to - modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, with no - restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0, + and allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, + with no restrictions.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. - Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to set - it to 0000.</P + Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave + this set to 0000.</P ><P >See also the <A HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" @@ -7757,13 +8185,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->force security mode = <same as force - create mode></B +>force security mode = 0</B ></P ><P >Example: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->force security mode = 0</B +>force security mode = 700</B ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -7800,9 +8227,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A ></P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no forced user</I +>Default: <EM +>no forced user</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -7873,7 +8299,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" </A >parameter is set to <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" ->False</TT +>false</TT >.</P ><P >Default: <B @@ -7937,10 +8363,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > lp(1)</B >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >specified at compile time, usually - "nobody"</I + "nobody"</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -8092,9 +8517,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no file are hidden</I +>Default: <EM +>no file are hidden</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -8145,7 +8569,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A > is <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" ->True</TT +>true</TT >, and <A HREF="smbd.8.html" TARGET="_top" @@ -8174,9 +8598,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another automounter) maps.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE :</I +><EM +>NOTE :</EM >A working NIS client is required on the system for this option to work.</P ><P @@ -8202,7 +8625,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->homedir map = <empty string></B +>homedir map = <empty string></B ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -8299,9 +8722,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups. The - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->EXCEPT</I + <EM +>EXCEPT</EM > keyword can also be used to limit a wildcard list. The following examples may provide some help:</P ><P @@ -8352,10 +8774,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > for a way of testing your host access to see if it does what you expect.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >none (i.e., all hosts permitted access) - </I + </EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -8377,9 +8798,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >hosts allow</I ></TT > - - hosts listed here are <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + - hosts listed here are <EM +>NOT</EM > permitted access to services unless the specific services have their own lists to override this one. Where the lists conflict, the <TT @@ -8390,10 +8810,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > list takes precedence.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >none (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded) - </I + </EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -8429,11 +8848,10 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > hosts equiv</I ></TT > may be useful for NT clients which will - not supply passwords to samba.</P + not supply passwords to Samba.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE :</I +><EM +>NOTE :</EM > The use of <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I @@ -8450,15 +8868,13 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></TT > option be only used if you really know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust - your spouse and kids. And only if you <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->really</I + your spouse and kids. And only if you <EM +>really</EM > trust them :-).</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no host equivalences</I +>Default: <EM +>no host equivalences</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -8496,9 +8912,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >. </P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no file included</I +>Default: <EM +>no file included</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -8586,14 +9001,13 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" </A > as usual.</P ><P ->Note that the setuid bit is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->never</I +>Note that the setuid bit is <EM +>never</EM > set via inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this).</P ><P >This can be particularly useful on large systems with - many users, perhaps several thousand,to allow a single [homes] + many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] share to be used flexibly by each user.</P ><P >See also <A @@ -8708,10 +9122,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >all active interfaces except 127.0.0.1 - that are broadcast capable</I + that are broadcast capable</EM ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -8722,9 +9135,8 @@ NAME="INVALIDUSERS" ><DD ><P >This is a list of users that should not be allowed - to login to this service. This is really a <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->paranoid</I + to login to this service. This is really a <EM +>paranoid</EM > check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach your security.</P @@ -8741,7 +9153,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" so the value <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I ->+&group</I +>+&group</I ></TT > means check the UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and @@ -8773,9 +9185,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no invalid users</I +>Default: <EM +>no invalid users</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -8859,9 +9270,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > </A > has oplocked. This allows complete data consistency between - SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->very</I + SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a <EM +>very</EM > cool feature :-).</P ><P @@ -8907,8 +9317,12 @@ NAME="LANMANAUTH" >lanman auth (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->This parameter determines whether or not smbd will - attempt to authentication users using the LANMAN password hash. +>This parameter determines whether or not <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> will + attempt to authenticate users using the LANMAN password hash. If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000 clients, smbclient, etc... but not Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host.</P @@ -8971,7 +9385,10 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></TT > </A -> parameter must be set to "true" on this share in order for +> parameter must be set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> on this share in order for this parameter to have any effect.</P ><P >See also the <A @@ -9164,32 +9581,38 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > to try and become a local master browser on a subnet. If set to <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" ->False</TT +>false</TT > then <B CLASS="COMMAND" > nmbd</B > will not attempt to become a local master browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By - default this value is set to true. Setting this value to true doesn't - mean that Samba will <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->become</I + default this value is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>. Setting this value to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> doesn't + mean that Samba will <EM +>become</EM > the local master browser on a subnet, just that <B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B -> will <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" -> participate</I +> will <EM +> participate</EM > in elections for local master browser.</P ><P ->Setting this value to False will cause <B +>Setting this value to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> will cause <B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->never</I + <EM +>never</EM > to become a local master browser.</P ><P >Default: <B @@ -9269,15 +9692,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >, real locking will be performed by the server.</P ><P ->This option <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->may</I +>This option <EM +>may</EM > be useful for read-only - filesystems which <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->may</I + filesystems which <EM +>may</EM > not need locking (such as - cdrom drives), although setting this parameter of <TT + CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" >no</TT > @@ -9318,15 +9739,21 @@ NAME="LOGLEVEL" >log level (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->Synonym for <A -HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> debug level</I -></TT -></A ->.</P +>The value of the parameter (an integer) allows + the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file. This is to give greater + flexibility in the configuration of the system.</P +><P +>The default will be the log level specified on + the command line or level zero if none was specified.</P +><P +>Example: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>log level = 3</B +></P ></DD ><DT ><A @@ -9484,16 +9911,15 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><P >The share and the path must be readable by the user for the preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT - client. The share must be writeable when the logs in for the first + client. The share must be writeable when the user logs in for the first time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the NTuser.dat and other directories.</P ><P >Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can, if required, be made read-only. It is not advisable that the NTuser.dat file be made read-only - rename it to NTuser.man to - achieve the desired effect (a <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MAN</I + achieve the desired effect (a <EM +>MAN</EM >datory profile). </P ><P @@ -9529,7 +9955,7 @@ NAME="LOGONSCRIPT" >This parameter specifies the batch file (.bat) or NT command file (.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully logs in. The file must contain the DOS - style cr/lf line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the + style CR/LF line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is recommended.</P ><P >The script must be a relative path to the [netlogon] @@ -9556,7 +9982,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT</TT ></P ><P ->The contents of the batch file is entirely your choice. A +>The contents of the batch file are entirely your choice. A suggested command would be to add <B CLASS="COMMAND" >NET TIME \\SERVER /SET @@ -9583,9 +10009,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no logon script defined</I +>Default: <EM +>no logon script defined</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -9614,7 +10039,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >%p</I ></TT -> is given then the printername +> is given then the printer name is put in its place. A <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I @@ -9795,7 +10220,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >%p</I ></TT -> is given then the printername +> is given then the printer name is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.</P ><P @@ -9822,14 +10247,13 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A > parameter.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >depends on the setting of <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I > printing</I ></TT -></I +></EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -9866,7 +10290,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >%p</I ></TT -> is given then the printername +> is given then the printer name is put in its place. A <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I @@ -9952,7 +10376,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >%p</I ></TT -> is given then the printername +> is given then the printer name is put in its place. A <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I @@ -9981,15 +10405,14 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A > parameter.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >depends on the setting of <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >printing </I ></TT -></I +></EM ></P ><P >Example 1: <B @@ -10011,7 +10434,7 @@ NAME="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT" >machine password timeout (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->If a Samba server is a member of an Windows +>If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the <A HREF="#SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" >security=domain</A @@ -10078,7 +10501,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->magic output = <magic script name>.out +>magic output = <magic script name>.out </B ></P ><P @@ -10100,8 +10523,8 @@ NAME="MAGICSCRIPT" executed on behalf of the connected user.</P ><P >Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon - completion assuming that the user has the appripriate level - of priviledge and the ile permissions allow the deletion.</P + completion assuming that the user has the appropriate level + of privilege and the file permissions allow the deletion.</P ><P >If the script generates output, output will be sent to the file specified by the <A @@ -10117,24 +10540,20 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts containing CR/LF instead of CR as the end-of-line marker. Magic scripts must be executable - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->as is</I + <EM +>as is</EM > on the host, which for some hosts and some shells will require filtering at the DOS end.</P ><P ->Magic scripts are <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->EXPERIMENTAL</I +>Magic scripts are <EM +>EXPERIMENTAL</EM > and - should <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + should <EM +>NOT</EM > be relied upon.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->None. Magic scripts disabled.</I +>Default: <EM +>None. Magic scripts disabled.</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -10167,7 +10586,7 @@ NAME="MANGLEDMAP" ><DD ><P >This is for those who want to directly map UNIX - file names which can not be represented on Windows/DOS. The mangling + file names which cannot be represented on Windows/DOS. The mangling of names is not always what is needed. In particular you may have documents with file extensions that differ between DOS and UNIX. For example, under UNIX it is common to use <TT @@ -10198,12 +10617,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="FILENAME" >;1 </TT -> off the ends of filenames on some CDROMS (only visible +> off the ends of filenames on some CDROMs (only visible under some UNIXes). To do this use a map of (*;1 *;).</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no mangled map</I +>Default: <EM +>no mangled map</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -10316,12 +10734,12 @@ TARGET="_top" ><P >The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled names can be successfully converted to correct long UNIX names. - However, large stack sizes will slow most directory access. Smaller + However, large stack sizes will slow most directory accesses. Smaller stacks save memory in the server (each stack element costs 256 bytes). </P ><P >It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long - file names, so be prepared for some surprises!</P + filenames, so be prepared for some surprises!</P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -10341,9 +10759,8 @@ NAME="MANGLINGCHAR" ><DD ><P >This controls what character is used as - the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->magic</I + the <EM +>magic</EM > character in <A HREF="#AEN201" >name mangling</A @@ -10544,9 +10961,8 @@ HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT" will not know the reason they cannot access files they think they should - there will have been no message given to them that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services will - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->hate</I + <EM +>hate</EM > you if you set the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I @@ -10565,9 +10981,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></TT > modes other than share. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being - requested is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not</I + requested is <EM +>not</EM > sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client so the server cannot make authentication decisions at the correct time (connection @@ -10709,7 +11124,7 @@ NAME="MAXMUX" ><DD ><P >This option controls the maximum number of - outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that samba tells the client + outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.</P ><P >Default: <B @@ -10817,9 +11232,8 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" ><TT CLASS="CONSTANT" >LANMAN1</TT ->: First <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" -> modern</I +>: First <EM +> modern</EM > version of the protocol. Long filename support.</P ></LI @@ -10883,10 +11297,14 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></A > processes concurrently running on a system and is intended - as a stop gap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event + as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this number of connections. Remember that under normal operating - conditions, each user will have an smbd associated with him or her + conditions, each user will have an <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> associated with him or her to handle connections to all shares from a given host. </P ><P @@ -11018,14 +11436,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" >xedit</B >, then - removes it afterwards. <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" + removes it afterwards. <EM >NOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT - THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY</I + THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY</EM >. That's why I have the '&' on the end. If it doesn't return immediately then your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover - after 30secs, hopefully).</P + after 30 seconds, hopefully).</P ><P >All messages are delivered as the global guest user. The command takes the standard substitutions, although <TT @@ -11087,7 +11504,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >message command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on - %m' root < %s; rm %s</B + %m' root < %s; rm %s</B ></P ><P >If you don't have a message command then the message @@ -11103,9 +11520,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >message command = rm %s</B ></P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no message command</I +>Default: <EM +>no message command</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -11475,9 +11891,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->empty string (no additional names)</I +>Default: <EM +>empty string (no additional names)</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -11510,9 +11925,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->machine DNS name</I +>Default: <EM +>machine DNS name</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -11677,6 +12091,36 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></DD ><DT ><A +NAME="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS" +></A +>obey pam restrictions (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>When Samba 2.2 is configured to enable PAM support + (i.e. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba + should obey PAM's account and session management directives. The + default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only + and to ignore any account or session management. Note that Samba + always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of <A +HREF="#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>encrypt passwords = yes</I +></TT +> + </A +>. The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response + authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>obey pam restrictions = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A NAME="ONLYUSER" ></A >only user (S)</DT @@ -11737,30 +12181,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></DD ><DT ><A -NAME="OLELOCKINGCOMPATIBILITY" -></A ->ole locking compatibility (G)</DT -><DD -><P ->This parameter allows an administrator to turn - off the byte range lock manipulation that is done within Samba to - give compatibility for OLE applications. Windows OLE applications - use byte range locking as a form of inter-process communication, by - locking ranges of bytes around the 2^32 region of a file range. This - can cause certain UNIX lock managers to crash or otherwise cause - problems. Setting this parameter to <TT -CLASS="CONSTANT" ->no</TT -> means you - trust your UNIX lock manager to handle such cases correctly.</P -><P ->Default: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->ole locking compatibility = yes</B -></P -></DD -><DT -><A NAME="ONLYGUEST" ></A >only guest (S)</DT @@ -11791,10 +12211,9 @@ NAME="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME" is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break request to such (broken) clients.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +><EM >DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ - AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</I + AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</EM >.</P ><P >Default: <B @@ -11809,9 +12228,8 @@ NAME="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT" >oplock contention limit (S)</DT ><DD ><P ->This is a <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->very</I +>This is a <EM +>very</EM > advanced <A HREF="smbd.8.html" @@ -11821,7 +12239,11 @@ TARGET="_top" improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple client contention for the same file.</P ><P ->In brief it specifies a number, which causes smbd not to +>In brief it specifies a number, which causes <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> not to grant an oplock even when requested if the approximate number of clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this limit. This causes <B @@ -11830,10 +12252,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > to behave in a similar way to Windows NT.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +><EM >DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ - AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</I + AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE</EM >.</P ><P >Default: <B @@ -11848,7 +12269,10 @@ NAME="OPLOCKS" >oplocks (S)</DT ><DD ><P ->This boolean option tells smbd whether to +>This boolean option tells <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> whether to issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve the speed of access to files on Samba servers. It allows the clients @@ -11929,9 +12353,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></TT > in the local broadcast area.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note :</I +><EM +>Note :</EM >By default, Samba will win a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating systems except a Windows NT 4.0/2000 Domain Controller. This @@ -11967,11 +12390,11 @@ NAME="OS2DRIVERMAP" path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver names to OS/2 printer driver names. The format is:</P ><P -><nt driver name> = <os2 driver - name>.<device name></P +><nt driver name> = <os2 driver + name>.<device name></P ><P >For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5 - printer driver woudl appear as <B + printer driver would appear as <B CLASS="COMMAND" >HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP LaserJet 5L</B @@ -11993,12 +12416,50 @@ TARGET="_top" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->os2 driver map = <empty string> +>os2 driver map = <empty string> </B ></P ></DD ><DT ><A +NAME="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +></A +>pam password change (G)</DT +><DD +><P +>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, + this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control + flag for Samba. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password + changes when requested by an SMB client insted of the program listed in + <A +HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd program</I +></TT +></A +>. + It should be possible to enable this without changing your + <A +HREF="#PASSWDCHAT" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>passwd chat</I +></TT +></A +> + paramater for most setups. + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>pam password change = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A NAME="PANICACTION" ></A >panic action (G)</DT @@ -12019,7 +12480,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->panic action = <empty string></B +>panic action = <empty string></B ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -12034,16 +12495,15 @@ NAME="PASSWDCHAT" >passwd chat (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->This string controls the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->"chat"</I +>This string controls the <EM +>"chat"</EM > conversation that takes places between <A HREF="smbd.8.html" TARGET="_top" >smbd</A > and the local password changing - program to change the users password. The string describes a + program to change the user's password. The string describes a sequence of response-receive pairs that <A HREF="smbd.8.html" TARGET="_top" @@ -12100,8 +12560,8 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" in them into a single string.</P ><P >If the send string in any part of the chat sequence - is a fullstop ".", then no string is sent. Similarly, - if the expect string is a fullstop then no string is expected.</P + is a full stop ".", then no string is sent. Similarly, + if the expect string is a full stop then no string is expected.</P ><P >Note that if the <A HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" @@ -12112,15 +12572,31 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" password sync</I ></TT ></A -> parameter is set to true, then this - sequence is called <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->AS ROOT</I +> parameter is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, then this + sequence is called <EM +>AS ROOT</EM > when the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old password cleartext. In this case the old password cleartext is set to "" (the empty string).</P ><P +>Also, if the <A +HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pam + password change</I +></TT +></A +> parameter is set to true, the chat pairs + may be matched in any order, and sucess is determined by the PAM result, + not any particular output. The \n macro is ignored for PAM conversions. + </P +><P >See also <A HREF="#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" ><TT @@ -12138,7 +12614,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > passwd program</I ></TT ></A -> and <A +> ,<A HREF="#PASSWDCHATDEBUG" > <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -12146,6 +12622,14 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >passwd chat debug</I ></TT ></A +> and <A +HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +> <TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pam password change</I +></TT +></A >.</P ><P >Default: <B @@ -12169,9 +12653,8 @@ NAME="PASSWDCHATDEBUG" ><DD ><P >This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script - parameter is run in <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->debug</I + parameter is run in <EM +>debug</EM > mode. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed in the <A @@ -12205,10 +12688,19 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >passwd program</I ></TT > and should - be turned off after this has been done. This parameter is off by - default.</P + be turned off after this has been done. This option has no effect if the + <A +HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pam password change</I +></TT +></A +> + paramter is set. This parameter is off by default.</P ><P ->See also <<A +>See also <A HREF="#PASSWDCHAT" ><TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -12216,7 +12708,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >passwd chat</I ></TT > - </A + </A +>, <A +HREF="#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>pam password change</I +></TT +> + </A >, <A HREF="#PASSWDPROGRAM" ><TT @@ -12225,7 +12726,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >passwd program</I ></TT > - </A + </A >.</P ><P >Default: <B @@ -12250,18 +12751,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for existence before calling the password changing program.</P ><P ->Also note that many passwd programs insist in <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <EM >reasonable - </I + </EM > passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion of mixed case chars and digits. This can pose a problem as some clients (such as Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending it.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that if the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I @@ -12270,11 +12769,10 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></TT > parameter is set to <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" ->True +>true </TT -> then this program is called <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->AS ROOT</I +> then this program is called <EM +>AS ROOT</EM > before the SMB password in the <A HREF="smbpasswd.5.html" @@ -12294,13 +12792,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >unix password sync</I ></TT > parameter - is set this parameter <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS</I + is set this parameter <EM +>MUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS</EM > - for <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->ALL</I + for <EM +>ALL</EM > programs called, and must be examined for security implications. Note that by default <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -12310,7 +12806,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></TT > is set to <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" ->False</TT +>false</TT >.</P ><P >See also <A @@ -12439,15 +12935,13 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in user level security mode.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > Using a password server means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your - password server. <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" + password server. <EM >DO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT - YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</I + YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</EM >.</P ><P >Never point a Samba server at itself for password @@ -12504,7 +12998,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" Primary or Backup Domain controllers to authenticate against by doing a query for the name <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" ->WORKGROUP<1C></TT +>WORKGROUP<1C></TT > and then contacting each server returned in the list of IP addresses from the name resolution source. </P @@ -12559,7 +13053,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" > security=server</B > mode the network logon will appear to - come from there rather than from the users workstation.</P + come from there rather than from the user's workstation.</P ></LI ></UL ><P @@ -12576,7 +13070,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->password server = <empty string></B +>password server = <empty string></B > </P ><P @@ -12636,9 +13130,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A > if one was specified.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->none</I +>Default: <EM +>none</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -12685,7 +13178,7 @@ NAME="POSTEXEC" substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some systems.</P ><P ->An interesting example may be do unmount server +>An interesting example may be to unmount server resources:</P ><P ><B @@ -12704,16 +13197,15 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" </A >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->none (no command executed)</I +>Default: <EM +>none (no command executed)</EM > </P ><P >Example: <B CLASS="COMMAND" >postexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S - from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</B + from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</B ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -12724,7 +13216,7 @@ NAME="POSTSCRIPT" ><DD ><P >This parameter forces a printer to interpret - the print files as postscript. This is done by adding a <TT + the print files as PostScript. This is done by adding a <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" >%! </TT @@ -12781,15 +13273,14 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->none (no command executed)</I +>Default: <EM +>none (no command executed)</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B CLASS="COMMAND" >preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m - (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</B + (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</B ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -12830,7 +13321,10 @@ TARGET="_top" > is a preferred master browser for its workgroup.</P ><P ->If this is set to true, on startup, <B +>If this is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, on startup, <B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > @@ -12915,9 +13409,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A > option is easier.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no preloaded services</I +>Default: <EM +>no preloaded services</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -12998,9 +13491,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" spool file name is generated automatically by the server, the printer name is discussed below.</P ><P ->The print command <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MUST</I +>The print command <EM +>MUST</EM > contain at least one occurrence of <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -13058,7 +13550,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->print command = echo Printing %s >> +>print command = echo Printing %s >> /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s</B ></P ><P @@ -13222,6 +13714,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P >A minimal printcap file would look something like this:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > print1|My Printer 1 @@ -13230,15 +13728,17 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" print4|My Printer 4 print5|My Printer 5 </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >where the '|' separates aliases of a printer. The fact that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba that it's a comment.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE</I +><EM +>NOTE</EM >: Under AIX the default printcap name is <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -13277,7 +13777,7 @@ NAME="PRINTERADMIN" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->printer admin = <empty string></B +>printer admin = <empty string></B > </P ><P @@ -13293,20 +13793,17 @@ NAME="PRINTERDRIVER" >printer driver (S)</DT ><DD ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note :</I ->This is a depreciated +><EM +>Note :</EM +>This is a deprecated parameter and will be removed in the next major release following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->PRINTER_DRIVER2.txt</TT -> in the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->docs - </TT -> of the Samba distribution for more information + the <A +HREF="printer_driver2.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Samba 2.2. Printing + HOWTO</A +> for more information on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server. </P ><P @@ -13354,20 +13851,17 @@ NAME="PRINTERDRIVERFILE" >printer driver file (G)</DT ><DD ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note :</I ->This is a depreciated +><EM +>Note :</EM +>This is a deprecated parameter and will be removed in the next major release following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->PRINTER_DRIVER2.txt</TT -> in the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->docs - </TT -> of the Samba distribution for more information + the <A +HREF="printer_driver2.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Samba 2.2. Printing + HOWTO</A +> for more information on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server. </P ><P @@ -13392,7 +13886,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" </TT > files found on the Windows 95 client system. For more details on setting up serving of printer drivers to Windows 95 - clients, see the documentation file in the <TT + clients, see the outdated documentation file in the <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >docs/</TT > @@ -13411,9 +13905,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->None (set in compile).</I +>Default: <EM +>None (set in compile).</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -13429,20 +13922,17 @@ NAME="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION" >printer driver location (S)</DT ><DD ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note :</I ->This is a depreciated +><EM +>Note :</EM +>This is a deprecated parameter and will be removed in the next major release following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in - <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->PRINTER_DRIVER2.txt</TT -> in the <TT -CLASS="FILENAME" ->docs - </TT -> of the Samba distribution for more information + the <A +HREF="printer_driver2.html" +TARGET="_top" +>Samba 2.2. Printing + HOWTO</A +> for more information on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server. </P ><P @@ -13458,7 +13948,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P >Where MACHINE is the NetBIOS name of your Samba server, and PRINTER$ is a share you set up for serving printer driver - files. For more details on setting this up see the documentation + files. For more details on setting this up see the outdated documentation file in the <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >docs/</TT @@ -13502,13 +13992,12 @@ NAME="PRINTERNAME" name given will be used for any printable service that does not have its own printer name specified.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >none (but may be <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" >lp</TT > - on many systems)</I + on many systems)</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -13571,7 +14060,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >lprm command</I ></TT > if specified in the - [global]f> section.</P + [global] section.</P ><P >Currently eight printing styles are supported. They are <TT @@ -13664,14 +14153,14 @@ NAME="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND" ><DD ><P >This parameter specifies the command to be - executed on the server host in order to pause the printerqueue.</P + executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue.</P ><P >This command should be a program or script which takes - a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printerqueue, + a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.</P ><P >This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, - but can be issued from the Printer's window under Windows 95 + but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 and NT.</P ><P >If a <TT @@ -13679,7 +14168,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >%p</I ></TT -> is given then the printername +> is given then the printer name is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command. </P ><P @@ -13687,15 +14176,14 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >depends on the setting of <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >printing </I ></TT -></I +></EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -13711,7 +14199,7 @@ NAME="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND" ><DD ><P >This parameter specifies the command to be - executed on the server host in order to resume the printerqueue. It + executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue. It is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the previous parameter (<A HREF="#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND" @@ -13724,11 +14212,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >).</P ><P >This command should be a program or script which takes - a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printerqueue, + a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue, such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer.</P ><P >This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, - but can be issued from the Printer's window under Windows 95 + but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 and NT.</P ><P >If a <TT @@ -13736,7 +14224,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >%p</I ></TT -> is given then the printername +> is given then the printer name is put in its place. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command.</P ><P @@ -13744,8 +14232,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >depends on the setting of <A HREF="#PRINTING" ><TT @@ -13754,7 +14241,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >printing</I ></TT ></A -></I +></EM > </P ><P @@ -13838,7 +14325,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->read list = <empty string></B +>read list = <empty string></B ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -13966,7 +14453,10 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" 192.168.4.255/STAFF</B ></P ><P ->the above line would cause nmbd to announce itself +>the above line would cause <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>nmbd</B +> to announce itself to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names. If you leave out the workgroup name then the one given in the <A @@ -13995,7 +14485,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->remote announce = <empty string> +>remote announce = <empty string> </B ></P ></DD @@ -14011,10 +14501,10 @@ HREF="nmbd.8.html" TARGET="_top" >nmbd(8)</A > to periodically request - synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a samba + synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks. This - is done in a manner that does not work with any non-samba servers.</P + is done in a manner that does not work with any non-Samba servers.</P ><P >This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local clients to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse @@ -14041,25 +14531,133 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" of known browse masters if your network config is that stable. If a machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it - is in fact the browse master on it's segment.</P + is in fact the browse master on its segment.</P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->remote browse sync = <empty string> +>remote browse sync = <empty string> </B ></P ></DD ><DT ><A +NAME="RESTRICTACLWITHMASK" +></A +>restrict acl with mask (S)</DT +><DD +><P +>This is a boolean parameter. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> (default), then + creation of files with access control lists (ACLS) and modification of ACLs + using the Windows NT/2000 ACL editor will be applied directly to the file + or directory.</P +><P +>If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, then all requests to set an ACL on a file will have the + parameters <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +></A +> + applied before setting the ACL, and all requests to set an ACL on a directory will + have the parameters <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory + mask</I +></TT +></A +>, <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force + directory mode</I +></TT +></A +> applied before setting the ACL. + </P +><P +>See also <A +HREF="#CREATEMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>create mask</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#FORCECREATEMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force create mode</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#DIRECTORYMASK" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>directory mask</I +></TT +></A +>, + <A +HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" +><TT +CLASS="PARAMETER" +><I +>force directory mode</I +></TT +></A +> + </P +><P +>Default: <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>restrict acl with mask = no</B +></P +></DD +><DT +><A NAME="RESTRICTANONYMOUS" ></A >restrict anonymous (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->This is a boolean parameter. If it is true, then +>This is a boolean parameter. If it is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, then anonymous access to the server will be restricted, namely in the case where the server is expecting the client to send a username, - but it doesn't. Setting it to true will force these anonymous + but it doesn't. Setting it to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> will force these anonymous connections to be denied, and the client will be required to always supply a username and password when connecting. Use of this parameter is only recommended for homogeneous NT client environments.</P @@ -14069,10 +14667,13 @@ NAME="RESTRICTANONYMOUS" likes to use anonymous connections when refreshing the share list, and this is a way to work around that.</P ><P ->When restrict anonymous is true, all anonymous connections +>When restrict anonymous is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, all anonymous connections are denied no matter what they are for. This can effect the ability - of a machine to access the samba Primary Domain Controller to revalidate - it's machine account after someone else has logged on the client + of a machine to access the Samba Primary Domain Controller to revalidate + its machine account after someone else has logged on the client interactively. The NT client will display a message saying that the machine's account in the domain doesn't exist or the password is bad. The best way to deal with this is to reboot NT client machines @@ -14129,7 +14730,7 @@ NAME="ROOTDIRECTORY" CLASS="COMMAND" >chroot()</B > (i.e. - Change it's root directory) to this directory on startup. This is + Change its root directory) to this directory on startup. This is not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries. It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other @@ -14159,9 +14760,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >root directory</I ></TT > - option, <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->including</I + option, <EM +>including</EM > some files needed for complete operation of the server. To maintain full operability of the server you will need to mirror some system files @@ -14204,7 +14804,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for unmounting filesystems - (such as cdroms) after a connection is closed.</P + (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed.</P ><P >See also <A HREF="#POSTEXEC" @@ -14218,7 +14818,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->root postexec = <empty string> +>root postexec = <empty string> </B ></P ></DD @@ -14236,8 +14836,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></TT > parameter except that the command is run as root. This - is useful for mounting filesystems (such as cdroms) after a - connection is closed.</P + is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a + connection is opened.</P ><P >See also <A HREF="#PREEXEC" @@ -14259,7 +14859,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->root preexec = <empty string> +>root preexec = <empty string> </B ></P ></DD @@ -14394,9 +14994,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >It is possible to use <B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbd</B -> in a <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" -> hybrid mode</I +> in a <EM +> hybrid mode</EM > where it is offers both user and share level security under different <A HREF="#NETBIOSALIASES" @@ -14413,13 +15012,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><A NAME="SECURITYEQUALSSHARE" ></A -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +><EM >SECURITY = SHARE - </I + </EM ></P ><P ->When clients connect to a share level security server then +>When clients connect to a share level security server they need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with @@ -14434,9 +15032,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >Note that <B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbd</B -> <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->ALWAYS</I +> <EM +>ALWAYS</EM > uses a valid UNIX user to act on behalf of the client, even in <B @@ -14496,10 +15093,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></LI ><LI ><P ->If the client did a previous <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>If the client did a previous <EM >logon - </I + </EM > request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username. </P @@ -14554,9 +15150,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >, then this guest user will be used, otherwise access is denied.</P ><P ->Note that it can be <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->very</I +>Note that it can be <EM +>very</EM > confusing in share-level security as to which UNIX username will eventually be used in granting access.</P @@ -14569,10 +15164,9 @@ HREF="#AEN234" ><A NAME="SECURITYEQUALSUSER" ></A -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->SECURIYT = USER - </I +><EM +>SECURITY = USER + </EM ></P ><P >This is the default security setting in Samba 2.2. @@ -14615,13 +15209,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after the user has been successfully authenticated.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that the name of the resource being - requested is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not</I + requested is <EM +>not</EM > sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing @@ -14653,10 +15245,9 @@ HREF="#AEN234" ><A NAME="SECURITYEQUALSSERVER" ></A -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +><EM >SECURITY = SERVER - </I + </EM ></P ><P >In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password @@ -14681,10 +15272,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > for details on how to set this up.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I -> that from the clients point of +><EM +>Note</EM +> that from the client's point of view <B CLASS="COMMAND" >security = server</B @@ -14695,13 +15285,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the client sees.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that the name of the resource being - requested is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not</I + requested is <EM +>not</EM > sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing @@ -14753,10 +15341,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><A NAME="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN" ></A -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +><EM >SECURITY = DOMAIN - </I + </EM ></P ><P >This mode will only work correctly if <A @@ -14781,17 +15368,15 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly the same way that a Windows NT Server would do.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that a valid UNIX user must still exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I -> that from the clients point +><EM +>Note</EM +> that from the client's point of view <B CLASS="COMMAND" >security = domain</B @@ -14802,13 +15387,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the client sees.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that the name of the resource being - requested is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not</I + requested is <EM +>not</EM > sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing @@ -14832,9 +15415,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" </A > parameter for details on doing this.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->BUG:</I +><EM +>BUG:</EM > There is currently a bug in the implementation of <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -14899,28 +15481,20 @@ NAME="SECURITYMASK" mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change.</P ><P ->If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same - value as the <A -HREF="#CREATEMASK" -><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->create mask - </I -></TT -></A -> parameter. To allow a user to modify all the - user/group/world permissions on a file, set this parameter to - 0777.</P +>If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing + a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file. + </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. Administrators of most normal systems will - probably want to set it to 0777.</P + probably want to leave it set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>0777</TT +>.</P ><P >See also the <A HREF="#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" @@ -14952,13 +15526,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->security mask = <same as create mask> - </B +>security mask = 0777</B ></P ><P >Example: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->security mask = 0777</B +>security mask = 0770</B ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -14972,7 +15545,7 @@ NAME="SERVERSTRING" printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection in <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->net view"</B +>net view</B >. It can be any string that you wish to show to your users.</P ><P @@ -15080,9 +15653,8 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" >This option gives full share compatibility and enabled by default.</P ><P ->You should <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NEVER</I +>You should <EM +>NEVER</EM > turn this parameter off as many Windows applications will break if you do so.</P ><P @@ -15154,7 +15726,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >printer admin</I ></TT > group), the OpenPrinterEx() - call fails and the clients another open call with a request for + call fails and the client makes another open call with a request for a lower privilege level. This should succeed, however the APW icon will not be displayed.</P ><P @@ -15165,9 +15737,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></TT > parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server - to fail. Thus the APW icon will never be displayed. <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" -> Note :</I + to fail. Thus the APW icon will never be displayed. <EM +> Note :</EM >This does not prevent the same user from having administrative privilege on an individual printer.</P ><P @@ -15238,7 +15809,7 @@ NAME="SOCKETADDRESS" support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each with a different configuration.</P ><P ->By default samba will accept connections on any +>By default Samba will accept connections on any address.</P ><P >Example: <B @@ -15332,9 +15903,8 @@ TARGET="_top" ></LI ></UL ><P ->Those marked with a <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->'*'</I +>Those marked with a <EM +>'*'</EM > take an integer argument. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you @@ -15406,9 +15976,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >SAMBA_NETBIOS_NAME=myhostname</B ></P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->No default value</I +>Default: <EM +>No default value</EM ></P ><P >Examples: <B @@ -15438,13 +16007,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P @@ -15452,8 +16019,8 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" it is set to <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" >no</TT ->, the SSL enabled samba behaves - exactly like the non-SSL samba. If set to <TT +>, the SSL-enabled Samba behaves + exactly like the non-SSL Samba. If set to <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" >yes</TT >, @@ -15496,19 +16063,17 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P >This variable defines where to look up the Certification Authorities. The given directory should contain one file for - each CA that samba will trust. The file name must be the hash + each CA that Samba will trust. The file name must be the hash value over the "Distinguished Name" of the CA. How this directory is set up is explained later in this document. All files within the directory that don't fit into this naming scheme are ignored. You @@ -15535,13 +16100,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P @@ -15575,13 +16138,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P @@ -15604,13 +16165,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P @@ -15645,13 +16204,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P @@ -15686,13 +16243,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P @@ -15738,18 +16293,16 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P ->These two variables define whether samba will go - into SSL mode or not. If none of them is defined, samba will +>These two variables define whether Samba will go + into SSL mode or not. If none of them is defined, Samba will allow only SSL connections. If the <A HREF="#SSLHOSTS" > <TT @@ -15766,7 +16319,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > ssl hosts resign</I ></TT > variable lists hosts, only these - hosts will NOT be forced into SSL mode. The syntax for these two + hosts will <EM +>NOT</EM +> be forced into SSL mode. The syntax for these two variables is the same as for the <A HREF="#HOSTSALLOW" ><TT @@ -15792,12 +16347,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->ssl hosts = <empty string></B +>ssl hosts = <empty string></B ></P ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->ssl hosts resign = <empty string></B +>ssl hosts resign = <empty string></B ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -15820,13 +16375,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P @@ -15860,9 +16413,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" CLASS="CONSTANT" >no</TT >, clients don't need certificates. - Contrary to web applications you really <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->should</I + Contrary to web applications you really <EM +>should</EM > require client certificates. In the web environment the client's data is sensitive (credit card numbers) and the server must prove @@ -15889,13 +16441,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P @@ -15944,27 +16494,24 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P >This is the file containing the server's certificate. - The server <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->must</I + The server <EM +>must</EM > have a certificate. The file may also contain the server's private key. See later for how certificates and private keys are created.</P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->ssl server cert = <empty string> +>ssl server cert = <empty string> </B ></P ></DD @@ -15983,32 +16530,28 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P >This file contains the private key of the server. If this variable is not defined, the key is looked up in the certificate file (it may be appended to the certificate). - The server <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->must</I + The server <EM +>must</EM > have a private key - and the certificate <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->must</I + and the certificate <EM +>must</EM > match this private key.</P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->ssl server key = <empty string> +>ssl server key = <empty string> </B ></P ></DD @@ -16027,13 +16570,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > was given at configure time.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that for export control reasons - this code is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + this code is <EM +>NOT</EM > enabled by default in any current binary version of Samba.</P ><P @@ -16150,7 +16691,7 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" > the server does file lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them.</P ><P ->Well behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it +>Well-behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it is important, so in the vast majority of cases <B CLASS="COMMAND" >strict @@ -16179,7 +16720,11 @@ NAME="STRICTSYNC" CLASS="CONSTANT" >no</TT > (the - default) means that smbd ignores the Windows applications requests for + default) means that <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> ignores the Windows applications requests for a sync call. There is only a possibility of losing data if the operating system itself that Samba is running on crashes, so there is little danger in this default setting. In addition, this fixes many @@ -16227,10 +16772,16 @@ NAME="SYNCALWAYS" ><P >This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always be written to stable storage before - the write call returns. If this is false then the server will be + the write call returns. If this is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>false</TT +> then the server will be guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can set a bit indicating that a particular write should be synchronous). - If this is true then every write will be followed by a <B + If this is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> then every write will be followed by a <B CLASS="COMMAND" >fsync() </B @@ -16321,9 +16872,8 @@ NAME="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR" >template homedir (G)</DT ><DD ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0.</P ><P @@ -16361,9 +16911,8 @@ NAME="TEMPLATESHELL" >template shell (G)</DT ><DD ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0.</P ><P @@ -16449,7 +16998,11 @@ NAME="TOTALPRINTJOBS" >This parameter accepts an integer value which defines a limit on the maximum number of print jobs that will be accepted system wide at any given time. If a print job is submitted - by a client which will exceed this number, then smbd will return an + by a client which will exceed this number, then <A +HREF="smbd.8.html" +TARGET="_top" +>smbd</A +> will return an error indicating that no space is available on the server. The default value of 0 means that no such limit exists. This parameter can be used to prevent a server from exceeding its capacity and is @@ -16485,18 +17038,20 @@ NAME="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" >This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed. - If this is set to true the program specified in the <TT + If this is set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> the program specified in the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >passwd program</I ></TT ->parameter is called <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->AS ROOT</I +>parameter is called <EM +>AS ROOT</EM > - to allow the new UNIX password to be set without access to the - old UNIX password (as the SMB password has change code has no + old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no access to the old password cleartext, only the new).</P ><P >See also <A @@ -16525,23 +17080,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></DD ><DT ><A -NAME="UNIXREALNAME" -></A ->unix realname (G)</DT -><DD -><P ->This boolean parameter when set causes samba - to supply the real name field from the unix password file to - the client. This is useful for setting up mail clients and WWW - browsers on systems used by more than one person.</P -><P ->Default: <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->unix realname = yes</B -></P -></DD -><DT -><A NAME="UPDATEENCRYPTED" ></A >update encrypted (G)</DT @@ -16602,17 +17140,19 @@ NAME="USERHOSTS" >use rhosts (G)</DT ><DD ><P ->If this global parameter is a true, it specifies - that the UNIX users <TT +>If this global parameter is <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +>, it specifies + that the UNIX user's <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >.rhosts</TT > file in their home directory will be read to find the names of hosts and users who will be allowed access without specifying a password.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > The use of <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I @@ -16729,7 +17269,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > parameter.</P ><P >If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name - will be looked up first in the yp netgroups list (if Samba + will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.</P @@ -16739,7 +17279,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.</P ><P >If any of the usernames begin with a '&'then the name - will be looked up only in the yp netgroups database (if Samba + will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list of all users in the netgroup group of that name.</P ><P @@ -16757,7 +17297,7 @@ HREF="#AEN234" >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" >The guest account if a guest service, - else <empty string>.</B + else <empty string>.</B ></P ><P >Examples:<B @@ -16894,11 +17434,20 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" '!' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on that line.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > !sys = mary fred guest = * </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences @@ -16935,9 +17484,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think they don't own the print job.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no username map</I +>Default: <EM +>no username map</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -16957,7 +17505,10 @@ NAME="UTMP" Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <B CLASS="COMMAND" > --with-utmp</B ->. If set to True then Samba will attempt +>. If set to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a connection is made to a Samba server. Sites may use this to record the user connecting to a Samba share.</P @@ -17006,9 +17557,8 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >/var/run/utmp</TT > on Linux).</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no utmp directory</I +>Default: <EM +>no utmp directory</EM ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -17037,20 +17587,28 @@ NAME="VALIDCHARS" (which is a pointless thing to do as it's already there) you could do one of the following</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > valid chars = Z valid chars = z:Z valid chars = 0132:0172 </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >The last two examples above actually add two characters, and alter the uppercase and lowercase mappings appropriately.</P ><P ->Note that you <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->MUST</I +>Note that you <EM +>MUST</EM > specify this parameter after the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -17088,10 +17646,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A > parameter.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >Samba defaults to using a reasonable set - of valid characters for English systems</I + of valid characters for English systems</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -17103,9 +17660,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >The above example allows filenames to have the Swedish characters in them.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > It is actually quite difficult to correctly produce a <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -17180,10 +17736,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A ></P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >No valid users list (anyone can login) - </I + </EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -17205,9 +17760,8 @@ NAME="VETOFILES" or directories as in DOS wildcards.</P ><P >Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and - must <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not</I + must <EM +>not</EM > include the unix directory separator '/'.</P ><P @@ -17223,9 +17777,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" to be aware of, is that if a directory contains nothing but files that match the veto files parameter (which means that Windows/DOS clients cannot ever see them) is deleted, the veto files within - that directory <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->are automatically deleted</I + that directory <EM +>are automatically deleted</EM > along with it, if the user has UNIX permissions to do so.</P ><P @@ -17252,13 +17805,18 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A >.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >No files or directories are vetoed. - </I + </EM ></P ><P ->Examples:<PRE +>Examples:<TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > ; Veto any files containing the word Security, ; any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the @@ -17269,6 +17827,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ; creates. veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -17301,10 +17862,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" > parameter.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>Default: <EM >No files are vetoed for oplock - grants</I + grants</EM ></P ><P >You might want to do this on files that you know will @@ -17337,9 +17897,8 @@ NAME="VFSOBJECT" with a VFS object. The Samba VFS layer is new to Samba 2.2 and must be enabled at compile time with --with-vfs.</P ><P ->Default : <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no value</I +>Default : <EM +>no value</EM ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -17350,7 +17909,7 @@ NAME="VFSOPTIONS" ><DD ><P >This parameter allows parameters to be passed - to the vfs layer at initialisation time. The Samba VFS layer + to the vfs layer at initialization time. The Samba VFS layer is new to Samba 2.2 and must be enabled at compile time with --with-vfs. See also <A HREF="#VFSOBJECT" @@ -17362,9 +17921,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></A >.</P ><P ->Default : <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->no value</I +>Default : <EM +>no value</EM ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -17378,9 +17936,8 @@ NAME="VOLUME" returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a particular volume label.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->the name of the share</I +>Default: <EM +>the name of the share</EM ></P ></DD ><DT @@ -17412,9 +17969,8 @@ NAME="WINBINDCACHETIME" >winbind cache time</DT ><DD ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0.</P ><P @@ -17439,9 +17995,8 @@ NAME="WINBINDGID" >winbind gid</DT ><DD ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0.</P ><P @@ -17451,12 +18006,12 @@ HREF="winbindd.8.html" TARGET="_top" > winbindd(8)</A > daemon. This range of group ids should have no - existing local or nis groups within it as strange conflicts can + existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->winbind gid = <empty string> +>winbind gid = <empty string> </B ></P ><P @@ -17472,9 +18027,8 @@ NAME="WINBINDSEPARATOR" >winbind separator</DT ><DD ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0.</P ><P @@ -17518,9 +18072,8 @@ NAME="WINBINDUID" >winbind uid</DT ><DD ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > this parameter is only available in Samba 3.0.</P ><P @@ -17530,12 +18083,12 @@ HREF="winbindd.8.html" TARGET="_top" > winbindd(8)</A > daemon. This range of ids should have no - existing local or nis users within it as strange conflicts can + existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->winbind uid = <empty string> +>winbind uid = <empty string> </B ></P ><P @@ -17579,14 +18132,14 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ></LI ><LI ><P ->The second argument is the netbios name. If the +>The second argument is the NetBIOS name. If the name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called. Legal names contain only letters, digits, hyphens, underscores and periods.</P ></LI ><LI ><P ->The third argument is the netbios name +>The third argument is the NetBIOS name type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number. </P ></LI ><LI @@ -17650,9 +18203,8 @@ TARGET="_top" >You should point this at your WINS server if you have a multi-subnetted network.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE</I +><EM +>NOTE</EM >. You need to set up Samba to point to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet browsing to work correctly.</P @@ -17663,9 +18215,8 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > in the docs/ directory of your Samba source distribution.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not enabled</I +>Default: <EM +>not enabled</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -17686,15 +18237,20 @@ TARGET="_top" > nmbd(8)</A > process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should - not set this to true unless you have a multi-subnetted network and + not set this to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> unless you have a multi-subnetted network and you wish a particular <B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmbd</B > to be your WINS server. - Note that you should <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NEVER</I -> set this to true + Note that you should <EM +>NEVER</EM +> set this to <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>true</TT +> on more than one machine in your network.</P ><P >Default: <B @@ -17720,9 +18276,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > setting.</P ><P ->Default: <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->set at compile time to WORKGROUP</I +>Default: <EM +>set at compile time to WORKGROUP</EM ></P ><P >Example: <B @@ -17756,9 +18311,8 @@ NAME="WRITECACHESIZE" ><P >If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file - (it does <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->not</I + (it does <EM +>not</EM > do this for non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible. @@ -17768,7 +18322,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" within it.</P ><P >This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more - efficient write size for RAID disks (ie. writes may be tuned to + efficient write size for RAID disks (i.e. writes may be tuned to be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free memory for userspace programs.</P @@ -17825,7 +18379,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->write list = <empty string> +>write list = <empty string> </B ></P ><P @@ -17860,7 +18414,7 @@ NAME="WRITERAW" ><DD ><P >This parameter controls whether or not the server - will support raw writes SMB's when transferring data from clients. + will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients. You should never need to change this parameter.</P ><P >Default: <B @@ -17896,9 +18450,8 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" CLASS="COMMAND" >printable = yes</B >) - will <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->ALWAYS</I + will <EM +>ALWAYS</EM > allow writing to the directory (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations.</P ><P @@ -17913,7 +18466,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN5654" +NAME="AEN5830" ></A ><H2 >WARNINGS</H2 @@ -17943,7 +18496,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN5660" +NAME="AEN5836" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 @@ -17954,7 +18507,7 @@ NAME="AEN5660" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN5663" +NAME="AEN5839" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -18033,7 +18586,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN5683" +NAME="AEN5859" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbcacls.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbcacls.1.html index 36f570f2a0a..637720fa6ba 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbcacls.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbcacls.1.html @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->nmblookup</B +>smbcacls</B > {//server/share} {filename} [-U username] [-A acls] [-M acls] [-D acls] [-S acls] [-C name] [-G name] [-n] [-h]</P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -52,18 +52,24 @@ TARGET="_top" > Samba</A > suite.</P ><P ->The smbcacls program manipulates NT Access Control Lists +>The <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbcacls</B +> program manipulates NT Access Control Lists (ACLs) on SMB file shares. </P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN27" +NAME="AEN28" ></A ><H2 >OPTIONS</H2 ><P ->The following options are available to the smbcacls program. +>The following options are available to the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbcacls</B +> program. The format of ACLs is described in the section ACL FORMAT </P ><P ></P @@ -90,7 +96,7 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" >-D acls</DT ><DD ><P ->Delete any ACLs specfied on the command line. +>Delete any ACLs specified on the command line. An error will be printed for each ACL specified that was not already present in the ACL list. </P ></DD @@ -175,7 +181,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN73" +NAME="AEN75" ></A ><H2 >ACL FORMAT</H2 @@ -183,14 +189,23 @@ NAME="AEN73" >The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by either commas or newlines. An ACL entry is one of the following: </P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > -REVISION:<revision number> -OWNER:<sid or name> -GROUP:<sid or name> -ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask> +REVISION:<revision number> +OWNER:<sid or name> +GROUP:<sid or name> +ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask> </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >The revision of the ACL specifies the internal Windows @@ -247,44 +262,38 @@ ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask> ><UL ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->R</I +><EM +>R</EM > - Allow read access </P ></LI ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->W</I +><EM +>W</EM > - Allow write access</P ></LI ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->X</I +><EM +>X</EM > - Execute permission on the object</P ></LI ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->D</I +><EM +>D</EM > - Delete the object</P ></LI ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->P</I +><EM +>P</EM > - Change permissions</P ></LI ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->O</I +><EM +>O</EM > - Take ownership</P ></LI ></UL @@ -295,25 +304,22 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><UL ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->READ</I +><EM +>READ</EM > - Equivalent to 'RX' permissions</P ></LI ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->CHANGE</I +><EM +>CHANGE</EM > - Equivalent to 'RXWD' permissions </P ></LI ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->FULL</I +><EM +>FULL</EM > - Equivalent to 'RWXDPO' permissions</P ></LI @@ -322,7 +328,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN123" +NAME="AEN125" ></A ><H2 >EXIT STATUS</H2 @@ -334,8 +340,11 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed. The exit status may be one of the following values. </P ><P ->If the operation succeded, smbcacls returns and exit - status of 0. If smbcacls couldn't connect to the specified server, +>If the operation succeeded, smbcacls returns and exit + status of 0. If <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbcacls</B +> couldn't connect to the specified server, or there was an error getting or setting the ACLs, an exit status of 1 is returned. If there was an error parsing any command line arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned. </P @@ -343,7 +352,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN128" +NAME="AEN131" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 @@ -354,7 +363,7 @@ NAME="AEN128" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN131" +NAME="AEN134" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html index f9cc6085d8d..f38ae269951 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbclient</B -> {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-S server] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L <netbios name>] [-I destinationIP] [-E <terminal code>] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan]</P +> {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-S server] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L <netbios name>] [-I destinationIP] [-E <terminal code>] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -121,8 +121,14 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >-R</I ></TT -> parameter to smbclient or - using the name resolve order parameter in the smb.conf file, +> parameter to <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient</B +> or + using the name resolve order parameter in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file, allowing an administrator to change the order and methods by which server names are looked up. </P ></DD @@ -189,12 +195,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" options. </P ></DD ><DT ->-R <name resolve order></DT +>-R <name resolve order></DT ><DD ><P >This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services and in what order to resolve - host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space separated + host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space-separated string of different name resolution options.</P ><P >The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They @@ -227,7 +233,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/hosts </TT >, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution - is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this + is operating system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT @@ -284,7 +290,10 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >name resolve order </I ></TT -> parameter of the smb.conf file the name resolution +> parameter of the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order. </P ></DD ><DT @@ -339,9 +348,8 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > for a description of how to handle incoming WinPopup messages in Samba. </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM >: Copy WinPopup into the startup group on your WfWg PCs if you want them to always be able to receive messages. </P @@ -352,10 +360,15 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><P >This specifies a NetBIOS scope that smbclient will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details - on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. - NetBIOS scopes are <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->very</I + on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>rfc1001.txt</TT +> and <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>rfc1002.txt</TT +>. + NetBIOS scopes are <EM +>very</EM > rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you communicate with. </P @@ -385,7 +398,12 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" >-d debuglevel</DT ><DD ><P ->debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10, or +><TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>debuglevel</I +></TT +> is an integer from 0 to 10, or the letter 'A'. </P ><P >The default value if this parameter is not specified @@ -402,21 +420,24 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely - cryptic. If debuglevel is set to the letter 'A', then <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" + cryptic. If <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>debuglevel</I +></TT +> is set to the letter 'A', then <EM >all - </I + </EM > debug messages will be printed. This setting - is for developers only (and people who <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->really</I + is for developers only (and people who <EM +>really</EM > want to know how the code works internally). </P ><P >Note that specifying this parameter here will override - the log level parameter in the <B -CLASS="COMMAND" ->smb.conf (5)</B + the log level parameter in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf (5)</TT > file. </P ></DD @@ -433,7 +454,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >-l logfilename</DT ><DD ><P ->If specified, logfilename specifies a base filename +>If specified, <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>logfilename</I +></TT +> specifies a base filename into which operational data from the running client will be logged. </P ><P @@ -459,7 +485,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >-I IP-address</DT ><DD ><P ->IP address is the address of the server to connect to. +><TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>IP address</I +></TT +> is the address of the server to connect to. It should be specified in standard "a.b.c.d" notation. </P ><P >Normally the client would attempt to locate a named @@ -496,35 +527,37 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Sets the SMB username or username and password. If %pass is not specified, The user will be prompted. The client - will first check the USER environment variable, then the + will first check the <TT +CLASS="ENVAR" +>USER</TT +> environment variable, then the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->$LOGNAME</I -></TT -> variable and if either exist, the +CLASS="ENVAR" +>LOGNAME</TT +> variable and if either exists, the string is uppercased. Anything in these variables following a '%' - sign will be treated as the password. If these environmental + sign will be treated as the password. If these environment variables are not found, the username <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" >GUEST</TT > is used. </P ><P ->If the password is not included in these environment - variables (using the %pass syntax), rpcclient will look for +>If the password is not included in these environment + variables (using the %pass syntax), <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>rpcclient</B +> will look for a <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->$PASSWD</I -></TT +CLASS="ENVAR" +>PASSWD</TT > environment variable from which to read the password. </P ><P >A third option is to use a credentials file which contains the plaintext of the username and password. This option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin doesn't - desire to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment + wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment variables. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users. See the <TT @@ -536,10 +569,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><P >Be cautious about including passwords in scripts or in the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->$PASSWD</I -></TT +CLASS="ENVAR" +>PASSWD</TT > environment variable. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the <B @@ -561,11 +592,20 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" password used in the connection. The format of the file is </P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" ->username = <value> -password = <value> +>username = <value> +password = <value> </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict @@ -587,22 +627,23 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" </I ></TT > option may be useful if your NetBIOS names don't - match your tcp/ip dns host names or if you are trying to reach a + match your TCP/IP DNS host names or if you are trying to reach a host on another network. </P ></DD ><DT >-t terminal code</DT ><DD ><P ->This option tells smbclient how to interpret +>This option tells <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient</B +> how to interpret filenames coming from the remote server. Usually Asian language multibyte UNIX implementations use different character sets than - SMB/CIFS servers (<I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->EUC</I -> instead of <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" -> SJIS</I + SMB/CIFS servers (<EM +>EUC</EM +> instead of <EM +> SJIS</EM > for example). Setting this parameter will let <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -768,7 +809,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >r</I ></TT > - Regular expression include - or exclude. Uses regular regular expression matching for + or exclude. Uses regular expression matching for excluding or excluding files if compiled with HAVE_REGEX_H. However this mode can be very slow. If not compiled with HAVE_REGEX_H, does a limited wildcard match on '*' and '?'. @@ -816,9 +857,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></LI ></UL ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Tar Long File Names</I +><EM +>Tar Long File Names</EM ></P ><P ><B @@ -827,30 +867,34 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >'s tar option now supports long file names both on backup and restore. However, the full path name of the file must be less than 1024 bytes. Also, when - a tar archive is created, smbclient's tar option places all + a tar archive is created, <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient</B +>'s tar option places all files in the archive with relative names, not absolute names. </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Tar Filenames</I +><EM +>Tar Filenames</EM ></P ><P >All file names can be given as DOS path names (with '\' as the component separator) or as UNIX path names (with '/' as the component separator). </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Examples</I +><EM +>Examples</EM ></P ><P ->Restore from tar file backup.tar into myshare on mypc +>Restore from tar file <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>backup.tar</TT +> into myshare on mypc (no password on share). </P ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->smbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -Tx backup.tar +>smbclient //mypc/yshare "" -N -Tx backup.tar </B ></P ><P @@ -906,7 +950,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >-c command string</DT ><DD ><P ->command string is a semicolon separated list of +>command string is a semicolon-separated list of commands to be executed instead of prompting from stdin. <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I @@ -931,7 +975,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN297" +NAME="AEN311" ></A ><H2 >OPERATIONS</H2 @@ -941,7 +985,7 @@ NAME="AEN297" ><P ><TT CLASS="PROMPT" ->smb:\> </TT +>smb:\> </TT ></P ><P >The backslash ("\") indicates the current working directory @@ -961,7 +1005,7 @@ CLASS="PROMPT" ><P >Parameters shown in square brackets (e.g., "[parameter]") are optional. If not given, the command will use suitable defaults. Parameters - shown in angle brackets (e.g., "<parameter>") are required. + shown in angle brackets (e.g., "<parameter>") are required. </P ><P >Note that all commands operating on the server are actually @@ -979,7 +1023,12 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" >? [command]</DT ><DD ><P ->If "command" is specified, the ? command will display +>If <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>command</I +></TT +> is specified, the ? command will display a brief informative message about the specified command. If no command is specified, a list of available commands will be displayed. </P @@ -988,7 +1037,12 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" >! [shell command]</DT ><DD ><P ->If "shell command" is specified, the ! +>If <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>shell command</I +></TT +> is specified, the ! command will execute a shell locally and run the specified shell command. If no command is specified, a local shell will be run. </P @@ -1006,18 +1060,28 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" directory on the server will be reported. </P ></DD ><DT ->del <mask></DT +>del <mask></DT ><DD ><P >The client will request that the server attempt - to delete all files matching "mask" from the current working + to delete all files matching <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>mask</I +></TT +> from the current working directory on the server. </P ></DD ><DT ->dir <mask></DT +>dir <mask></DT ><DD ><P ->A list of the files matching "mask" in the current +>A list of the files matching <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>mask</I +></TT +> in the current working directory on the server will be retrieved from the server and displayed. </P ></DD @@ -1029,12 +1093,18 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" from the program. </P ></DD ><DT ->get <remote file name> [local file name]</DT +>get <remote file name> [local file name]</DT ><DD ><P ->Copy the file called "remote file name" from +>Copy the file called <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>remote file name</TT +> from the server to the machine running the client. If specified, name - the local copy "local file name". Note that all transfers in + the local copy <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>local file name</TT +>. Note that all transfers in <B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbclient</B @@ -1051,7 +1121,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >lcd [directory name]</DT ><DD ><P ->If "directory name" is specified, the current +>If <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>directory name</I +></TT +> is specified, the current working directory on the local machine will be changed to the directory specified. This operation will fail if for any reason the specified directory is inaccessible. </P @@ -1073,13 +1148,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" lowercase filenames are the norm on UNIX systems. </P ></DD ><DT ->ls <mask></DT +>ls <mask></DT ><DD ><P >See the dir command above. </P ></DD ><DT ->mask <mask></DT +>mask <mask></DT ><DD ><P >This command allows the user to set up a mask @@ -1105,45 +1180,71 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" mask back to "*" after using the mget or mput commands. </P ></DD ><DT ->md <directory name></DT +>md <directory name></DT ><DD ><P >See the mkdir command. </P ></DD ><DT ->mget <mask></DT +>mget <mask></DT ><DD ><P ->Copy all files matching mask from the server to +>Copy all files matching <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>mask</I +></TT +> from the server to the machine running the client. </P ><P ->Note that mask is interpreted differently during recursive +>Note that <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>mask</I +></TT +> is interpreted differently during recursive operation and non-recursive operation - refer to the recurse and mask commands for more information. Note that all transfers in - smbclient are binary. See also the lowercase command. </P + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient</B +> are binary. See also the lowercase command. </P ></DD ><DT ->mkdir <directory name></DT +>mkdir <directory name></DT ><DD ><P >Create a new directory on the server (user access privileges permitting) with the specified name. </P ></DD ><DT ->mput <mask></DT +>mput <mask></DT ><DD ><P ->Copy all files matching mask in the current working +>Copy all files matching <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>mask</I +></TT +> in the current working directory on the local machine to the current working directory on the server. </P ><P ->Note that mask is interpreted differently during recursive +>Note that <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>mask</I +></TT +> is interpreted differently during recursive operation and non-recursive operation - refer to the recurse and mask - commands for more information. Note that all transfers in smbclient + commands for more information. Note that all transfers in <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient</B +> are binary. </P ></DD ><DT ->print <file name></DT +>print <file name></DT ><DD ><P >Print the specified file from the local machine @@ -1152,7 +1253,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >See also the printmode command.</P ></DD ><DT ->printmode <graphics or text></DT +>printmode <graphics or text></DT ><DD ><P >Set the print mode to suit either binary data @@ -1172,13 +1273,22 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" </P ></DD ><DT ->put <local file name> [remote file name]</DT +>put <local file name> [remote file name]</DT ><DD ><P ->Copy the file called "local file name" from the +>Copy the file called <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>local file name</TT +> from the machine running the client to the server. If specified, - name the remote copy "remote file name". Note that all transfers - in smbclient are binary. See also the lowercase command. + name the remote copy <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>remote file name</TT +>. Note that all transfers + in <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbclient</B +> are binary. See also the lowercase command. </P ></DD ><DT @@ -1195,7 +1305,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >See the exit command. </P ></DD ><DT ->rd <directory name></DT +>rd <directory name></DT ><DD ><P >See the rmdir command. </P @@ -1220,21 +1330,26 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" using the mask command will be ignored. </P ></DD ><DT ->rm <mask></DT +>rm <mask></DT ><DD ><P ->Remove all files matching mask from the current +>Remove all files matching <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>mask</I +></TT +> from the current working directory on the server. </P ></DD ><DT ->rmdir <directory name></DT +>rmdir <directory name></DT ><DD ><P >Remove the specified directory (user access privileges permitting) from the server. </P ></DD ><DT ->tar <c|x>[IXbgNa]</DT +>tar <c|x>[IXbgNa]</DT ><DD ><P >Performs a tar operation - see the <TT @@ -1250,15 +1365,20 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" </P ></DD ><DT ->blocksize <blocksize></DT +>blocksize <blocksize></DT ><DD ><P >Blocksize. Must be followed by a valid (greater than zero) blocksize. Causes tar file to be written out in - blocksize*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks. </P + <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>blocksize</I +></TT +>*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks. </P ></DD ><DT ->tarmode <full|inc|reset|noreset></DT +>tarmode <full|inc|reset|noreset></DT ><DD ><P >Changes tar's behavior with regard to archive @@ -1269,7 +1389,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" read/write share). </P ></DD ><DT ->setmode <filename> <perm=[+|\-]rsha></DT +>setmode <filename> <perm=[+|\-]rsha></DT ><DD ><P >A version of the DOS attrib command to set @@ -1288,7 +1408,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN446" +NAME="AEN478" ></A ><H2 >NOTES</H2 @@ -1309,26 +1429,22 @@ NAME="AEN446" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN451" +NAME="AEN483" ></A ><H2 >ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</H2 ><P >The variable <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->$USER</I -></TT +CLASS="ENVAR" +>USER</TT > may contain the username of the person using the client. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords.</P ><P >The variable <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->$PASSWD</I -></TT +CLASS="ENVAR" +>PASSWD</TT > may contain the password of the person using the client. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support @@ -1337,7 +1453,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN457" +NAME="AEN489" ></A ><H2 >INSTALLATION</H2 @@ -1355,9 +1471,8 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > /usr/samba/bin/</TT > directory, this directory readable by all, writeable only by root. The client program itself should - be executable by all. The client should <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + be executable by all. The client should <EM +>NOT</EM > be setuid or setgid! </P ><P @@ -1369,14 +1484,14 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" CLASS="COMMAND" >smbd(8) </B -> an ordinary user - running that server as a daemon +> as an ordinary user - running that server as a daemon on a user-accessible port (typically any port number over 1024) would provide a suitable test server. </P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN467" +NAME="AEN499" ></A ><H2 >DIAGNOSTICS</H2 @@ -1392,7 +1507,7 @@ NAME="AEN467" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN471" +NAME="AEN503" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 @@ -1403,7 +1518,7 @@ NAME="AEN471" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN474" +NAME="AEN506" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbcontrol.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbcontrol.1.html index c8cb14ccd31..7136d3e981e 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbcontrol.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbcontrol.1.html @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ VLINK="#840084" ALINK="#0000FF" ><H1 ><A -NAME="FINDSMB" +NAME="SMBCONTROL" >smbcontrol</A ></H1 ><DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html index 33af0242e5d..f5ce9b78fd8 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbd</B -> [-D] [-a] [-o] [-P] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-l <log file>] [-p <port number>] [-O <socket option>] [-s <configuration file>]</P +> [-D] [-a] [-o] [-P] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-l <log file>] [-p <port number>] [-O <socket option>] [-s <configuration file>]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -98,12 +98,15 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" can force a reload by sending a SIGHUP to the server. Reloading the configuration file will not affect connections to any service that is already established. Either the user will have to - disconnect from the service, or smbd killed and restarted.</P + disconnect from the service, or <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> killed and restarted.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN35" +NAME="AEN36" ></A ><H2 >OPTIONS</H2 @@ -120,9 +123,12 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" the server to operate as a daemon. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port. Operating the server as a - daemon is the recommended way of running smbd for + daemon is the recommended way of running <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> for servers that provide more than casual use file and - print services. This switch is assumed is <B + print services. This switch is assumed if <B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbd </B @@ -153,7 +159,10 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >-P</DT ><DD ><P ->Passive option. Causes smbd not to +>Passive option. Causes <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> not to send any network traffic out. Used for debugging by the developers only.</P ></DD @@ -178,10 +187,15 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >.</P ></DD ><DT ->-d <debug level></DT +>-d <debug level></DT ><DD ><P ->debuglevel is an integer +><TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>debuglevel</I +></TT +> is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero.</P ><P @@ -214,12 +228,14 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > file.</P ></DD ><DT ->-l <log file></DT +>-l <log file></DT ><DD ><P ->If specified, <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +>If specified, <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I >log file</I +></TT > specifies a log filename into which informational and debug messages from the running server will be logged. The log @@ -240,7 +256,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" file name is specified at compile time.</P ></DD ><DT ->-O <socket options></DT +>-O <socket options></DT ><DD ><P >See the <A @@ -259,10 +275,15 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > file for details.</P ></DD ><DT ->-p <port number></DT +>-p <port number></DT ><DD ><P ->port number is a positive integer +><TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>port number</I +></TT +> is a positive integer value. The default value if this parameter is not specified is 139.</P ><P @@ -285,7 +306,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" in the above situation.</P ></DD ><DT ->-s <configuration file></DT +>-s <configuration file></DT ><DD ><P >The file specified contains the @@ -310,7 +331,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN104" +NAME="AEN109" ></A ><H2 >FILES</H2 @@ -408,7 +429,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN137" +NAME="AEN142" ></A ><H2 >LIMITATIONS</H2 @@ -427,7 +448,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN141" +NAME="AEN146" ></A ><H2 >ENVIRONMENTVARIABLES</H2 @@ -437,12 +458,18 @@ NAME="AEN141" CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ><DL ><DT ->PRINTER</DT +><TT +CLASS="ENVAR" +>PRINTER</TT +></DT ><DD ><P >If no printer name is specified to printable services, most systems will use the value of - this variable (or lp if this variable is + this variable (or <TT +CLASS="CONSTANT" +>lp</TT +> if this variable is not defined) as the name of the printer to use. This is not specific to the server, however.</P ></DD @@ -452,7 +479,7 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN148" +NAME="AEN155" ></A ><H2 >INSTALLATION</H2 @@ -470,10 +497,16 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" program itself should be executable by all, as users may wish to run the server themselves (in which case it will of course run with their privileges). The server should NOT be setuid. On some - systems it may be worthwhile to make smbd setgid to an empty group. + systems it may be worthwhile to make <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> setgid to an empty group. This is because some systems may have a security hole where daemon processes that become a user can be attached to with a debugger. - Making the smbd file setgid to an empty group may prevent + Making the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> file setgid to an empty group may prevent this hole from being exploited. This security hole and the suggested fix has only been confirmed on old versions (pre-kernel 2.0) of Linux at the time this was written. It is possible that this hole only @@ -568,20 +601,18 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN179" +NAME="AEN188" ></A ><H2 >RUNNING THE SERVER AS A DAEMON</H2 ><P >To run the server as a daemon from the command - line, simply put the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->-D</I + line, simply put the <EM +>-D</EM > option on the command line. There is no need to place an ampersand at - the end of the command line - the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->-D</I + the end of the command line - the <EM +>-D</EM > option causes the server to detach itself from the tty anyway.</P @@ -617,16 +648,15 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" as a single space or TAB character.)</P ><P >If the options used at compile time are appropriate for - your system, all parameters except <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->-D</I + your system, all parameters except <EM +>-D</EM > may be omitted. See the section OPTIONS above.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN192" +NAME="AEN201" ></A ><H2 >RUNNING THE SERVER ON REQUEST</H2 @@ -635,7 +665,10 @@ NAME="AEN192" CLASS="COMMAND" >inetd </B ->, you can arrange to have the smbd server started +>, you can arrange to have the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> server started whenever a process attempts to connect to it. This requires several changes to the startup files on the host machine. If you are experimenting as an ordinary user rather than as root, you will @@ -727,6 +760,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" >Lastly, edit the configuration file to provide suitable services. To start with, the following two services should be all you need:</P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="SCREEN" > <TT @@ -742,6 +781,9 @@ CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" </TT > </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ><P >This will allow you to connect to your home directory and print to any printer supported by the host (user privileges @@ -750,7 +792,52 @@ CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN223" +NAME="AEN233" +></A +><H2 +>PAM INTERACTION</H2 +><P +>Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext + password), for account checking (is this account disabled?) and for + session management. The degree too which samba supports PAM is restricted + by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the + <A +HREF="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESRICTIONS" +TARGET="_top" +>obey pam restricions</A +> + smb.conf paramater. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: + </P +><P +></P +><UL +><LI +><P +><EM +>Account Validation</EM +>: All acccesses to a + samba server are checked + against PAM to see if the account is vaild, not disabled and is permitted to + login at this time. This also applies to encrypted logins. + </P +></LI +><LI +><P +><EM +>Session Management</EM +>: When not using share + level secuirty, users must pass PAM's session checks before access + is granted. Note however, that this is bypassed in share level secuirty. + Note also that some older pam configuration files may need a line + added for session support. + </P +></LI +></UL +></DIV +><DIV +CLASS="REFSECT1" +><A +NAME="AEN244" ></A ><H2 >TESTING THE INSTALLATION</H2 @@ -764,8 +851,18 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > will reread their configuration tables if they receive a HUP signal.</P ><P ->If your machine's name is fred and your - name is mary, you should now be able to connect +>If your machine's name is <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>fred</I +></TT +> and your + name is <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>mary</I +></TT +>, you should now be able to connect to the service <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >\\fred\mary</TT @@ -798,7 +895,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN235" +NAME="AEN258" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 @@ -809,7 +906,7 @@ NAME="AEN235" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN238" +NAME="AEN261" ></A ><H2 >DIAGNOSTICS</H2 @@ -832,46 +929,63 @@ NAME="AEN238" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN243" +NAME="AEN266" ></A ><H2 >SIGNALS</H2 ><P ->Sending the smbd a SIGHUP will cause it to - re-load its <TT +>Sending the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> a SIGHUP will cause it to + reload its <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >smb.conf</TT > configuration file within a short period of time.</P ><P ->To shut down a users smbd process it is recommended +>To shut down a user's <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> process it is recommended that <B CLASS="COMMAND" >SIGKILL (-9)</B -> <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I +> <EM +>NOT</EM > be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the shared memory area in an inconsistent state. The safe way to terminate - an smbd is to send it a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for + an <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> is to send it a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for it to die on its own.</P ><P ->The debug log level of smbd may be raised by sending +>The debug log level of <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> may be raised by sending it a SIGUSR1 (<B CLASS="COMMAND" ->kill -USR1 <smbd-pid></B +>kill -USR1 <smbd-pid></B >) and lowered by sending it a SIGUSR2 (<B CLASS="COMMAND" ->kill -USR2 <smbd-pid> +>kill -USR2 <smbd-pid> </B >). This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level.</P ><P >Note that as the signal handlers send a debug write, - they are not re-entrant in smbd. This you should wait until - smbd is in a state of waiting for an incoming smb before + they are not re-entrant in <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +>. This you should wait until + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbd</B +> is in a state of waiting for an incoming SMB before issuing them. It is possible to make the signal handlers safe by un-blocking the signals before the select call and re-blocking them after, however this would affect performance.</P @@ -879,7 +993,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN254" +NAME="AEN283" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -945,7 +1059,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN271" +NAME="AEN300" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html index 88a28b8a696..6546b7c7070 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbmnt</B -> {mount-point} [-s <share>] [-r] [-u <uid>] [-g <gid>] [-f <mask>] [-d <mask>] [-o <options>]</P +> {mount-point} [-s <share>] [-r] [-u <uid>] [-g <gid>] [-f <mask>] [-d <mask>] [-o <options>]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" >smbmnt</B > is meant to be installed setuid root - so that normal users can mount their smb shares. It checks + so that normal users can mount their SMB shares. It checks whether the user has write permissions on the mount point and then mounts the directory.</P ><P @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ><DD ><P > list of options that are passed as-is to smbfs, if this - command is run on a 2.4 or higher linux kernel. + command is run on a 2.4 or higher Linux kernel. </P ></DD ></DL diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html index ba07f08ed47..721397312ae 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html @@ -60,21 +60,32 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > command when using the "-t smb" option. The kernel must support the smbfs filesystem. </P ><P ->Options to smbmount are specified as a comma separated +>Options to <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbmount</B +> are specified as a comma-separated list of key=value pairs. It is possible to send options other than those listed here, assuming that smbfs supports them. If you get mount failures, check your kernel log for errors on unknown options.</P ><P ->smbmount is a daemon. After mounting it keeps running until +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbmount</B +> is a daemon. After mounting it keeps running until the mounted smbfs is umounted. It will log things that happen when in daemon mode using the "machine name" smbmount, so - typically this output will end up in log.smbmount. The - smbmount process may also be called mount.smbfs.</P + typically this output will end up in <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>log.smbmount</TT +>. The + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>smbmount</B +> process may also be called mount.smbfs.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOTE:</I +><EM +>NOTE:</EM > <B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbmount</B @@ -92,7 +103,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN27" +NAME="AEN31" ></A ><H2 >OPTIONS</H2 @@ -102,7 +113,7 @@ NAME="AEN27" CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ><DL ><DT ->username=<arg></DT +>username=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >specifies the username to connect as. If @@ -115,7 +126,7 @@ CLASS="ENVAR" to be specified as part of the username.</P ></DD ><DT ->password=<arg></DT +>password=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >specifies the SMB password. If this @@ -130,36 +141,55 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > will prompt for a passeword, unless the guest option is given. </P +><P +> Note that password which contain the arguement delimiter + character (i.e. a comma ',') will failed to be parsed correctly + on the command line. However, the same password defined + in the PASSWD environment variable or a credentials file (see + below) will be read correctly. + </P ></DD ><DT ->credentials=<filename></DT +>credentials=<filename></DT ><DD ><P >specifies a file that contains a username and/or password. The format of the file is:</P ><P -> <PRE +> <TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="90%" +><TR +><TD +><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" -> username = <value> - password = <value> +> username = <value> + password = <value> </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE > </P ><P >This is preferred over having passwords in plaintext in a - shared file, such as /etc/fstab. Be sure to protect any + shared file, such as <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/etc/fstab</TT +>. Be sure to protect any credentials file properly. </P ></DD ><DT ->netbiosname=<arg></DT +>netbiosname=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >sets the source NetBIOS name. It defaults to the local hostname. </P ></DD ><DT ->uid=<arg></DT +>uid=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >sets the uid that will own all files on @@ -168,7 +198,7 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" </P ></DD ><DT ->gid=<arg></DT +>gid=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >sets the gid that will own all files on @@ -177,14 +207,14 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" gid. </P ></DD ><DT ->port=<arg></DT +>port=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >sets the remote SMB port number. The default is 139. </P ></DD ><DT ->fmask=<arg></DT +>fmask=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >sets the file mask. This determines the @@ -192,35 +222,35 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" The default is based on the current umask. </P ></DD ><DT ->dmask=<arg></DT +>dmask=<arg></DT ><DD ><P ->sets the directory mask. This deterines the +>sets the directory mask. This determines the permissions that remote directories have in the local filesystem. The default is based on the current umask. </P ></DD ><DT ->debug=<arg></DT +>debug=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >sets the debug level. This is useful for tracking down SMB connection problems. </P ></DD ><DT ->ip=<arg></DT +>ip=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >sets the destination host or IP address. </P ></DD ><DT ->workgroup=<arg></DT +>workgroup=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >sets the workgroup on the destination </P ></DD ><DT ->sockopt=<arg></DT +>sockopt=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >sets the TCP socket options. See the <A @@ -240,7 +270,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" </P ></DD ><DT ->scope=<arg></DT +>scope=<arg></DT ><DD ><P >sets the NetBIOS scope </P @@ -264,17 +294,17 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >mount read-write </P ></DD ><DT ->iocharset=<arg></DT +>iocharset=<arg></DT ><DD ><P -> sets the charset used by the linux side for codepage +> sets the charset used by the Linux side for codepage to charset translations (NLS). Argument should be the name of a charset, like iso8859-1. (Note: only kernel 2.4.0 or later) </P ></DD ><DT ->codepage=<arg></DT +>codepage=<arg></DT ><DD ><P > sets the codepage the server uses. See the iocharset @@ -283,7 +313,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" </P ></DD ><DT ->ttl=<arg></DT +>ttl=<arg></DT ><DD ><P > how long a directory listing is cached in milliseconds @@ -303,7 +333,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN119" +NAME="AEN125" ></A ><H2 >ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</H2 @@ -330,12 +360,12 @@ CLASS="ENVAR" >PASSWD_FILE</TT > may contain the pathname of a file to read the password from. A single line of input is - read and used as password.</P + read and used as the password.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN127" +NAME="AEN133" ></A ><H2 >BUGS</H2 @@ -355,7 +385,7 @@ NAME="AEN127" ></LI ></UL ><P ->Note that the typical response to a bugreport is suggestion +>Note that the typical response to a bug report is suggestion to try the latest version first. So please try doing that first, and always include which versions you use of relevant software when reporting bugs (minimum: samba, kernel, distribution)</P @@ -363,7 +393,7 @@ NAME="AEN127" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN134" +NAME="AEN140" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -374,7 +404,7 @@ NAME="AEN134" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN137" +NAME="AEN143" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html index 4ec7b7c86a3..1f862b66114 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html @@ -101,9 +101,9 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" >Lanman Password Hash</DT ><DD ><P ->This is the LANMAN hash of the users password, +>This is the LANMAN hash of the user's password, encoded as 32 hex digits. The LANMAN hash is created by DES - encrypting a well known string with the users password as the + encrypting a well known string with the user's password as the DES key. This is the same password used by Windows 95/98 machines. Note that this password hash is regarded as weak as it is vulnerable to dictionary attacks and if two users choose the @@ -111,27 +111,24 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" is not "salted" as the UNIX password is). If the user has a null password this field will contain the characters "NO PASSWORD" as the start of the hex string. If the hex string is equal to - 32 'X' characters then the users account is marked as + 32 'X' characters then the user's account is marked as <TT CLASS="CONSTANT" >disabled</TT > and the user will not be able to log onto the Samba server. </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->WARNING !!</I +><EM +>WARNING !!</EM > Note that, due to the challenge-response nature of the SMB/CIFS authentication protocol, anyone with a knowledge of this password hash will be able to impersonate the user on the network. For this - reason these hashes are known as <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" + reason these hashes are known as <EM >plain text - equivalents</I -> and must <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + equivalents</EM +> and must <EM +>NOT</EM > be made available to anyone but the root user. To protect these passwords the smbpasswd file is placed in a directory with read and @@ -143,33 +140,30 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" >NT Password Hash</DT ><DD ><P ->This is the Windows NT hash of the users +>This is the Windows NT hash of the user's password, encoded as 32 hex digits. The Windows NT hash is - created by taking the users password as represented in + created by taking the user's password as represented in 16-bit, little-endian UNICODE and then applying the MD4 (internet rfc1321) hashing algorithm to it. </P ><P >This password hash is considered more secure than - the Lanman Password Hash as it preserves the case of the + the LANMAN Password Hash as it preserves the case of the password and uses a much higher quality hashing algorithm. However, it is still the case that if two users choose the same password this entry will be identical (i.e. the password is not "salted" as the UNIX password is). </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->WARNING !!</I +><EM +>WARNING !!</EM >. Note that, due to the challenge-response nature of the SMB/CIFS authentication protocol, anyone with a knowledge of this password hash will be able to impersonate the user on the network. For this - reason these hashes are known as <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" + reason these hashes are known as <EM >plain text - equivalents</I -> and must <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I + equivalents</EM +> and must <EM +>NOT</EM > be made available to anyone but the root user. To protect these passwords the smbpasswd file is placed in a directory with read and @@ -192,9 +186,8 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><UL ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->U</I +><EM +>U</EM > - This means this is a "User" account, i.e. an ordinary user. Only User and Workstation Trust accounts are currently supported @@ -202,11 +195,10 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ></LI ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->N</I +><EM +>N</EM > - This means the - account has no password (the passwords in the fields Lanman + account has no password (the passwords in the fields LANMAN Password Hash and NT Password Hash are ignored). Note that this will only allow users to log on with no password if the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -225,18 +217,16 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ></LI ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->D</I +><EM +>D</EM > - This means the account is disabled and no SMB/CIFS logins will be allowed for this user. </P ></LI ><LI ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->W</I +><EM +>W</EM > - This means this account is a "Workstation Trust" account. This kind of account is used in the Samba PDC code stream to allow Windows NT Workstations diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html index bb3eb7ca47d..f48754163b9 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ NAME="AEN5" ></A ><H2 >Name</H2 ->smbpasswd -- change a users SMB password</DIV +>smbpasswd -- change a user's SMB password</DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV" ><A @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbpasswd</B -> [-a] [-x] [-d] [-e] [-D debuglevel] [-n] [-r <remote machine>] [-R <name resolve order>] [-m] [-j DOMAIN] [-U username] [-h] [-s] [username]</P +> [-a] [-x] [-d] [-e] [-D debuglevel] [-n] [-r <remote machine>] [-R <name resolve order>] [-m] [-j DOMAIN] [-U username] [-h] [-s] [username]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -53,16 +53,15 @@ TARGET="_top" > suite.</P ><P >The smbpasswd program has several different - functions, depending on whether it is run by the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->root</I + functions, depending on whether it is run by the <EM +>root</EM > user or not. When run as a normal user it allows the user to change the password used for their SMB sessions on any machines that store SMB passwords. </P ><P >By default (when run with no arguments) it will attempt to - change the current users SMB password on the local machine. This is + change the current user's SMB password on the local machine. This is similar to the way the <B CLASS="COMMAND" >passwd(1)</B @@ -71,9 +70,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" >smbpasswd</B > differs from how the passwd program works - however in that it is not <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->setuid root</I + however in that it is not <EM +>setuid root</EM > but works in a client-server mode and communicates with a locally running <B @@ -88,12 +86,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > file. </P ><P >When run by an ordinary user with no options. smbpasswd - will prompt them for their old smb password and then ask them + will prompt them for their old SMB password and then ask them for their new password twice, to ensure that the new password was typed correctly. No passwords will be echoed on the screen - whilst being typed. If you have a blank smb password (specified by + whilst being typed. If you have a blank SMB password (specified by the string "NO PASSWORD" in the smbpasswd file) then just press - the <Enter> key when asked for your old password. </P + the <Enter> key when asked for your old password. </P ><P >smbpasswd can also be used by a normal user to change their SMB password on remote machines, such as Windows NT Primary Domain @@ -127,7 +125,7 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" ><P >This option specifies that the username following should be added to the local smbpasswd file, with the - new password typed (type <Enter> for the old password). This + new password typed (type <Enter> for the old password). This option is ignored if the username following already exists in the smbpasswd file and it is treated like a regular change password command. Note that the user to be added must already exist @@ -169,7 +167,7 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT" will fail. </P ><P >If the smbpasswd file is in the 'old' format (pre-Samba 2.0 - format) there is no space in the users password entry to write + format) there is no space in the user's password entry to write this information and so the user is disabled by writing 'X' characters into the password space in the smbpasswd file. See <B CLASS="COMMAND" @@ -219,7 +217,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DD ><P ><TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" ><I >debuglevel</I ></TT @@ -303,9 +301,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" copy of the user account database and will not allow the password change).</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Note</I +><EM +>Note</EM > that Windows 95/98 do not have a real password database so it is not possible to change passwords specifying a Win95/98 machine as remote machine target. </P @@ -503,7 +500,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DD ><P >This option causes smbpasswd to be silent (i.e. - not issue prompts) and to read it's old and new passwords from + not issue prompts) and to read its old and new passwords from standard input, rather than from <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/dev/tty</TT @@ -519,9 +516,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DD ><P >This specifies the username for all of the - <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->root only</I + <EM +>root only</EM > options to operate on. Only root can specify this parameter as only root has the permission needed to modify attributes directly in the local smbpasswd file. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbsh.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbsh.1.html index 1264e241ba4..3f1b704d388 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbsh.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbsh.1.html @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" CLASS="COMMAND" >rcp</B >. You must use a - shell that is dynmanically linked in order for <B + shell that is dynamically linked in order for <B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbsh</B > @@ -83,6 +83,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" that authenticate you to the machine running the Windows NT operating system.</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" > <TT @@ -113,6 +119,9 @@ CLASS="USERINPUT" ></TT > </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Any dynamically linked command you execute from @@ -127,7 +136,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > will show all the machines in your workgroup. The command <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->ls /smb/<machine-name></B +>ls /smb/<machine-name></B > will show the share names for that machine. You could then, for example, use the <B CLASS="COMMAND" diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbspool.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbspool.8.html index 321cc5d8d62..254abe9a9de 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbspool.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbspool.8.html @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ VLINK="#840084" ALINK="#0000FF" ><H1 ><A -NAME="FINDSMB" +NAME="SMBSPOOL" >smbspool</A ></H1 ><DIV @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ NAME="AEN5" ></A ><H2 >Name</H2 ->nmblookup -- send print file to an SMB printer</DIV +>smbspool -- send print file to an SMB printer</DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV" ><A @@ -58,9 +58,8 @@ TARGET="_top" Printing System, but you can use smbspool with any printing system or from a program or script.</P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->DEVICE URI</I +><EM +>DEVICE URI</EM ></P ><P >smbspool specifies the destination using a Uniform Resource @@ -90,10 +89,8 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><P >smbspool tries to get the URI from argv[0]. If argv[0] contains the name of the program then it looks in the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I -> DEVICE_URI</I -></TT +CLASS="ENVAR" +> DEVICE_URI</TT > environment variable.</P ><P >Programs using the <B @@ -102,10 +99,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > functions can pass the URI in argv[0], while shell scripts must set the <TT -CLASS="PARAMETER" -><I ->DEVICE_URI</I -></TT +CLASS="ENVAR" +>DEVICE_URI</TT > environment variable prior to running smbspool.</P ></DIV diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html index b31437afea3..1d3dc9f952a 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ VLINK="#840084" ALINK="#0000FF" ><H1 ><A -NAME="FINDSMB" +NAME="SMBSTATUS" >smbstatus</A ></H1 ><DIV @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >smbstatus</B -> [-P] [-b] [-d] [-L] [-p] [-S] [-s <configuration file>] [-u <username>]</P +> [-P] [-b] [-d] [-L] [-p] [-S] [-s <configuration file>] [-u <username>]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >causes smbstatus to only list shares.</P ></DD ><DT ->-s <configuration file></DT +>-s <configuration file></DT ><DD ><P >The default configuration file name is @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > for more information.</P ></DD ><DT ->-u <username></DT +>-u <username></DT ><DD ><P >selects information relevant to diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html index 5e13ef3577c..47c41a015a9 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html @@ -253,9 +253,8 @@ NAME="AEN106" ><H2 >DIAGNOSTICS</H2 ><P ->See the <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->DIAGNOSTICS</I +>See the <EM +>DIAGNOSTICS</EM > section for the <A HREF="smbclient.1.html" diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html index 0a26e720945..68929fd5f91 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ NAME="AEN12" CLASS="COMMAND" >smbumount</B > has - been written to give normal linux-users more control over their + been written to give normal Linux users more control over their resources. It is safe to install this program suid root, because only the user who has mounted a filesystem is allowed to unmount it again. For root it is not necessary to use smbumount. The normal umount diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/swat.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/swat.8.html index f91366b1d6f..386fe5bc7af 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/swat.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/swat.8.html @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><P ><B CLASS="COMMAND" ->nmblookup</B -> [-s <smb config file>] [-a]</P +>swat</B +> [-s <smb config file>] [-a]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -68,15 +68,24 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" CLASS="COMMAND" >swat</B > configuration page has help links - to all the configurable options in the smb.conf file allowing an + to all the configurable options in the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file allowing an administrator to easily look up the effects of any change. </P ><P ->swat is run from inetd </P +><B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat</B +> is run from <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>inetd</B +> </P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN23" +NAME="AEN26" ></A ><H2 >OPTIONS</H2 @@ -95,7 +104,10 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST" CLASS="COMMAND" >smbd </B -> server. This is the file that swat will modify. +> server. This is the file that <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat</B +> will modify. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide. @@ -110,13 +122,18 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DD ><P >This option disables authentication and puts - swat in demo mode. In that mode anyone will be able to modify - the smb.conf file. </P + <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>swat</B +> in demo mode. In that mode anyone will be able to modify + the <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> file. </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" +><EM >Do NOT enable this option on a production - server. </I + server. </EM ></P ></DD ></DL @@ -125,7 +142,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN38" +NAME="AEN44" ></A ><H2 >INSTALLATION</H2 @@ -159,7 +176,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN50" +NAME="AEN56" ></A ><H3 >Inetd Installation</H3 @@ -172,7 +189,10 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/services</TT > - to enable SWAT to be launched via inetd.</P + to enable SWAT to be launched via <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>inetd</B +>.</P ><P >In <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -229,15 +249,15 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT2" ><A -NAME="AEN71" +NAME="AEN78" ></A ><H3 >Launching</H3 ><P ->To launch swat just run your favorite web browser and +>To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and point it at "http://localhost:901/".</P ><P ->Note that you can attach to swat from any IP connected +>Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent in the clear over the wire. </P @@ -246,7 +266,7 @@ NAME="AEN71" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN75" +NAME="AEN82" ></A ><H2 >FILES</H2 @@ -304,7 +324,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN96" +NAME="AEN103" ></A ><H2 >WARNINGS</H2 @@ -336,7 +356,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN104" +NAME="AEN111" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 @@ -347,7 +367,7 @@ NAME="AEN104" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN107" +NAME="AEN114" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -374,7 +394,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN114" +NAME="AEN121" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html index d1a1e4333a5..bae907c687a 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >testparm</B -> [-s] [-h] [-L <servername>] {config filename} [hostname hostIP]</P +> [-s] [-h] [-L <servername>] {config filename} [hostname hostIP]</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -68,9 +68,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" </B > will successfully load the configuration file.</P ><P ->Note that this is <I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->NOT</I +>Note that this is <EM +>NOT</EM > a guarantee that the services specified in the configuration file will be available or will operate as expected. </P @@ -126,7 +125,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" >-L servername</DT ><DD ><P ->Sets the value of the %L macro to servername. +>Sets the value of the %L macro to <TT +CLASS="REPLACEABLE" +><I +>servername</I +></TT +>. This is useful for testing include files specified with the %L macro. </P ></DD @@ -147,7 +151,10 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DD ><P >If this parameter and the following are - specified, then testparm will examine the <TT + specified, then <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>testparm</B +> will examine the <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" ><I >hosts @@ -185,7 +192,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN64" +NAME="AEN66" ></A ><H2 >FILES</H2 @@ -214,13 +221,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN73" +NAME="AEN75" ></A ><H2 >DIAGNOSTICS</H2 ><P >The program will issue a message saying whether the - configuration file loaded OK or not. This message may be preceeded by + configuration file loaded OK or not. This message may be preceded by errors and warnings if the file did not load. If the file was loaded OK, the program then dumps all known service details to stdout. </P @@ -228,7 +235,7 @@ NAME="AEN73" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN76" +NAME="AEN78" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 @@ -239,7 +246,7 @@ NAME="AEN76" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN79" +NAME="AEN81" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -265,7 +272,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN86" +NAME="AEN88" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/testprns.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/testprns.1.html index 94ab41c98d4..4929415da02 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/testprns.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/testprns.1.html @@ -163,11 +163,11 @@ NAME="AEN48" >DIAGNOSTICS</H2 ><P >If a printer is found to be valid, the message - "Printer name <printername> is valid" will be + "Printer name <printername> is valid" will be displayed. </P ><P >If a printer is found to be invalid, the message - "Printer name <printername> is not valid" will be + "Printer name <printername> is not valid" will be displayed. </P ><P >All messages that would normally be logged during diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html index 2787f514c07..129d0459e1f 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html @@ -243,13 +243,16 @@ NAME="AEN88" CLASS="COMMAND" >winbindd(8) </B -> daemon is not working wbinfo will always return +> daemon is not working <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>wbinfo</B +> will always return failure. </P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN92" +NAME="AEN93" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 @@ -261,7 +264,7 @@ NAME="AEN92" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN95" +NAME="AEN96" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -279,7 +282,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN100" +NAME="AEN101" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html b/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html index 2f023561edc..447069f17aa 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ <HTML ><HEAD ><TITLE ->Unifed Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TITLE +>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TITLE ><META NAME="GENERATOR" CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ CLASS="TITLEPAGE" CLASS="TITLE" ><A NAME="AEN1" ->Unifed Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A +>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A ></H1 ><HR></DIV ><DIV @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS" >winbind </I >, a component of the Samba suite of programs as a - solution to the unied logon problem. Winbind uses a UNIX implementation + solution to the unified logon problem. Winbind uses a UNIX implementation of Microsoft RPC calls, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and the Name Service Switch to allow Windows NT domain users to appear and operate as UNIX users on a UNIX machine. This paper describes the winbind @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ NAME="AEN7" can lead to synchronization problems between the UNIX and Windows systems and confusion for users.</P ><P ->We divide the unifed logon problem for UNIX machines into +>We divide the unified logon problem for UNIX machines into three smaller problems:</P ><P ></P @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ NAME="AEN7" information on the UNIX machines and without creating additional tasks for the system administrator when maintaining users and groups on either system. The winbind system provides a simple - and elegant solution to all three components of the unifed logon + and elegant solution to all three components of the unified logon problem.</P ></DIV ><DIV @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ NAME="AEN40" >The Name Service Switch, or NSS, is a feature that is present in many UNIX operating systems. It allows system information such as hostnames, mail aliases and user information - to be resolved from dierent sources. For example, a standalone + to be resolved from different sources. For example, a standalone UNIX workstation may resolve system information from a series of flat files stored on the local lesystem. A networked workstation may first attempt to resolve system information from local files, @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" for a line which matches the service type being requested, for example the "passwd" service type is used when user or group names are looked up. This config line species which implementations - of that service should be tried andin what order. If the passwd + of that service should be tried and in what order. If the passwd config line is:</P ><P ><B @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ NAME="AEN56" >Pluggable Authentication Modules, also known as PAM, is a system for abstracting authentication and authorization technologies. With a PAM module it is possible to specify different - authentication methods for dierent system applications without + authentication methods for different system applications without having to recompile these applications. PAM is also useful for implementing a particular policy for authorization. For example, a system administrator may only allow console logins from users @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ NAME="AEN56" this change take eect directly on the Primary Domain Controller. </P ><P ->PAM is congured by providing control files in the directory +>PAM is configured by providing control files in the directory <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/etc/pam.d/</TT @@ -350,11 +350,11 @@ NAME="AEN64" ></H2 ><P >When a user or group is created under Windows NT - is it allocated a numerical relative identier (RID). This is - slightly dierent to UNIX which has a range of numbers which are + is it allocated a numerical relative identifier (RID). This is + slightly different to UNIX which has a range of numbers which are used to identify users, and the same range in which to identify groups. It is winbind's job to convert RIDs to UNIX id numbers and - vice versa. When winbind is congured it is given part of the UNIX + vice versa. When winbind is configured it is given part of the UNIX user id space and a part of the UNIX group id space in which to store Windows NT users and groups. If a Windows NT user is resolved for the first time, it is allocated the next UNIX id from @@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ NAME="AEN68" by NT domain controllers. User or group information returned by a PDC is cached by winbind along with a sequence number also returned by the PDC. This sequence number is incremented by - Windows NT whenever any user or group information is modied. If + Windows NT whenever any user or group information is modified. If a cached entry has expired, the sequence number is requested from the PDC and compared against the sequence number of the cached entry. If the sequence numbers do not match, then the cached information @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" CLASS="COMMAND" >winbindd(8)</B > man page which will provide you - with conguration information and give you sample conguration files. + with configuration information and give you sample configuration files. You may also wish to update the main Samba daemons smbd and nmbd) with a more recent development release, such as the recently announced Samba 2.2 alpha release.</P diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html index a98b7a28640..125daccf34c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8" ><B CLASS="COMMAND" >nmblookup</B -> [-d debuglevel] [-i] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] {name}</P +> [-d debuglevel] [-i] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] {name}</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" @@ -70,7 +70,10 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" of user and group ids specified by the administrator of the Samba system.</P ><P ->The service provided by winbindd is called `winbind' and +>The service provided by <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>winbindd</B +> is called `winbind' and can be used to resolve user and group information from a Windows NT server. The service can also provide authentication services via an associated PAM module. </P @@ -128,17 +131,26 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > and then from the Windows NT server. </P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >passwd: files winbind group: files winbind </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN52" +NAME="AEN53" ></A ><H2 >OPTIONS</H2 @@ -177,7 +189,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN65" +NAME="AEN66" ></A ><H2 >NAME AND ID RESOLUTION</H2 @@ -208,7 +220,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN71" +NAME="AEN72" ></A ><H2 >CONFIGURATION</H2 @@ -243,7 +255,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" DOMAIN\username. In some cases this separator character may cause problems as the '\' character has special meaning in unix shells. In that case you can use the winbind separator - option to specify an alternative sepataror character. Good + option to specify an alternative separator character. Good alternatives may be '/' (although that conflicts with the unix directory separator) or a '+ 'character. The '+' character appears to be the best choice for 100% @@ -267,12 +279,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P >The winbind uid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are allocated by the winbindd daemon. - This range of ids should have no existing local or nis users + This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise. </P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->winbind uid = <empty string> +>winbind uid = <empty string> </B ></P ><P @@ -287,12 +299,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P >The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated by the winbindd daemon. - This range of group ids should have no existing local or nis + This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</P ><P >Default: <B CLASS="COMMAND" ->winbind gid = <empty string> +>winbind gid = <empty string> </B ></P ><P @@ -310,7 +322,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" seconds the winbindd daemon will cache user and group information before querying a Windows NT server again. When a item in the cache is older than this time winbindd will ask the domain - controller for the sequence number of the servers account database. + controller for the sequence number of the server's account database. If the sequence number has not changed then the cached item is marked as valid for a further <TT CLASS="PARAMETER" @@ -363,11 +375,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > system call will not return any data. </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Warning:</I +><EM +>Warning:</EM > Turning off user enumeration - may cause some programs to behave oddly. For example, the finger + may cause some programs to behave oddly. For example, the <B +CLASS="COMMAND" +>finger</B +> program relies on having access to the full user list when searching for matching usernames. </P ><P @@ -404,9 +418,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" > system call will not return any data. </P ><P -><I -CLASS="EMPHASIS" ->Warning:</I +><EM +>Warning:</EM > Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly. </P @@ -472,7 +485,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN152" +NAME="AEN154" ></A ><H2 >EXAMPLE SETUP</H2 @@ -487,11 +500,20 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" > put the following:</P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >passwd: files winbind group: files winbind </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >In <TT @@ -505,6 +527,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" ></TT > lines with something like this: </P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >auth required /lib/security/pam_securetty.so @@ -512,6 +540,9 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_nologin.so auth sufficient /lib/security/pam_winbind.so auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Note in particular the use of the <TT @@ -552,7 +583,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER" >-U</I ></TT > can be any Domain - user that has administrator priviliges on the machine. Next from + user that has administrator privileges on the machine. Next from within <B CLASS="COMMAND" >samedit</B @@ -568,7 +599,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><P >Next copy <TT CLASS="FILENAME" ->libnss_winbind.so.2</TT +>libnss_winbind.so</TT > to <TT CLASS="FILENAME" @@ -580,11 +611,33 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" to <TT CLASS="FILENAME" >/lib/security</TT +>. A symbolic link needs to be + made from <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/lib/libnss_winbind.so</TT +> to + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/lib/libnss_winbind.so.2</TT +>. If you are using an + older version of glibc then the target of the link should be + <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>/lib/libnss_winbind.so.1</TT >.</P ><P ->Finally, setup a smb.conf containing directives like the +>Finally, setup a <TT +CLASS="FILENAME" +>smb.conf</TT +> containing directives like the following: </P ><P +><TABLE +BORDER="0" +BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0" +WIDTH="100%" +><TR +><TD ><PRE CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" >[global] @@ -598,6 +651,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING" security = domain password server = * </PRE +></TD +></TR +></TABLE ></P ><P >Now start winbindd and you should find that your user and @@ -616,7 +672,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN191" +NAME="AEN197" ></A ><H2 >Notes</H2 @@ -676,7 +732,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN207" +NAME="AEN213" ></A ><H2 >Signals</H2 @@ -727,7 +783,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN224" +NAME="AEN230" ></A ><H2 >Files</H2 @@ -801,19 +857,19 @@ CLASS="FILENAME" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN253" +NAME="AEN259" ></A ><H2 >VERSION</H2 ><P >This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite. winbindd is however not available in - stable release of Samba as of yet.</P + the stable release of Samba as of yet.</P ></DIV ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN256" +NAME="AEN262" ></A ><H2 >SEE ALSO</H2 @@ -841,7 +897,7 @@ TARGET="_top" ><DIV CLASS="REFSECT1" ><A -NAME="AEN263" +NAME="AEN269" ></A ><H2 >AUTHOR</H2 |